[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2020029890A1 - Method for receiving reference signal, and communication apparatus - Google Patents

Method for receiving reference signal, and communication apparatus Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2020029890A1
WO2020029890A1 PCT/CN2019/099099 CN2019099099W WO2020029890A1 WO 2020029890 A1 WO2020029890 A1 WO 2020029890A1 CN 2019099099 W CN2019099099 W CN 2019099099W WO 2020029890 A1 WO2020029890 A1 WO 2020029890A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
reference signal
period
terminal device
drx
uplink channel
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Ceased
Application number
PCT/CN2019/099099
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
刘建琴
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Original Assignee
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Huawei Technologies Co Ltd filed Critical Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Publication of WO2020029890A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020029890A1/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Ceased legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00Connection management
    • H04W76/20Manipulation of established connections
    • H04W76/28Discontinuous transmission [DTX]; Discontinuous reception [DRX]
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L1/00Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L1/00Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
    • H04L1/12Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using return channel
    • H04L1/16Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using return channel in which the return channel carries supervisory signals, e.g. repetition request signals
    • H04L1/18Automatic repetition systems, e.g. Van Duuren systems
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0048Allocation of pilot signals, i.e. of signals known to the receiver
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W24/00Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements
    • H04W24/10Scheduling measurement reports ; Arrangements for measurement reports
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W52/00Power management, e.g. Transmission Power Control [TPC] or power classes
    • H04W52/02Power saving arrangements
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/04Wireless resource allocation
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L1/00Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
    • H04L1/12Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using return channel
    • H04L1/16Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using return channel in which the return channel carries supervisory signals, e.g. repetition request signals
    • H04L1/18Automatic repetition systems, e.g. Van Duuren systems
    • H04L1/1867Arrangements specially adapted for the transmitter end
    • H04L1/189Transmission or retransmission of more than one copy of a message
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0091Signalling for the administration of the divided path, e.g. signalling of configuration information
    • H04L5/0094Indication of how sub-channels of the path are allocated
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W28/00Network traffic management; Network resource management
    • H04W28/02Traffic management, e.g. flow control or congestion control
    • H04W28/04Error control
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W52/00Power management, e.g. Transmission Power Control [TPC] or power classes
    • H04W52/02Power saving arrangements
    • H04W52/0209Power saving arrangements in terminal devices
    • H04W52/0212Power saving arrangements in terminal devices managed by the network, e.g. network or access point is leader and terminal is follower
    • H04W52/0216Power saving arrangements in terminal devices managed by the network, e.g. network or access point is leader and terminal is follower using a pre-established activity schedule, e.g. traffic indication frame
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W52/00Power management, e.g. Transmission Power Control [TPC] or power classes
    • H04W52/02Power saving arrangements
    • H04W52/0209Power saving arrangements in terminal devices
    • H04W52/0225Power saving arrangements in terminal devices using monitoring of external events, e.g. the presence of a signal
    • H04W52/0248Power saving arrangements in terminal devices using monitoring of external events, e.g. the presence of a signal dependent on the time of the day, e.g. according to expected transmission activity
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/04Wireless resource allocation
    • H04W72/044Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource
    • H04W72/0446Resources in time domain, e.g. slots or frames
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/04Wireless resource allocation
    • H04W72/044Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource
    • H04W72/046Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource the resource being in the space domain, e.g. beams
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/20Control channels or signalling for resource management
    • H04W72/23Control channels or signalling for resource management in the downlink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards a terminal
    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02DCLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES IN INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES [ICT], I.E. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES AIMING AT THE REDUCTION OF THEIR OWN ENERGY USE
    • Y02D30/00Reducing energy consumption in communication networks
    • Y02D30/70Reducing energy consumption in communication networks in wireless communication networks

Definitions

  • the embodiments of the present application relate to the field of communications, and more specifically, to a method for receiving a reference signal, a method for transmitting a reference signal, a method for transmitting an uplink channel, a method for receiving an uplink channel, and a communication device.
  • High-frequency bands especially millimeter-wave bands, with larger available bandwidth are increasingly becoming candidate bands for next-generation communication systems.
  • the high-frequency band will cause greater path loss, especially the influence of factors such as the atmosphere and vegetation, which will further exacerbate the loss of wireless propagation.
  • a signal transmission mechanism based on beamforming technology is adopted to compensate the above-mentioned loss in the signal propagation process through a large antenna gain.
  • the signal is transmitted based on the beamforming technology
  • the direction of the shaped beam corresponding to the transmitted signal no longer matches the position of the user after the movement, and the received signal is frequently interrupted.
  • a channel quality measurement and result reporting based on the beamforming technique is introduced.
  • the measurement of the channel quality may be based on a reference signal after beamforming.
  • a discontinuous reception (DRX) technology is proposed, that is, in the DRX mode, the terminal device can periodically enter a sleep state (sleep mode) in certain periods.
  • a sleep state sleep state
  • PDCCH physical downlink control channel
  • the shaped beam used by the terminal device may be changed due to movement and other reasons.
  • the terminal device is in the awake state during the period # 1, and the terminal device # 1 may complete the channel quality measurement based on the reference signal received by the beam # 1 during the period # 1, and then determine to use the beam # 1 for communication.
  • the terminal device enters the sleep state, and during the period # 2, the terminal device moves and leaves the coverage of the beam # 1.
  • the terminal device wakes up again, the information of the beam # 1 becomes invalid, or the terminal device cannot communicate based on the beam # 1, thereby causing communication errors, reducing the reliability of the communication, and severely affecting user experience.
  • the present application provides a method for receiving a downlink reference signal, a method for sending a downlink reference signal, a method for sending an uplink channel, a method for receiving an uplink channel, and a communication device, which can improve communication reliability and improve user experience.
  • a method for receiving a reference signal including: a terminal device receiving configuration information from a network device, the configuration information used to indicate a configuration parameter of the reference signal, wherein the configuration parameter of the reference signal is based on the terminal device.
  • the configuration parameters of the discontinuous reception DRX mode are determined, or the configuration parameters of the DRX mode are determined according to the configuration parameters of the reference signal; the terminal device receives the reference signal from the network device according to the configuration parameters of the reference signal.
  • the reference signal may include a reference signal.
  • the possibility of the terminal device completing beam training and channel quality measurement during the wake-up period can be improved, that is, the terminal device can be improved during wake-up
  • the possibility of obtaining information of the usable beams during this period can improve the reliability of communication and improve the user experience.
  • beam can be understood as a spatial filter or a spatial parameter.
  • the spatial filter may be at least one of the following: precoding, the weight of the antenna port, the phase deflection of the antenna port, and the amplitude gain of the antenna port.
  • beam can be understood as a reference signal, such as a channel state information reference signal used for downlink channel measurement.
  • the configuration parameter of the reference signal includes a sending period T1 of the reference signal.
  • the configuration parameter of the DRX mode includes a period T2 of the DRX.
  • a DRX cycle may include a wake-up period and a sleep period.
  • the period T2 of the DRX can also be understood as the appearance period of the wake-up period in the DRX mode.
  • the wake-up period may include a period during which a duration timer is running.
  • the wake-up period may include a period during which a DRX-inactivity timer (drx-inactivity timer) runs.
  • the wake-up period may include a period during which a retransmission timer (ReTransmission Timer) runs.
  • ReTransmission Timer a retransmission timer
  • the sending period of the reference signal can also be understood as a time interval between sending periods of two neighboring reference signals of the same configuration.
  • the value of P may be predefined by a communication system or a communication protocol.
  • the value of P may be determined by the network device and delivered to the terminal device through, for example, high-level signaling.
  • the value of P may be predefined by a communication system or a communication protocol.
  • the value of P may be determined by the network device and delivered to the terminal device through, for example, high-level signaling.
  • start time of the first DRX cycle and the start time of the first reference signal transmission cycle may be the same.
  • the configuration parameter of the reference signal includes a time domain position offset S1 of the reference signal.
  • the base station may configure K reference signals for the UE, where K is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and when K is greater than 1, different reference signals may have different time domain position offsets.
  • the configuration parameters of the DRX mode include a time domain position offset S2 of a wake-up period of the DRX mode.
  • the S1 may be used to determine a transmission start time of a reference signal, or the S1 may be used to determine a start time of a reference signal transmission period.
  • S2 can be used to determine the start time of the DRX cycle.
  • S2 may be used to determine a start time of a wake-up period within a DRX cycle.
  • the time domain position offset S1 of the reference signal may refer to an offset of a start time of a reference signal transmission period from a preset reference time.
  • the reference time may be the first time slot in a system frame, or any other fixed time point, which is not specifically limited herein.
  • the time domain position offset S1 of the reference signal may be used to determine the starting time of the reference signal.
  • the time domain position offset S2 of the wake-up period in the DRX mode can be used to determine the start time of the wake-up period in the DRX mode.
  • the values of S1 and S2 may be smaller than the values of T1 and T2, respectively.
  • the system time domain range may be divided into multiple time units.
  • the time unit may include a symbol, a slot, a mini-slot, or a non-slot, a subframe, a transmission time interval, or a short transmission. time interval.
  • the time domain position offset S1 of the reference signal may refer to a start time unit (for example, a start subframe) of transmission of the reference signal.
  • the time domain position offset S1 of the reference signal may refer to an offset of a transmission time of the reference signal with respect to a start time of the transmission period in each reference signal transmission period. .
  • the time domain position offset S1 of the reference signal It can be the difference between t # 2 and t # 1.
  • each reference signal transmission period may include multiple time units.
  • the time domain position offset S1 of the reference signal may refer to each reference signal transmission period. Sequence numbers of time units corresponding to the sending period of the reference signal in a plurality of time units included in the sending period.
  • the time domain position offset S1 of the reference signal may be k, where k is a positive integer or zero.
  • the time domain position offset S1 of the reference signal may refer to an offset of a start time of the first reference signal transmission period from a predetermined system reference time. That is, in this application, the transmission time of the reference signal may coincide with the start time of the transmission cycle of the reference signal.
  • the unit of S1 in this application may be a slot.
  • the time domain position offset S2 of the wake-up period of the DRX mode may refer to an offset of a start time of the wake-up period of the DRX from a preset reference time.
  • the system time domain range may be divided into multiple time units.
  • the time domain position offset S2 of the wake-up period of the DRX mode may refer to a start time unit (for example, a start subframe) of a period of the DRX.
  • the time domain position offset S2 of the wake-up period of the DRX mode may refer to an offset of the wake-up period with respect to a start time of the DRX cycle in each DRX cycle.
  • each DRX cycle may include multiple time units.
  • the time domain position offset S2 of the wake-up period of the DRX mode may refer to each DRX cycle. Sequence numbers of time units corresponding to the wake-up period in a plurality of time units included in the DRX cycle.
  • the time-domain position offset S2 of the wake-up period of the DRX mode may be h, where h is a positive integer or zero.
  • the unit of the time unit in the sending cycle of the reference signal is the same as the unit of the time unit in the cycle of DRX, for example, the time unit in the sending cycle of the reference signal and the cycle of DRX
  • the time units in are all symbols. Or, for example, the time unit in the transmission period of the reference signal and the time unit in the period of DRX are both time slots.
  • the time domain position offset S2 of the wake-up period of the DRX mode may refer to an offset of a start time of the first DRX cycle from a predetermined system reference time. That is, in this application, the start time of the wake-up period of the DRX mode may coincide with the start time of the DRX cycle in which it is located.
  • the offset that S2 can (specifically, the offset of the start position of the DRX cycle in the time domain) is denoted as drx-StartOffset, and, By way of example and not limitation, the unit of the drx-StartOffset may be milliseconds.
  • the S2 may include an offset of the wake-up period (specifically, an offset of a start position of the wake-up period within a DRX cycle), which is denoted as drx-SlotOffset, and, as an example Without limitation, the unit of the drx-SlotOffset may be a slot.
  • S2 may be an offset for determining a start time of a wake-up period, and is denoted as drx-StartOffset, and, as an example and not limitation, The unit can be milliseconds.
  • the wake-up period may include, but is not limited to, a period corresponding to at least one of the on-duration timers, drx-inactivity timers, and DRX Retransmission timers.
  • the transmission start time of the reference signal determined based on the S1 is not earlier than the start time of the DRX cycle determined based on the S2.
  • the starting time of the cycle #a may be determined based on the S2 (or the sending time of the reference signal may be determined based on the S2), and the starting time of the cycle #b may be determined based on S1, where the cycle # b's
  • the start time may be the same as the start time of the cycle #a, or the start time of the cycle #b may be located after the start time of the cycle #a.
  • the start time of the cycle #a may be determined based on the S2, and the start time of the wake-up period in the cycle #b may be determined based on S1, where the start time of the wake-up period in the cycle #b may be related to the The start time of the cycle #a is the same, or the start time of the wake-up period in the cycle #b may be after the start time of the cycle #a.
  • a time interval between a transmission start of the reference signal determined based on the S1 and a start time of the DRX cycle determined based on the S2 is less than or equal to a length of a wake-up period of the DRX mode.
  • the start time of the period #b falls within the wake-up period in the period #b.
  • the time domain position offset of at least one of the K reference signals is greater than or equal to the time domain position offset of the wake-up period of the DRX mode.
  • the time domain position offset of at least one reference signal in the K reference signals is such that the time domain position of the at least one reference signal is located in the wake-up period of the DRX mode.
  • the start time of the reference signal transmission period within the period #b of the reference signal is after the start time of the wake-up period of the period #a of the DRX.
  • S1 and S2 are mainly used to implement that the sending period of at least one of the K reference signals is not earlier than the wake-up period in the DRX cycle.
  • the time units (such as milliseconds, time slots, symbols, and so on) and representations used to characterize S1 and S2 may be the same or different, and are not specifically limited here.
  • S1 is greater than or equal to S2, which refers to the comparison between S1 and S2 based on the same reference standard and / or time unit.
  • the start time of the reference signal transmission period within the period #b of the reference signal is before the end time of the wake-up period of the period #a of the DRX.
  • the transmission period of the reference signal is within the wake-up period of the DRX within the DRX cycle and the reference signal transmission cycle at the same starting time, thereby ensuring that the terminal device receives the reference signal reliably.
  • the network device may send configuration information of K reference signals for the terminal device, where the reference signal having a corresponding relationship between the configuration parameter and the configuration parameter of the DRX mode may be one or more of the K reference signals .
  • K is an integer greater than or equal to two.
  • the K reference signals may further include one or more reference signals whose configuration parameters are not related to the configuration parameters of the DRX mode.
  • a method for sending a reference signal which includes: a network device sends configuration information to a terminal device, where the configuration information is used to indicate a configuration parameter of the reference signal, wherein the configuration parameter of the reference signal is The discontinuous reception DRX mode configuration parameters of the terminal device are determined, or the DRX mode configuration parameters are determined by the network device according to the configuration parameters of the reference signal; the network device reports the configuration parameters to the reference signal according to the configuration parameters of the reference signal.
  • the terminal device sends a reference signal.
  • the reference signal may include a downlink reference signal
  • the possibility that the terminal device completes beam training and channel quality measurement during the wake-up period can be improved, that is, the terminal device can obtain
  • the possibility of using available beam information can improve the reliability of communication and improve the user experience.
  • beam can be understood as a spatial filter or a spatial parameter.
  • the spatial filter may be at least one of the following: precoding, the weight of the antenna port, the phase deflection of the antenna port, and the amplitude gain of the antenna port.
  • beam can be understood as a reference signal, such as a channel state information reference signal used for downlink channel measurement.
  • the configuration parameter of the reference signal includes a sending period T1 of the reference signal.
  • the configuration parameter of the DRX mode includes a period T2 of the DRX.
  • a DRX cycle may include a wake-up period and a sleep period.
  • the period T2 of the DRX can also be understood as the appearance period of the wake-up period in the DRX mode.
  • the wake-up period may include a period in which the duration timer runs.
  • the wake-up period may include a period during which the DRX inactive timer runs.
  • the wake-up period may include a period during which the retransmission timer runs.
  • the sending period of the reference signal can also be understood as a time interval between sending periods of two adjacent reference signals.
  • the value of P may be predefined by a communication system or a communication protocol.
  • the value of P may be determined by the network device and delivered to the terminal device through, for example, high-level signaling.
  • the value of Q may be predefined by a communication system or a communication protocol.
  • the value of Q may be determined by the network device and delivered to the terminal device through, for example, high-level signaling.
  • start time of the first DRX cycle and the start time of the first reference signal transmission cycle may be the same.
  • the configuration parameter of the reference signal includes a time domain position offset S1 of the reference signal.
  • the base station may configure K reference signals for the UE, where K is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and when K is greater than 1, different reference signals may have different time domain position offsets.
  • the configuration parameters of the DRX mode include a time domain position offset S2 of a wake-up period of the DRX mode.
  • the time domain position offset of at least one of the K reference signals is greater than or equal to the time domain position offset of the wake-up period of the DRX mode.
  • the time domain position offset of at least one reference signal in the K reference signals is such that the time domain position of the at least one reference signal is located in the wake-up period of the DRX mode.
  • the time domain position offset S1 of the reference signal may refer to an offset of a transmission period of the reference signal with respect to a start time of the transmission period within each transmission period of the reference signal.
  • the time-domain position offset S1 of the reference signal may be used to determine a start time of the reference signal.
  • the time domain position offset S2 of the wake-up period in the DRX mode can be used to determine the start time of the wake-up period in the DRX mode.
  • the values of S1 and S2 may be smaller than the values of T1 and T2, respectively.
  • the time domain position offset of the reference signal S1 can be the difference between t # 2 and t # 1.
  • each reference signal transmission period may include multiple time units.
  • the time domain position offset S1 of the reference signal may refer to each reference signal transmission period. Sequence numbers of time units corresponding to the sending period of the reference signal in a plurality of time units included in the sending period.
  • the time unit may include a symbol, a time slot, a mini time slot, a transmission time interval, or a short transmission time interval.
  • the time domain position offset S1 of the reference signal may be k, where k is a positive integer or zero.
  • the unit of S1 may include a slot.
  • the time domain position offset S2 of the wake-up period of the DRX mode may refer to an offset of the wake-up period with respect to a start time of the DRX cycle in each DRX cycle.
  • each DRX cycle may include multiple time units.
  • the time domain position offset S2 of the wake-up period of the DRX mode may refer to each DRX cycle. Sequence numbers of time units corresponding to the wake-up period in a plurality of time units included in the DRX cycle.
  • the time-domain position offset S2 of the wake-up period of the DRX mode may be h, where h is Positive integer or zero.
  • the unit of the time unit in the sending cycle of the reference signal is the same as the unit of the time unit in the cycle of DRX, for example, the time unit in the sending cycle of the reference signal and the cycle of DRX
  • the time units in are all symbols.
  • the time unit in the sending period of the reference signal and the time unit in the DRX cycle are both time slots or subframes, or any other time unit, which are not specifically limited herein.
  • the S2 may include the offset of the DRX cycle (specifically, the offset of the start position of the DRX cycle in the time domain), which is denoted as drx-StartOffset And, as an example and not limitation, the unit of the drx-StartOffset may be milliseconds.
  • the S2 may include an offset of the wake-up period (specifically, an offset of a start position of the wake-up period within a DRX cycle), which is denoted as drx-SlotOffset, and, as an example, Without limitation, the unit of the drx-SlotOffset may be a slot.
  • the wake-up period may include, but is not limited to, a period corresponding to at least one of the on-duration timers, drx-inactivity timers, and DRX Retransmission timers.
  • the time length corresponding to S1 is greater than or equal to the time length corresponding to S2.
  • the start time of the reference signal transmission period within the period #b of the reference signal is after the start time of the wake-up period of the period #a of the DRX.
  • S1 and S2 are mainly used to implement that the sending period of at least one of the K reference signals is not earlier than the wake-up period in the DRX cycle.
  • the time units (such as milliseconds, time slots, symbols, and so on) and representations used to characterize S1 and S2 may be the same or different, and are not specifically limited here.
  • S1 is greater than or equal to S2, which refers to the comparison between S1 and S2 based on the same reference standard and / or time unit.
  • the S1 may be used to determine a transmission start time of a reference signal, or the S1 may be used to determine a start time of a reference signal transmission period.
  • S2 can be used to determine the start time of the DRX cycle.
  • S2 may be used to determine a start time of a wake-up period within a DRX cycle.
  • the transmission start time of the reference signal determined based on the S1 is not earlier than the start time of the DRX cycle determined based on the S2.
  • the starting time of the cycle #a may be determined based on the S2 (or the sending time of the reference signal may be determined based on the S2), and the starting time of the cycle #b may be determined based on S1, where the cycle # b's
  • the start time may be the same as the start time of the cycle #a, or the start time of the cycle #b may be located after the start time of the cycle #a.
  • the start time of the cycle #a may be determined based on the S2, and the start time of the wake-up period in the cycle #b may be determined based on S1, where the start time of the wake-up period in the cycle #b may be related to the The start time of the cycle #a is the same, or the start time of the wake-up period in the cycle #b may be after the start time of the cycle #a.
  • a time interval between the transmission start of the reference signal determined based on the S1 and the start time of the DRX cycle determined based on the S2 is less than or equal to the length of the wake-up period of the DRX mode.
  • the start time of the period #b falls within the wake-up period in the period #b.
  • the difference between the time length corresponding to S1 and the time length corresponding to S2 is less than or equal to the time length of the wake-up period of the DRX mode.
  • the start time of the reference signal transmission period within the period #b of the reference signal is after the start time of the wake-up period of the period #a of the DRX.
  • the start time of the reference signal transmission period within the period #b of the reference signal is before the end time of the wake-up period of the period #a of the DRX.
  • the transmission period of the reference signal is within the wake-up period of the DRX within the DRX cycle and the reference signal transmission cycle at the same starting time, thereby ensuring that the terminal device receives the reference signal reliably.
  • the network device may send configuration information of K reference signals for the terminal device, where the reference signal having a corresponding relationship between the configuration parameter and the configuration parameter of the DRX mode may be one or more of the K reference signals .
  • K is an integer greater than or equal to two.
  • the K reference signals may further include one or more reference signals whose configuration parameters are not related to the configuration parameters of the DRX mode.
  • a method for transmitting an uplink channel including: receiving, by a terminal device, indication information of a first number of repetitions from a network device, where the first number of repetitions belongs to a first number of repetitions set, and the first number of repetitions set includes at least one The number of repetitions, the first set of repetition times is dedicated to a discontinuous reception DRX mode; the terminal device sends an uplink channel according to the first number of repetitions during a period in the DRX mode.
  • sending an uplink channel can be understood as sending information or signals on the uplink channel, for example, reference signals, data, or control information.
  • the uplink channel is used to carry channel quality information.
  • beam can be understood as a spatial filter or a spatial parameter.
  • the spatial filter may be at least one of the following: precoding, the weight of the antenna port, the phase deflection of the antenna port, and the amplitude gain of the antenna port.
  • beam can be understood as a reference signal, such as a channel state information reference signal used for downlink channel measurement.
  • the first set of repetition times is dedicated to the discontinuous reception DRX mode. It can be understood that the first set of repetition times is used only in the DRX mode and cannot be used in the non-DRX mode.
  • the first set of repetition times is dedicated to the discontinuous reception DRX mode. It can be understood that the use of the second set of repetition times does not distinguish between DRX mode and non-DRX mode, that is, the second set of repetition times is under the use of DRX mode and non-DRX mode Both can be used, and the use of the first set of repetition times needs to distinguish between DRX mode and non-DRX mode, that is, the first set of repetition times is not used in non-DRX mode, and the first set of repetition times can be used in DRX mode.
  • the first set of repetition times dedicated to the discontinuous reception DRX mode can be understood as the set of repetition times used in the DRX mode (that is, the first set of repetition times) and the set of repetition times used in the non-DRX mode (that is, the first The set of two repetitions) is different.
  • the maximum number of repetitions in the first set of repetitions is greater than or equal to the maximum number of repetitions in the second set of repetitions, and the second set of repetitions includes at least one number of repetitions.
  • the second set of repetitions includes at least one number of repetitions.
  • the first set of repetition times dedicated to the discontinuous reception DRX mode can be understood as the set of repetition times used in the DRX mode (ie, the first set of repetition times) relative to the set of repetition times used in the non-DRX mode (ie, The second set of repetition times) is independently configured.
  • the uplink channel is transmitted in a non-repeating transmission manner, which is equivalent to the number of repetitions of the uplink channel being 1.
  • the first set of repetition times is dedicated to the discontinuous reception DRX mode.
  • the transmission quality information can be transmitted in a repeated transmission mode (that is, a transmission mode based on the first set of repetition times).
  • a non-repeated transmission mode (or a one-time transmission mode) can be used to transmit channel quality information.
  • the terminal device sending an uplink channel according to the first repetition number during a period in the DRX mode includes: the terminal device receiving a beam of the uplink channel during the period in the DRX mode Before the indication information, the uplink channel is sent according to the first repetition number.
  • the method further includes: after the terminal device is in the DRX mode, after receiving the beam indication information of the uplink channel, sending the confirmation information to the network device, the confirmation information is used to instruct the terminal
  • the device receives the beam indication information of the uplink channel; the terminal device sends the uplink channel according to a second repetition number, the second repetition number belongs to a second repetition number set, the second repetition number set includes at least one repetition number, and the second The repetition set is dedicated to non-DRX mode.
  • the "beam instruction information" in the “beam instruction information used to indicate that the terminal device receives the uplink channel” refers to the same beam instruction information, that is, the beam instruction information of a beam used by the terminal device for the uplink channel to be transmitted.
  • the terminal device in the DRX mode By enabling the terminal device in the DRX mode to transmit the uplink channel with a small number of repeated transmissions after receiving the beam indication information of the uplink channel, power consumption can be reduced.
  • the method further includes: after the terminal device is in the DRX mode, after receiving the beam indication information of the uplink channel, sending the confirmation information to the network device, the confirmation information is used to instruct the terminal
  • the device receives the beam indication information of the uplink channel; the terminal device sends the uplink channel in a non-repeating transmission manner.
  • the terminal device By enabling the terminal device to send the uplink channel in a non-repeating transmission manner after receiving the beam indication information of the uplink channel in the DRX mode, power consumption and resource waste caused by repeatedly sending the uplink channel can be reduced.
  • a method for receiving an uplink channel including: sending, by a network device, indication information of a first repetition number to a terminal device, where the first repetition number belongs to a first repetition number set, and the first repetition number set includes at least one The number of repetitions, the first set of repetition times is dedicated to the discontinuous reception DRX mode; the network device receives the uplink channel according to the first number of repetitions while the terminal device is in the DRX mode.
  • receiving an uplink channel can be understood as receiving information or signals on the uplink channel, for example, reference signals, data, or control information.
  • the uplink channel is used to carry channel quality information.
  • beam can be understood as a spatial filter or a spatial parameter.
  • the spatial filter may be at least one of the following: precoding, the weight of the antenna port, the phase deflection of the antenna port, and the amplitude gain of the antenna port.
  • beam can be understood as a reference signal, such as a channel state information reference signal used for downlink channel measurement.
  • the first set of repetition times is dedicated to the discontinuous reception DRX mode. It can be understood that the first set of repetition times is used only in the DRX mode and cannot be used in the non-DRX mode.
  • the first set of repetition times dedicated to the discontinuous reception DRX mode can be understood as the set of repetition times used in the DRX mode (that is, the first set of repetition times) and the set of repetition times used in the non-DRX mode (that is, the first The set of two repetitions) is different.
  • the maximum number of repetitions in the first set of repetitions is greater than or equal to the maximum number of repetitions in the second set of repetitions, and the second set of repetitions includes at least one number of repetitions.
  • the second set of repetition times is not dedicated to DRX mode.
  • the first set of repetition times dedicated to the discontinuous reception DRX mode can be understood as the set of repetition times used in the DRX mode (ie, the first set of repetition times) relative to the set of repetition times used in the non-DRX mode (ie, The second set of repetition times) is independently configured.
  • the uplink channel is transmitted in a non-repeating transmission manner, which is equivalent to the number of repetitions of the uplink channel being 1.
  • the first set of repetition times is dedicated to the discontinuous reception DRX mode.
  • the transmission quality information can be transmitted in a repeated transmission mode (that is, a transmission mode based on the first set of repetition times).
  • a non-repeated transmission mode (or a one-time transmission mode) can be used to transmit channel quality information.
  • the network device sends beam indication information of the uplink channel to the terminal device; and the network device receives the uplink channel according to the first set of repetition times while the terminal device is in the DRX mode, including: : During the period when the terminal device is in the DRX mode, the network device receives an uplink channel according to the first repetition number before receiving the confirmation information sent by the terminal device, and the confirmation information is used to instruct the terminal device to receive Beam indication information of the uplink channel.
  • the method further includes: the network device sends beam indication information of the uplink channel to the terminal device; the network device receives a confirmation sent by the terminal device during a period when the terminal device is in the DRX mode After the information is received, the uplink channel is received according to a second repetition number, which belongs to a second repetition number set, the second repetition number set includes at least one repetition number, the second repetition number set is used in a non-DRX mode, the confirmation The information is used to indicate that the terminal device receives beam indication information of the uplink channel.
  • the terminal device in the DRX mode By enabling the terminal device in the DRX mode to transmit the uplink channel with a small number of repeated transmissions after receiving the beam indication information of the uplink channel, power consumption can be reduced.
  • the method further includes: the network device sends beam indication information of the uplink channel to the terminal device; the network device receives a confirmation sent by the terminal device during a period when the terminal device is in the DRX mode After the information is received, the uplink channel is received in a non-repeated transmission manner, and the confirmation information is used to indicate that the terminal device receives beam indication information of the uplink channel.
  • the terminal device By enabling the terminal device to send the uplink channel in a non-repeating transmission manner after receiving the beam indication information of the uplink channel in the DRX mode, power consumption caused by repeatedly sending the uplink channel can be reduced.
  • a method for sending an uplink channel including: a terminal device receiving configuration information from a network device, where the configuration information is used to indicate a configuration parameter of the uplink channel, wherein the configuration parameter of the uplink channel is based on the terminal device.
  • the configuration parameters of the discontinuous reception DRX mode are determined, or the configuration parameters of the DRX mode are determined according to the configuration parameters of the uplink channel; the terminal device sends the uplink channel to the network device according to the configuration parameters of the uplink channel.
  • the “sending uplink channel” can be understood as sending information or signals on the uplink channel, for example, data, control information, or reference signals.
  • the uplink channel is used to carry a sounding reference signal (SRS).
  • SRS sounding reference signal
  • the uplink channel is used to carry channel quality information.
  • the channel quality information may be determined after the terminal device performs channel quality measurement according to the downlink reference signal sent by the network device.
  • the possibility that the terminal device completes beam training and channel quality measurement during the wake-up period can be improved, that is, the terminal device can be obtained during the wake-up period.
  • the possibility of using available beam information can improve the reliability of communication and improve the user experience.
  • beam can be understood as a spatial filter or a spatial parameter.
  • the spatial filter may be at least one of the following: precoding, the weight of the antenna port, the phase deflection of the antenna port, and the amplitude gain of the antenna port.
  • beam can be understood as a reference signal, such as a channel state information reference signal used for downlink channel measurement.
  • the configuration parameter of the uplink channel includes a sending period T1 of the uplink channel.
  • the configuration parameter of the DRX mode includes a period T2 of the DRX.
  • a DRX cycle may include a wake-up period and a sleep period.
  • the period T2 of the DRX can also be understood as the appearance period of the wake-up period in the DRX mode.
  • the wake-up period may include a period in which the duration timer runs.
  • the wake-up period may include a period during which the DRX inactive timer runs.
  • the wake-up period may include a period during which the retransmission timer runs.
  • the transmission period of the uplink channel may also be understood as a time interval between transmission periods of two adjacent uplink channels with the same configuration.
  • the value of P may be predefined by a communication system or a communication protocol.
  • the value of P may be determined by the network device and delivered to the terminal device through, for example, high-level signaling.
  • the value of Q may be predefined by a communication system or a communication protocol.
  • the value of Q may be determined by the network device and delivered to the terminal device through, for example, high-level signaling.
  • start time of the first DRX cycle and the start time of the first uplink channel transmission cycle may be the same.
  • the configuration parameter of the uplink channel includes a time domain position offset S1 of the uplink channel.
  • the base station may configure K reference signals for the UE, where K is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and when K is greater than 1, different reference signals may have different time domain position offsets.
  • the configuration parameters of the DRX mode include a time domain position offset S2 of a wake-up period of the DRX mode.
  • the time domain position offset of at least one of the K reference signals is greater than or equal to the time domain position offset of the wake-up period of the DRX mode.
  • the time domain position offset of at least one reference signal in the K reference signals is such that the time domain position of the at least one reference signal is located in the wake-up period of the DRX mode.
  • the time domain position offset S1 of the uplink channel may refer to an offset of a transmission period of the uplink channel with respect to a start time of the transmission period in each uplink channel transmission period.
  • the time domain position offset S1 of the reference signal may refer to an offset of a start time of a reference signal transmission period from a preset reference time.
  • the reference time may be the first time slot in a system frame, or any other fixed time point, which is not specifically limited herein.
  • the time-domain position offset S1 of the reference signal may be used to determine a start time of the reference signal.
  • the time domain position offset S2 of the wake-up period in the DRX mode can be used to determine the start time of the wake-up period in the DRX mode.
  • the values of S1 and S2 may be smaller than the values of T1 and T2, respectively.
  • the transmission period of each uplink channel may include multiple time units.
  • the time domain position offset S1 of the uplink channel may refer to the transmission period of each uplink channel.
  • the time unit may include a symbol, a time slot, a mini time slot, a subframe, a transmission time interval, or a short transmission time interval.
  • the time domain position offset S1 of the uplink channel may be k, where k is a positive integer or zero.
  • the unit of S1 may include a slot.
  • the time domain position offset S2 of the wake-up period of the DRX mode may refer to an offset of the wake-up period with respect to a start time of the DRX cycle in each DRX cycle.
  • the start time of the DRX cycle #a be t # a and the start time of the wake-up period in the DRX cycle #a be t # b, then the time domain position offset S2 of the wake-up period of the DRX mode It can be the difference between t # b and t # a.
  • each DRX cycle may include multiple time units.
  • the time domain position offset S2 of the wake-up period of the DRX mode may refer to each DRX cycle. Sequence numbers of time units corresponding to the wake-up period in a plurality of time units included in the DRX cycle.
  • the time-domain position offset S2 of the wake-up period of the DRX mode may be h, where h is Positive integer or zero.
  • the unit of the time unit in the transmission cycle of the uplink channel is the same as the unit of the time unit in the cycle of DRX, for example, the time unit in the transmission cycle of the uplink channel and the cycle of DRX
  • the time units in are all symbols.
  • the time unit in the sending cycle of the uplink channel and the time unit in the DRX cycle are both time slots or subframes, or any other time unit, which are not specifically limited herein.
  • the S2 may include the offset of the DRX cycle (specifically, the offset of the start position of the DRX cycle in the time domain), which is denoted as drx-StartOffset And, as an example and not limitation, the unit of the drx-StartOffset may be milliseconds.
  • the S2 may include an offset of the wake-up period (specifically, an offset of a start position of the wake-up period within a DRX cycle), which is denoted as drx-SlotOffset, and, as an example, Without limitation, the unit of the drx-SlotOffset may be a slot.
  • the wake-up period may include, but is not limited to, a period corresponding to at least one of the on-duration timers, drx-inactivity timers, and DRX Retransmission timers.
  • the S1 may be used to determine a transmission start time of a reference signal, or the S1 may be used to determine a start time of a reference signal transmission period.
  • S2 can be used to determine the start time of the DRX cycle.
  • S2 may be used to determine a start time of a wake-up period within a DRX cycle.
  • the transmission start time of the reference signal determined based on the S1 is not earlier than the start time of the DRX cycle determined based on the S2.
  • the starting time of the cycle #a may be determined based on the S2 (or the sending time of the reference signal may be determined based on the S2), and the starting time of the cycle #b may be determined based on S1, where the cycle # b's
  • the start time may be the same as the start time of the cycle #a, or the start time of the cycle #b may be located after the start time of the cycle #a.
  • the start time of the cycle #a may be determined based on the S2, and the start time of the wake-up period in the cycle #b may be determined based on S1, where the start time of the wake-up period in the cycle #b may be related to the The start time of the cycle #a is the same, or the start time of the wake-up period in the cycle #b may be after the start time of the cycle #a.
  • a time interval between a transmission start of the reference signal determined based on the S1 and a start time of the DRX cycle determined based on the S2 is less than or equal to a length of a wake-up period of the DRX mode.
  • the start time of the period #b falls within the wake-up period in the period #b.
  • the start time of the reference signal transmission period within the period #b of the reference signal is after the start time of the wake-up period of the period #a of the DRX.
  • S1 and S2 are mainly used to implement that the sending period of at least one of the K reference signals is not earlier than the wake-up period in the DRX cycle.
  • the time units (such as milliseconds, time slots, symbols, and so on) and representations used to characterize S1 and S2 may be the same or different, and are not specifically limited here.
  • S1 is greater than or equal to S2, which refers to the comparison between S1 and S2 based on the same reference standard and / or time unit.
  • the difference between the time length corresponding to S1 and the time length corresponding to S2 is less than or equal to the time length of the wake-up period of the DRX mode.
  • the start time of the uplink channel transmission period within the period #b of the uplink channel is before the end time of the wake-up period of the period #a of the DRX.
  • S1 when the uplink channel is used to carry SRS, S1 may also be less than or equal to S2. That is, the uplink channel can be transmitted before the wake-up time of the DRX cycle.
  • the transmission period of the uplink channel is within the wake-up period of the DRX in the DRX cycle and the uplink channel transmission cycle at the same starting time, thereby ensuring that the terminal device reliably transmits to the uplink channel.
  • a method for receiving an uplink channel including: the network device sends configuration information to a terminal device, where the configuration information is used to indicate configuration parameters of the uplink channel, where the configuration parameters of the uplink channel are The terminal device's discontinuous reception DRX mode configuration parameter is determined, or the DRX mode configuration parameter is determined by the network device according to the configuration parameter of the uplink channel; the network device is determined from the configuration parameter of the uplink channel from the The terminal device receives the uplink channel.
  • the “receiving uplink channel” can be understood as receiving information or signals through the uplink channel, for example, data, control information, or reference signals.
  • the uplink channel is used to carry a sounding reference signal.
  • the uplink channel is used to carry channel quality information.
  • the channel quality information may be determined after the terminal device performs channel quality measurement according to the downlink reference signal sent by the network device.
  • the possibility that the terminal device completes beam training and channel quality measurement during the wake-up period can be improved, that is, the terminal device can be obtained
  • the possibility of using available beam information can improve the reliability of communication and improve the user experience.
  • beam can be understood as a spatial filter or a spatial parameter.
  • the spatial filter may be at least one of the following: precoding, the weight of the antenna port, the phase deflection of the antenna port, and the amplitude gain of the antenna port.
  • beam can be understood as a reference signal, such as a channel state information reference signal used for downlink channel measurement.
  • the configuration parameter of the uplink channel includes a sending period T1 of the uplink channel.
  • the configuration parameter of the DRX mode includes a period T2 of the DRX.
  • a DRX cycle may include a wake-up period and a sleep period.
  • the period T2 of the DRX can also be understood as the appearance period of the wake-up period in the DRX mode.
  • the wake-up period may include a period during which the timer is running.
  • the wake-up period may include a period during which the drx-inactivity timer is running.
  • the wake-up period may include a period during which the ReTransmission Timer is running.
  • the transmission period of the uplink channel may also be understood as a time interval between transmission periods of two adjacent uplink channels with the same configuration.
  • the value of P may be predefined by a communication system or a communication protocol.
  • the value of P may be determined by the network device and delivered to the terminal device through, for example, high-level signaling.
  • the value of Q may be predefined by a communication system or a communication protocol.
  • the value of Q may be determined by the network device and delivered to the terminal device through, for example, high-level signaling.
  • start time of the first DRX cycle and the start time of the first uplink channel transmission cycle may be the same.
  • the configuration parameter of the uplink channel includes a time domain position offset S1 of the uplink channel.
  • the base station may configure K reference signals for the UE, where K is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and when K is greater than 1, different reference signals may have different time domain position offsets.
  • the configuration parameters of the DRX mode include a time domain position offset S2 of a wake-up period of the DRX mode.
  • the time domain position offset of at least one of the K reference signals is greater than or equal to the time domain position offset of the wake-up period of the DRX mode.
  • the time domain position offset S1 of the uplink channel may refer to an offset of a transmission period of the uplink channel with respect to a start time of the transmission period in each uplink channel transmission period.
  • the time domain position offset S1 of the reference signal may refer to an offset of a start time of a reference signal transmission period from a preset reference time.
  • the reference time may be the first time slot in a system frame, or any other fixed time point, which is not specifically limited herein.
  • the time-domain position offset S1 of the reference signal may be used to determine a start time of the reference signal.
  • the time domain position offset S2 of the wake-up period in the DRX mode can be used to determine the start time of the wake-up period in the DRX mode.
  • the values of S1 and S2 may be smaller than the values of T1 and T2, respectively.
  • the time domain position offset of the uplink channel S1 can be the difference between t # 2 and t # 1.
  • the transmission period of each uplink channel may include multiple time units.
  • the time domain position offset S1 of the uplink channel may refer to the transmission period of each uplink channel. Sequence numbers of time units corresponding to the sending period of the uplink channel in a plurality of time units included in the sending period.
  • the time unit may include a symbol, a time slot, a mini time slot, a subframe, a transmission time interval, or a short transmission time interval.
  • the time domain position offset S1 of the uplink channel may be k, where k is a positive integer or zero.
  • the unit of S1 may include a slot.
  • the time domain position offset S2 of the wake-up period of the DRX mode may refer to an offset of the wake-up period with respect to a start time of the DRX cycle in each DRX cycle.
  • the start time of the DRX cycle #a be t # a and the start time of the wake-up period in the DRX cycle #a be t # b, then the time domain position offset S2 of the wake-up period of the DRX mode It can be the difference between t # b and t # a.
  • each DRX cycle may include multiple time units.
  • the time domain position offset S2 of the wake-up period of the DRX mode may refer to each DRX cycle. Sequence numbers of time units corresponding to the wake-up period in a plurality of time units included in the DRX cycle.
  • the time-domain position offset S2 of the wake-up period of the DRX mode may be h, where h is Positive integer or zero.
  • the unit of the time unit in the transmission cycle of the uplink channel is the same as the unit of the time unit in the cycle of DRX, for example, the time unit in the transmission cycle of the uplink channel and the cycle of DRX
  • the time units in are all symbols.
  • the time unit in the sending cycle of the uplink channel and the time unit in the DRX cycle are both time slots or subframes, or any other time unit, which are not specifically limited herein.
  • the S2 may include the offset of the DRX cycle (specifically, the offset of the start position of the DRX cycle in the time domain), which is denoted as drx-StartOffset And, as an example and not limitation, the unit of the drx-StartOffset may be milliseconds.
  • the S2 may include an offset of the wake-up period (specifically, an offset of a start position of the wake-up period within a DRX cycle), which is denoted as drx-SlotOffset, and, as an example, Without limitation, the unit of the drx-SlotOffset may be a slot.
  • the wake-up period may include, but is not limited to, a period corresponding to at least one of the on-duration timers, drx-inactivity timers, and DRX Retransmission timers.
  • the S1 may be used to determine a transmission start time of a reference signal, or the S1 may be used to determine a start time of a reference signal transmission period.
  • S2 can be used to determine the start time of the DRX cycle.
  • S2 may be used to determine a start time of a wake-up period within a DRX cycle.
  • the transmission start time of the reference signal determined based on the S1 is not earlier than the start time of the DRX cycle determined based on the S2.
  • the starting time of the cycle #a may be determined based on the S2 (or the sending time of the reference signal may be determined based on the S2), and the starting time of the cycle #b may be determined based on S1, where the cycle # b's
  • the start time may be the same as the start time of the cycle #a, or the start time of the cycle #b may be located after the start time of the cycle #a.
  • the start time of the cycle #a may be determined based on the S2, and the start time of the wake-up period in the cycle #b may be determined based on S1, where the start time of the wake-up period in the cycle #b may be related to the The start time of the cycle #a is the same, or the start time of the wake-up period in the cycle #b may be after the start time of the cycle #a.
  • a time interval between a transmission start of the reference signal determined based on the S1 and a start time of the DRX cycle determined based on the S2 is less than or equal to a length of a wake-up period of the DRX mode.
  • the start time of the period #b falls within the wake-up period in the period #b.
  • the start time of the reference signal transmission period within the period #b of the reference signal is after the start time of the wake-up period of the period #a of the DRX.
  • S1 and S2 are mainly used to implement that the sending period of at least one of the K reference signals is not earlier than the wake-up period in the DRX cycle.
  • the time units (such as milliseconds, time slots, symbols, and so on) and representations used to characterize S1 and S2 may be the same or different, and are not specifically limited here.
  • S1 is greater than or equal to S2, which refers to the comparison between S1 and S2 based on the same reference standard and / or time unit.
  • the start time of the uplink channel transmission period in the period #b of the uplink channel is after the start time of the wake-up period in the period #a of the DRX.
  • the start time of the uplink channel transmission period within the period #b of the uplink channel is before the end time of the wake-up period of the period #a of the DRX.
  • the transmission period of the uplink channel is within the wake-up period of the DRX in the same DRX cycle and the uplink channel transmission cycle, thereby ensuring that the terminal device reliably transmits the uplink channel.
  • a communication device including a unit for performing each step of the method in any one of the first to sixth aspects and the implementation methods thereof.
  • the wake-up period of DRX in the solution of the present application may include an On_duration time period dedicated to downlink control channel detection in the DRX cycle, and an uplink or downlink data transmission time period (Inactivity time period) and data after the PDCCH detects data transmission. Transmission of at least one of HARQ and RTT periods of acknowledgement.
  • the communication device is a communication chip
  • the communication chip may include an input circuit or interface for transmitting information or data, and an output circuit or interface for receiving information or data.
  • the communication device is a communication device (for example, a terminal device or a network device), and the communication chip may include a transmitter for transmitting information or data, and a receiver for receiving information or data.
  • a terminal device including a transceiver, a processor, and a memory.
  • the processor is used to control the transceiver to send and receive signals
  • the memory is used to store a computer program
  • the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that the terminal device executes the first aspect or any possible implementation manner of the first aspect Method, or the method in the third aspect or any one of the possible implementations of the third aspect, or the method in the fifth aspect or any one of the possible implementations of the fifth aspect.
  • processors there are one or more processors, and one or more memories.
  • the memory may be integrated with the processor, or the memory is separately provided from the processor.
  • a network device including a transceiver, a processor, and a memory.
  • the processor is used to control the transceiver to send and receive signals
  • the memory is used to store a computer program
  • the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that the network device executes the second aspect or any possible implementation manner of the second aspect Method, or the method in the fourth aspect or any one of the possible implementations of the fourth aspect, or the method in the sixth aspect or any one of the possible implementations of the sixth aspect.
  • processors there are one or more processors, and one or more memories.
  • the memory may be integrated with the processor, or the memory is separately provided from the processor.
  • the foregoing processor may be used to perform, for example, but not limited to, baseband related processing, and the receiver and the transmitter may be respectively used to perform, such as, but not limited to, radio frequency transceiver.
  • the above devices may be provided on separate chips, or at least partly or entirely on the same chip.
  • the receiver and the transmitter may be provided on the receiver chip and the transmitter chip which are independent of each other. It can be integrated into a transceiver and then set on the transceiver chip.
  • the processor may be further divided into an analog baseband processor and a digital baseband processor.
  • the analog baseband processor and the transceiver may be integrated on the same chip, and the digital baseband processor may be provided on a separate chip.
  • digital baseband processors can be used with multiple application processors (such as, but not limited to, graphics processors, multimedia processors, etc.) Integrated on the same chip.
  • application processors such as, but not limited to, graphics processors, multimedia processors, etc.
  • Such a chip may be referred to as a system chip. Whether each device is independently set on a different chip or integrated on one or more chips often depends on the specific needs of the product design. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific implementation form of the device.
  • a processor including: an input circuit, an output circuit, and a processing circuit.
  • the processing circuit is configured to receive a signal through the input circuit and transmit a signal through the output circuit, so that the processor executes any one of the first aspect to the sixth aspect and any possible implementation manner of the first aspect to the sixth aspect.
  • the processor may be a chip
  • the input circuit may be an input pin
  • the output circuit may be an output pin
  • the processing circuit may be a transistor, a gate circuit, a flip-flop, and various logic circuits.
  • An input signal received by the input circuit may be received and input by, for example, but not limited to, a receiver
  • a signal output by the output circuit may be, for example, but not limited to, output to a transmitter and transmitted by the transmitter
  • the circuits may be the same circuit, which are used as input circuits and output circuits respectively at different times.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not limit specific implementations of the processor and various circuits.
  • a processing device including: a memory and a processor.
  • the processor is configured to read an instruction stored in the memory, and can receive a signal through a receiver and transmit a signal through a transmitter to execute any one of the first to sixth aspects and the first to sixth aspects. Method in implementation.
  • processors there are one or more processors, and one or more memories.
  • the memory may be integrated with the processor, or the memory is separately provided from the processor.
  • the memory may be a non-transitory memory, such as a read-only memory (ROM), which may be integrated on the same chip as the processor, or may be separately set in different On the chip, the embodiment of the present application does not limit the type of the memory and the way of setting the memory and the processor.
  • ROM read-only memory
  • a chip including a processor and a memory, where the memory is used to store a computer program, the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, and the computer program is used to implement the first aspect to the first
  • the method in the six aspects and any one of the possible implementation methods of the first to sixth aspects.
  • a computer program product includes a computer program (also referred to as code or instructions), and when the computer program is executed, causes a computer to execute the first aspect to The sixth aspect and the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect to the sixth aspect.
  • a computer program also referred to as code or instructions
  • a computer-readable medium stores a computer program (also referred to as code, or instructions), which when executed on a computer, causes the computer to execute the first aspect to The sixth aspect and the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect to the sixth aspect.
  • a computer program also referred to as code, or instructions
  • the possibility of the terminal device completing beam training and channel quality measurement during the wake-up period can be improved, that is, the terminal device can be improved during the wake-up period
  • the possibility of obtaining information on the available beams can improve the reliability of communication and improve the user experience.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic architecture diagram of a communication system of the present application.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of a configuration of the DRX.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic flowchart of an example of a downlink reference signal transmission process of the present application.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of an example of a configuration of a downlink reference signal determined based on a configuration parameter of DRX.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of another example of a configuration of a downlink reference signal determined based on a configuration parameter of DRX.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of still another example of a configuration of a downlink reference signal determined based on a configuration parameter of DRX.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of an example of a transmission process of an uplink channel of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of an example of an uplink channel configuration of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of another example of a transmission process of an uplink channel of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of an example of an uplink channel configuration determined based on DRX configuration parameters.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of another example of an uplink channel configuration determined based on DRX configuration parameters.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of still another example of an uplink channel configuration determined based on DRX configuration parameters.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic block diagram of an example of a communication device of the present application.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic block diagram of an example of a terminal device of the present application.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic block diagram of another example of a communication device of the present application.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic block diagram of an example of a network device of the present application.
  • GSM global mobile communication
  • CDMA code division multiple access
  • WCDMA broadband code division multiple access
  • GPRS general packet radio service
  • LTE long term evolution
  • FDD frequency division duplex
  • TDD Time Division Duplex
  • UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunications System
  • WiMAX Global Interoperability for Microwave Access
  • the terminal device in the embodiments of the present application may refer to user equipment, access terminal, user unit, user station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile device , User terminal, terminal, wireless communication device, user agent, or user device.
  • Terminal equipment can also be cellular phones, cordless phones, session initiation protocol (SIP) phones, wireless local loop (WLL) stations, personal digital assistants (PDAs), and wireless communications Functional handheld devices, computing devices, or other processing devices connected to wireless modems, in-vehicle devices, wearable devices, terminal devices in the future 5G network, or public land mobile network (PLMN) in future evolution Terminal equipment and the like are not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • SIP session initiation protocol
  • WLL wireless local loop
  • PDAs personal digital assistants
  • PLMN public land mobile network
  • the terminal device may also be a wearable device.
  • Wearable devices can also be referred to as wearable smart devices. They are the general name for applying wearable technology to intelligently design daily wear and develop wearable devices, such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing and shoes.
  • a wearable device is a device that is worn directly on the body or is integrated into the user's clothing or accessories. Wearable devices are not only a hardware device, but also powerful functions through software support, data interaction, and cloud interaction.
  • Broad-spectrum wearable smart devices include full-featured, large-sized, full or partial functions that do not rely on smart phones, such as smart watches or smart glasses, and only focus on certain types of application functions, and need to cooperate with other devices such as smart phones Use, such as smart bracelets, smart jewelry, etc. for physical signs monitoring.
  • the terminal device may also be a terminal device in an Internet of Things (IoT) system.
  • IoT Internet of Things
  • the IoT is an important part of the development of future information technology. Its main technical feature is to pass items through communication technology. It is connected to the network to realize the intelligent network of human-machine interconnection and physical interconnection.
  • the IOT technology may implement, for example, narrow band NB technology, to achieve mass connection, deep coverage, and terminal power saving.
  • the NB includes only one resource block (RB), that is, the bandwidth of the NB is only 180 KB.
  • RB resource block
  • the terminals must be discrete in access. According to the communication method of the embodiment of the present application, the congestion problem of mass terminals of IOT technology when accessing the network through NB can be effectively solved.
  • the terminal equipment may also include sensors such as smart printers, train detectors, and gas stations.
  • the main functions include collecting data (some terminal equipment), receiving control information and downlink data from network equipment, and sending electromagnetic waves to Network equipment transmits uplink data.
  • the network device in the embodiment of the present application may be a device for communicating with a terminal device, and the network device may be a Global System for Mobile Communication (GSM) system or a Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) system.
  • the base station (Base Transceiver Station (BTS)) can also be a base station (NodeB, NB) in a wideband code division multiple access (WCDMA) system, or an evolved base station (evolved) in an LTE system.
  • GSM Global System for Mobile Communication
  • CDMA Code Division Multiple Access
  • the base station can also be a base station (NodeB, NB) in a wideband code division multiple access (WCDMA) system, or an evolved base station (evolved) in an LTE system.
  • NodeB, NB base station
  • WCDMA wideband code division multiple access
  • evolved evolved base station
  • NodeB can also be a wireless controller in a cloud radio access network (CRAN) scenario, or the network device can be a relay station, access point, in-vehicle device, wearable device, and future
  • a network device in a 5G network or a network device in a future evolved PLMN network may be an access point (AP) in a WLAN, or a gNB in a new wireless (NR) system
  • AP access point
  • gNB new wireless
  • an access network device provides services to a cell
  • a terminal device communicates with the access network device through a transmission resource (for example, a frequency domain resource or a spectrum resource) used by the cell.
  • a transmission resource for example, a frequency domain resource or a spectrum resource
  • It may be a cell corresponding to an access network device (such as a base station), and the cell may belong to a macro base station or a small cell.
  • the small cell here may include: a metro cell, a micro cell ( micro cells, pico cells, femto cells, etc. These small cells have the characteristics of small coverage and low transmission power, and are suitable for providing high-rate data transmission services.
  • multiple carriers on the carrier in the LTE system or 5G system can work on the same frequency at the same time.
  • the above carrier and cell concepts can be considered equivalent.
  • CA carrier aggregation
  • the concept of a carrier is the same as a cell.
  • a UE accessing a carrier and accessing a cell are equivalent.
  • the core network device may be connected to multiple access network devices for controlling the access network device, and may distribute data received from the network side (for example, the Internet) to the access network device.
  • the network side for example, the Internet
  • the network device may include a base station (gNB), such as a macro station, a micro base station, an indoor hotspot, and a relay node.
  • a base station such as a macro station, a micro base station, an indoor hotspot, and a relay node.
  • the function is to send radio waves to the terminal device.
  • the aspect sends scheduling information to control uplink transmission, and receives radio waves sent by the terminal device, and receives uplink data transmission.
  • terminal equipment The functions and specific implementations of the terminal equipment, access network equipment, and core network equipment listed above are only exemplary descriptions, and the present application is not limited thereto.
  • the terminal device or the network device includes a hardware layer, an operating system layer running on the hardware layer, and an application layer running on the operating system layer.
  • This hardware layer includes hardware such as a central processing unit (CPU), a memory management unit (MMU), and a memory (also called main memory).
  • the operating system may be any one or more computer operating systems that implement business processing through processes, such as a Linux operating system, a Unix operating system, an Android operating system, an iOS operating system, or a windows operating system.
  • This application layer contains applications such as browsers, address books, word processing software, and instant messaging software.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not specifically limit the specific structure of the execution subject of the method provided by the embodiment of the present application, as long as the program that records the code of the method provided by the embodiment of the application can be run to provide the program according to the embodiment of the application.
  • the communication may be performed by using the method described above.
  • the method execution subject provided in the embodiments of the present application may be a terminal device or a network device, or a function module in the terminal device or the network device that can call a program and execute the program.
  • various aspects or features of the present application may be implemented as a method, apparatus, or article of manufacture using standard programming and / or engineering techniques.
  • article of manufacture encompasses a computer program accessible from any computer-readable device, carrier, or medium.
  • computer-readable media may include, but are not limited to: magnetic storage devices (eg, hard disks, floppy disks, or magnetic tapes, etc.), optical disks (eg, compact discs (CD), digital versatile discs (DVD) Etc.), smart cards and flash memory devices (for example, erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), cards, sticks or key drives, etc.).
  • various storage media described herein may represent one or more devices and / or other machine-readable media used to store information.
  • machine-readable medium may include, but is not limited to, wireless channels and various other media capable of storing, containing, and / or carrying instruction (s) and / or data.
  • multiple application programs can be run at the application layer.
  • the application program that executes the communication method of the embodiment of the present application and the method for controlling the receiving end device to complete the received data The application of the corresponding action may be a different application.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a system 100 capable of applying a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the system 100 includes an access network device 102, and the access network device 102 may include one antenna or multiple antennas, for example, antennas 104, 106, 108, 110, 112, and 114.
  • the access network device 102 may additionally include a transmitter chain and a receiver chain.
  • Those of ordinary skill in the art can understand that each of them can include multiple components related to signal transmission and reception (such as a processor, a modulator, Router, demodulator, demultiplexer or antenna, etc.).
  • the access network device 102 may communicate with multiple terminal devices (such as the terminal device 116 and the terminal device 122). However, it can be understood that the access network device 102 can communicate with any number of terminal devices similar to the terminal device 116 or the terminal device 122.
  • the terminal devices 116 and 122 may be, for example, cellular phones, smartphones, laptops, handheld communication devices, handheld computing devices, satellite radios, global positioning systems, PDAs, and / or any other suitable for communicating on the wireless communication system 100 device.
  • the terminal device 116 communicates with the antennas 112 and 114, where the antennas 112 and 114 send information to the terminal device 116 through a forward link (also referred to as a downlink) 118, and through the reverse link (also (Referred to as the uplink) 120 receives information from the terminal device 116.
  • the terminal device 122 communicates with the antennas 104 and 106, where the antennas 104 and 106 send information to the terminal device 122 through the forward link 124 and receive information from the terminal device 122 through the reverse link 126.
  • forward link 118 may use a different frequency band from reverse link 120, and forward link 124 may use a different frequency band than reverse link 126.
  • the frequency band may be used in a frequency division duplex (FDD) system.
  • FDD frequency division duplex
  • the forward link 118 and the reverse link 120 may use a common frequency band
  • the link 126 may use a common frequency band.
  • Each antenna (or antenna group consisting of multiple antennas) and / or area designed for communication is called a sector of the access network device 102.
  • the antenna group may be designed to communicate with terminal equipment in a sector covered by the access network equipment 102.
  • the access network device can send signals to all terminal devices in its corresponding sector through a single antenna or multiple antenna transmit diversity.
  • the transmitting antenna of the access network device 102 can also use beamforming to improve the forward link 118 and 124. Signal to noise ratio.
  • the access network device 102 uses beamforming to randomly scattered terminal devices 116 and 122 in the relevant coverage area. When transmitting signals, mobile devices in adjacent cells experience less interference.
  • the access network device 102, the terminal device 116, or the terminal device 122 may be a wireless communication sending device and / or a wireless communication receiving device.
  • the wireless communication transmitting device may encode the data for transmission.
  • the wireless communication transmitting device may obtain (for example, generate, receive from another communication device, or save in a memory, etc.) a certain number of data bits to be transmitted to the wireless communication receiving device through a channel.
  • Such data bits may be contained in a transport block (or transport blocks) of data, which may be segmented to generate multiple code blocks.
  • the communication system 100 may be a PLMN network, a device-to-device (D2D) network, a machine-to-machine (M2M) network, an IoT network, or other networks.
  • FIG. 1 is only a simplified schematic diagram of an example.
  • the network may also include other access network equipment, which is not shown in Figure 1.
  • data or information may be carried by time-frequency resources, where the time-frequency resources may include resources in the time domain and resources in the frequency domain.
  • the time-frequency resource may include one or more time units.
  • a time unit can be a symbol, or a mini-slot, or a slot, or a subframe, where the duration of a subframe in the time domain can be It is 1 millisecond (ms).
  • a time slot consists of 7 or 14 symbols.
  • a mini time slot can include at least one symbol (for example, 2 symbols or 4 symbols or 7 symbols, or less than or equal to 14 symbols). Any number of symbols).
  • two communication devices having a communication connection may respectively obtain a gain through beam forming.
  • the transmitting end for example, a network device
  • the receiving end for example, a terminal device
  • the transmitting end may obtain a pairing relationship between a transmitting beam and a receiving beam through beam training.
  • the beam can be understood as a spatial filter or a spatial parameter.
  • the beam used to send the signal can be called a transmission beam (transmission beam, Tx beam), which can be a spatial transmission filter (spatial domain transmission filter) or a spatial transmission parameter (spatial domain transmission parameter);
  • the beam used to receive the signal can be called To receive the beam (reception beam, Rx beam), it can be a spatial receive filter (spatial domain receive filter) or a spatial receive parameter (spatial domain receive parameter).
  • the beam forming technology may be a beam forming technology or other technologies.
  • the beamforming technology may specifically be a digital beamforming technology, an analog beamforming technology, or a hybrid digital / analog beamforming technology.
  • a transmitting beam may refer to a signal intensity distribution in different directions of a space after a signal is transmitted through an antenna
  • a receiving beam may refer to a signal intensity distribution of a wireless signal received from an antenna in different directions in space.
  • the beam may be, for example, a spatial filter.
  • a spatial filter for example, a spatial filter.
  • the beam pairing relationship that is, the pairing relationship between the transmitting beam and the receiving beam, that is, the pairing relationship between the spatial transmitting filter and the spatial receiving filter. Transmitting a signal between a transmitting beam and a receiving beam having a beam pairing relationship can obtain a large beamforming gain.
  • the transmitting end may send the reference signal in a beam scanning manner, and the receiving end may also receive the reference signal in a beam scanning manner.
  • the transmitting end may form beams with different directivity in space by means of beamforming, and may poll on multiple beams with different directivity, so as to transmit the reference signal through beams with different directivity, so The power of the reference signal to transmit the reference signal in the direction pointed by the transmission beam can reach the maximum.
  • the receiving end can also form beams with different directivity in the space by means of beamforming, and can poll on multiple beams with different directivity to receive reference signals through the beams with different directivity, so that the receiving end receives The power of the reference signal can be maximized in the direction pointed by the receiving beam.
  • the receiving end can perform channel measurement based on the received reference signal and report the measurement result to the transmitting end. For example, the receiving end may report a portion of the reference signal receiving power (reference signal receiving power (RSRP)) of the larger reference signal resource to the transmitting end, such as reporting the identifier of the reference signal resource, so that the transmitting end uses the channel when transmitting data or signaling Better quality beam pairing to send and receive signals.
  • RSRP reference signal receiving power
  • the reference signal may include, for example, a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS), a synchronization signal block (SSB), and the like for downlink channel measurement.
  • the configuration information of the reference signal resource can be used to configure the transmission properties of the reference signal, for example.
  • the reference signal resources in the embodiments of the present application may include CSI-RS resources (resources), SSB resources (SS / PBCH, Block Resources), etc.
  • the identifiers of the reference signal resources may include, for example, CSI-RS resource identifiers (CSI-RS resource identifier (CRI), SSB resource identifier (SSBRI), and SRS resource identifier (SRS resource identifier).
  • CRI CSI-RS resource identifier
  • SSBRI SSB resource identifier
  • SRS resource identifier SRS resource identifier
  • the network device may determine a configuration parameter for each downlink reference signal (or beam), and send a downlink reference signal based on the configuration parameter.
  • the configuration parameters of the downlink reference signal may include, but are not limited to, the following parameters:
  • the sending period of the downlink reference signal may refer to a length of a time interval between two consecutive transmissions of the same downlink reference signal.
  • each sending period may include a sending period and a non-sending period.
  • the network device may send a downlink reference signal during the sending period, and may not send a downlink reference signal during the non-sending period.
  • the transmission periods of different reference signals may be the same, and the start times of the transmission periods of different reference signals corresponding to the same period. Can be the same.
  • Parameter B Time domain position offset of the downlink reference signal
  • the time-domain position offset of the downlink reference signal may refer to an offset of a start time of a sending period of the downlink reference signal with respect to a preset reference time.
  • the time-domain position offset of the downlink reference signal may indicate a start time unit (for example, a start subframe) of a transmission period of the downlink reference signal.
  • the time domain position offset of the downlink reference signal may refer to the start time of the first sending period of the downlink reference signal relative to the The offset of the start time of the system cycle in which the start time is located. That is, the preset reference time may refer to a start time of a system cycle in which a first transmission period of a downlink reference signal is located.
  • the time-domain position offset of the downlink reference signal may refer to an offset of a transmission period in each period of the downlink reference signal with respect to a start time of the transmission period.
  • the time domain position offset of the downlink reference signal may refer to a sequence number of a time unit corresponding to a transmission period in each period of the downlink reference signal in multiple time units included in the transmission period.
  • offsets of different reference signals may be different, so that the terminal device can receive different reference signals at different times ( Or, beam).
  • the method of the present application can be applied to a communication system capable of using a DRX mechanism.
  • DRX allows the UE to enter the sleep mode periodically at some times, not to monitor the PDCCH, and to wake up from sleep when it needs to monitor, so that the UE can achieve power saving. purpose.
  • FIG. 2 shows a typical DRX cycle.
  • one DRX cycle may include an on-duration period and a sleep period.
  • This wake-up period may also be referred to as an activation period.
  • the terminal device can communicate with the network device during the wake-up period.
  • the UE monitors a downlink PDCCH subframe. During this period, the UE is in an awake state.
  • the sleep period can also be referred to as the Opportunity Opportunity (DRX) period.
  • the terminal device may not perform data transmission during the sleep period.
  • the UE in the Opportunity for DRX period, the UE enters sleep without monitoring the time of the PDCCH subframe in order to save power.
  • the terminal device can receive downlink data and uplink authorization during the activation period.
  • the terminal device can perform a DRX cycle according to a paging cycle in the idle mode.
  • the terminal device may cooperate with multiple timers in a radio resource control (RRC) connection state to ensure the reception of downlink data and uplink authorization. Subsequently, the above timer will be described in detail.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • a large amount of data communication will inevitably cause a sharp increase in power consumption, resulting in insufficient battery supply or increased heat dissipation due to increased power consumption, which will cause system operation failure.
  • the use of the DRX function greatly reduces power consumption.
  • the DRX function control entity may be located at the MAC layer of the protocol stack. Its main function is to control the sending of instructions to the physical layer to notify the physical layer to monitor the PDCCH at a specific time, and the rest of the time will not turn on the receiving antenna and is in a sleep state.
  • the DRX cycle may include a short DRX cycle and a long DRX cycle.
  • one DRX cycle is equal to the sum of the on-duration period and the sleep time.
  • the communication system may configure the UE with a short DRX cycle (short DRX cycle) or a long DRX cycle (long DRX cycle) according to different service scenarios.
  • the voice codec when performing voice services, the voice codec usually sends a voice data packet every 20 milliseconds (ms). In this case, you can configure a short DRX cycle with a length of 20ms, and a longer silent period during a voice call. You can configure long DRX cycles.
  • the terminal device itself includes a short DRX cycle and a short DRX cycle timer, it runs according to the short DRX cycle, and will enter the long DRX cycle running state after the short DRX cycle timer expires.
  • a DRX start offset (drx start offset) parameter may be used to indicate a start time of a DRX cycle or a start time unit (for example, a start subframe).
  • the value range of drx start offset can be determined based on the size of the DRX cycle. For example, if the DRX cycle includes 10 subframes, the value range of drx start offset can be 0-9; if the DRX cycle includes 20 subframes, the value of drx start offset The value ranges from 0 to 19.
  • drxstartoffset 0 if the value of drxstartoffset is 0, it means that the starting subframe of the DRX cycle is the first subframe in the cycle; for example, if the value of drxstartoffset is 8, it means the starting subframe of the DRX cycle Is the ninth subframe in the period.
  • the start time (or start time unit) of the DRX cycle may be equal to or not equal to the start time (or start time unit) of the wake-up period of the DRX cycle.
  • timers used in the DRX mechanism are exemplarily described.
  • Duration timer On duration timer
  • the on-duration timer is used to determine the duration of the wake-up period. During the running of the on-duration timer or before the on-duration timer expires, the terminal is in the on-duration period, and the terminal device can turn on the receiving antenna to monitor the PDCCH.
  • the network side happens to have a larger byte of data to send to the UE, and these data cannot be completely transmitted in the subframe No. 0.
  • the UE will enter the DRX sleep state in subframe 1 and will no longer monitor the PDCCH and cannot receive any downlink PDSCH data from the network side.
  • the network side can only wait until the end of the DRX cycle, and when the next on-duration period arrives, it continues to send the untransmitted data to the terminal device. Although there is nothing wrong with this type of processing mechanism, it obviously increases the processing delay of all services.
  • drx-inactivity timer is added to the DRX mechanism. If the drx-inactivity timer is running, even if the originally configured ontime timer expires (ie, the onduration period ends), the UE still needs to continue to monitor the downlink PDCCH subframe until the drx-inactivity timer expires. After the DRX-Inactivity mechanism is added, the processing delay of data is obviously reduced.
  • DRX Retransmission Timer the minimum number of subframes that the UE needs to wait before receiving the expected downlink retransmission data.
  • HARQ RTT Timer the value of HARQ RTT Timer is fixed equal to 8 subframes.
  • HARQ RTT Timer is equal to (k + 4) subframes, where k represents the delay of the downlink channel transmission and its response to the feedback information.
  • DRXRetransmissionTimer refers to the length of time that the UE monitors the PDCCH after HARQ, RTT, and Timer expire.
  • the wake-up period may include a period corresponding to at least one of the on-duration timer, drx-inactivity timer, and DRXRetransmission Timer.
  • timers listed above are only exemplary descriptions, and the present application is not limited thereto.
  • the monitoring function of the PDCCH can adopt the DRX method, thereby reducing power consumption.
  • the DRX working mechanism in the idle mode is fixed, adopts a fixed cycle, and starts monitoring when the paging moment (PO) arrives.
  • the function of the PDCCH enters the activation period in the idle mode. During the activation period, the PDCCH needs to be fully monitored, and it goes to sleep again after the DRX activation period elapses.
  • the paging frame (PF) indicates a radio frame containing one or more POs. If DRX is used, the terminal device only monitors the PO for each DRX cycle. After the terminal device is powered on, the cycle will be performed according to the default DRX cycle (Cycle) configuration. Receive the PDCCH when the paging moment comes.
  • the combination of timer and DRX is used, and the network device will maintain the same DRX operation mode as the terminal device, and know in real time whether the terminal device is in the active or sleeping period, so it is guaranteed that Data is passed during the active period, but not transmitted during the sleep period.
  • a terminal device may immediately start a DRX inactivity timer after acquiring uplink data, and enter a short DRX cycle timer operation phase after the DRX inactivity timer expires.
  • the short DRX cycle timer runs, when the subframe number meets a preset condition, it enters the on-duration Timer running phase and starts monitoring the PDCCH.
  • the preset condition may include, but is not limited to:
  • SFN indicates the system frame number
  • drx start offset indicates the offset of the activation period (or wake-up period), which is used to indicate the number of time units (for example, subframes) in a DRX cycle. To enter the activation period.
  • Conditions for entering the OndurationTimer activation period when running with a long DRX cycle may include, but are not limited to:
  • SR scheduling request
  • the PDCCH needs to be monitored in order to obtain an uplink grant for transmitting uplink data.
  • DRX will be notified to run in accordance with a fixed DRX process and enter the drx-inactivity timer running phase.
  • the HARQ RTT timer of the corresponding HARQ process is started.
  • the DRX retransmission timer needs to be enabled to monitor the PDCCH after HARQ RTRT times out .
  • it is necessary to determine whether it is new data After determining that the data is new and the detected MAC PDU does not contain the DRX command control element, immediately start the DRX inactivity timer. This timer belongs to the global timing. During the running of this timer, it will continuously monitor the downlink subframes.
  • the uplink feedback After sending the uplink data, the uplink feedback will be received according to the fixed k-value relationship.
  • various timers are configured by the RRC layer. After initiating RRC connection establishment or re-establishment, various parameters required by the MAC layer will be configured through the MAC-MainConfig cell, and then immediately Enter the short DRX cycle or long DRX cycle operation phase.
  • the configuration parameters of the DRX mode may include, but are not limited to, the following parameters:
  • the period of DRX may refer to the length of the DRX cycle, for example, the length of the short DRX cycle described above, or it may also refer to the length of the long DRX cycle described above.
  • Parameter b Time domain position offset of the wake-up period of the DRX mode
  • the start time of a wake-up period may coincide with the start time of the DRX cycle in which the wake-up period is located.
  • the time domain position offset of the wake-up period in the DRX mode It may refer to an offset of a start time of the DRX cycle from a preset reference time.
  • the time-domain position offset of the wake-up period of the DRX mode may indicate a start time unit (eg, a start subframe) of the DRX cycle.
  • the time domain position offset of the wake-up period of the DRX mode may refer to the start time of the first wake-up period of the DRX mode with respect to The offset of the start time of the system cycle in which the start time is located. That is, the preset reference time may refer to a start time of a system cycle in which a first wake-up period of the DRX mode is located.
  • the time domain position offset of the wake-up period of the DRX mode may be the offset indicated by the drx start offset parameter.
  • the wake-up period may be a period measured by the on-duration Timer described above.
  • the start time of a wake-up period may not coincide with the start time of the DRX cycle in which the wake-up period is located.
  • the time domain position offset of the wake-up period in the DRX mode may be Refers to the offset of the wake-up period from the start of the DRX cycle.
  • the time domain position offset of the wake-up period of the DRX mode may indicate the offset of the wake-up period within the DRX cycle.
  • the wake-up period may include a period corresponding to any one of an on-duration timer, a drx-inactivity timer, or a HARQ RTT timer.
  • the method 100 for transmitting a downlink reference signal according to the present application is described in detail below with reference to FIGS. 3 to 6.
  • the downlink reference signal may be used in a beam detection (or, channel measurement) process.
  • FIG. 3 shows a schematic flow of an example of a method 200 for transmitting a downlink reference signal by the network device #A (that is, an example of a network device) and the terminal device #A (that is, an example of a terminal device).
  • the network device #A may configure related parameters of the DRX mode for the terminal device #A.
  • the network device #A may determine the drx-cycle parameter of the DRX mode of the terminal device #A, that is, the network device #A may determine the DRX cycle of the terminal device #A. For ease of understanding, this period is referred to as: cycle #A .
  • the network device #A may determine the drx start offset parameter of the DRX mode of the terminal device #A, that is, the network device #A may determine the offset corresponding to the start time unit of the DRX cycle of the terminal device #A, or , The network device #A may determine an offset corresponding to a start time unit of the wake-up period of the terminal device #A.
  • this offset is referred to as an offset #A.
  • the network device #A may determine related parameters of the X reference signals.
  • the X reference signals may correspond to the X beams used by the network device #A one by one, and X is an integer greater than or equal to 2.
  • a correlation parameter of at least one of the X reference signals has a correlation with a correlation parameter of a DRX mode of the terminal device #A.
  • the reference signal #A in the at least one reference signal is used as an example to describe the determination process of the related parameters of the at least one reference signal in detail.
  • the related parameters of the reference signal #A may include a period of the reference signal #A.
  • this period is referred to as: period #B.
  • the network device #A may determine the period #B based on the above period #A so that the relationship between the period #A and the period #B satisfies at least one of the following conditions.
  • the period #B is an integer multiple of the period #A.
  • CSI-RS-cycle-in-DRX P ⁇ DRX-cycle, where P is a positive integer.
  • CSI-RS-cycle-in-DRX represents cycle #B, that is, the transmission cycle of reference signal #A.
  • DRX-cycle represents cycle #A, that is, the DRX cycle of terminal device #A.
  • each transmission period of the reference signal #A can fall within the DRX cycle of the terminal device #A.
  • Cycle #A is an integer multiple of cycle #B.
  • DRX-cycle Q ⁇ CSI-RS-cycle-in-DRX, where Q is a positive integer.
  • At least one transmission period of the reference signal #A can exist in each DRX cycle of the terminal device #A.
  • the units (or granularity) of the period #A and the period #B may be the same, and the units of the period #A and the period #B may be time units (for example, subframes Or time slot).
  • the related parameters of the reference signal #A may include an offset (or time domain position offset) of the reference signal #A.
  • this offset is written as: offset #B.
  • the network device #A may determine the offset #B based on the above-mentioned offset #A so that the relationship between the offset #A and the offset #B satisfies the following conditions.
  • the offset #B is greater than or equal to the offset #A.
  • the start time determined based on the offset #B is not earlier than the start time determined based on the offset #A.
  • offset #A can be expressed as drx-StartOffset or drx-SlotOffset.
  • CSI-RS-offset-in-DRX drx-StartOffset + n
  • CSI-RS-offset-in-DRX drx-SlotOffset
  • CSI-RS-offset-in-DRX indicates an offset #B, that is, an offset of a transmission period of the reference signal #A.
  • DRX-cycle represents the offset of the DRX cycle of the cycle #B, that is, the terminal device #A.
  • drx-StartOffset indicates the offset of the DRX cycle.
  • drx-SlotOffset represents an offset of a wake-up period (for example, at least one of the on-duration timer, drx-inactivity timer, and HARQ RTT timer corresponding to the period during which the timer runs).
  • the unit (or granularity) of n may be the same as the unit of offset #B (or offset #A), for example, it may be a subframe.
  • the unit (or granularity) of n may be different from the unit of offset #B (or offset #A).
  • the unit of offset #B (or offset #A) may be different.
  • Is a subframe, and the unit of n may be a time slot or a symbol.
  • the duration corresponding to n may be shorter than the duration of an on-duration period in the DRX cycle of terminal device #A.
  • the difference between the offset #B and the offset #A may be smaller than the duration of the wake-up period in the DRX cycle of the terminal device #A.
  • the transmission time of the reference signal #A can be reliably entered into the wake-up period in the DRX cycle of the terminal device #A.
  • FIG. 4 shows an example of the relationship between the configuration of the reference signal #A determined based on the above method and the configuration of the DRX of the terminal device #A when P (or Q) is 1. That is, in this application, the period of the reference signal #A may be the same as the period of the DRX of the terminal device #A, and the offset #B and the offset #A satisfy the above condition 3, so that the reference signal can be made
  • Each transmission cycle of #A corresponds to a DRX cycle, and the sending time of the reference signal #A can be included in the wake-up period of the DRX cycle, thereby ensuring that the terminal device #A can wake up every time it wakes up.
  • the reference signal #A is received, it can be ensured that each reference signal #A sent by the network device #A is received by the terminal device #A.
  • the network device #A may also first determine the relevant parameters of the reference signal #A and based on The relevant parameters of the reference signal #A determine the relevant parameters of the DRX cycle of the terminal device #A, as long as it can ensure that the relationship between the cycle #A and the cycle #B satisfies condition # 1 or condition # 2, and / or can ensure the offset # The relationship between A and offset #B satisfies condition # 3.
  • one or more reference signals that are not related to the configuration of the DRX may also exist in the multiple reference signals, that is, the configuration parameters of the partial reference signals may be determined based on the existing technology.
  • the period of the partial reference signal used by the network device #A may be independent of the period of the DRX, or the offset of the partial reference signal used by the network device #A may be independent of the offset of the DRX, that is, The sending period of this part of the reference signal may not fall within the wake-up period of the DRX.
  • related parameters of another part of the reference signal (for example, the reference signal #A) used by the network device #A may be determined based on the foregoing manner so as to have correlation with the configuration of the DRX.
  • the network device #A may send related parameters of the reference signal #A to the terminal device #A.
  • the network device #A may send the reference signal #A based on the relevant parameters of the reference signal #A, and the terminal device #A may enter the DRX mode based on the configuration parameters of the DRX, and receive the reference signal # based on the relevant parameters of the reference signal #A.
  • the terminal device #A may also perform beam detection or channel measurement based on the reference signal #A. This process may be similar to the prior art. Here, in order to avoid redundant description, detailed description is omitted.
  • the terminal device #A may send a result (for example, beam restoration request information or channel quality information) obtained by the foregoing processing to the network device #A.
  • a result for example, beam restoration request information or channel quality information
  • the sending process may be similar to the prior art, or the process may be similar to the process described in the method 300 or the method 400 described later.
  • the possibility of the terminal device completing beam training and channel quality measurement during the wake-up period can be improved, that is, the terminal device can be improved during the wake-up period
  • the possibility of obtaining information on the available beams can improve the reliability of communication and improve the user experience.
  • FIG. 7 illustrates a method 300 for transmitting an uplink channel between a network device #B (that is, an example of a network device) and a terminal device #B (that is, an example of a terminal device).
  • the uplink channel may be used to carry measurement results or detection results obtained based on a downlink reference signal, such as beam recovery request information or channel quality information. That is, the method 300 may be used in a transmission process of channel quality information and the like determined based on the above-mentioned downlink reference signal #A, for example.
  • the network device #A and the network device #B may be the same device, and the terminal device #A and the terminal device #B may be the same terminal device.
  • the uplink channel may also be used to transmit an uplink reference signal, for example, a sounding reference signal (SRS) for uplink channel measurement.
  • an uplink reference signal for example, a sounding reference signal (SRS) for uplink channel measurement.
  • SRS sounding reference signal
  • a repeat transmission mechanism can be used to transmit the uplink channel, that is, the network device can indicate the number of repetitions to the terminal device, so that the terminal device sends the uplink channel based on the repetition number For example, if the number of repetitions is U, the terminal device may send the uplink channel U times, where U is an integer greater than or equal to 2.
  • the non-repeating transmission mechanism can also be used to transmit the uplink channel.
  • the terminal device sends the uplink channel only once.
  • the communication system may configure an independent set of repetition times for the DRX mode (for ease of understanding, it is referred to as the set of repetition times # 1), where the set of repetition times # 1 includes at least one number of repetitions.
  • the number of repetitions refers to the number of times the terminal device repeatedly transmits the uplink channel.
  • the repetition set # 1 may be ⁇ 1, 2, 4, 8 ⁇ .
  • the number of repetitions of the repetition number set # 1 is the number of repetitions used by the terminal device during a period in the DRX mode.
  • the repetition number set # 1 is only used in the DRX mode, that is, the network device and the terminal device use the repetition number set # 1 only in the DRX mode.
  • Network equipment and terminal equipment do not use repetition set # 1 in non-DRX mode. That is, the use of the repetition number set # 1 can be limited by the DRX mode, or in other words, it is necessary to determine that the DRX mode is currently used before using the repetition number set # 1.
  • the communication system may further configure a repetition number set # 2, which can be used in a non-DRX mode (for example, for transmitting an uplink channel), and the repetition number set # 2 is also Can be used in DRX mode.
  • the repetition number set # 2 includes at least one repetition number.
  • the repetition number set # 2 may be a repetition number set dedicated to the non-DRX mode.
  • the repetition number set # 2 may be a repetition number set for both the non-DRX mode and the DRX mode. That is, the use of the repetition number set # 2 may not be restricted by the non-DRX mode and the DRX mode, or it is unnecessary to pay attention to whether the non-DRX mode or the DRX mode is currently used before using the repetition number set # 2.
  • the maximum number of repetitions in the set of repetition times set # 2 is the number of repetitions #b
  • the maximum number of repetitions in the set of repetition times set # 1 is the number of repetitions #a.
  • the number of repetitions # a is greater than or equal to the number of repetitions #b.
  • a non-repeated transmission mechanism may also be used for transmission of the uplink channel.
  • the network device #B may determine a target repetition number for the terminal device #B from the repetition number set # 1.
  • the network device #B may determine the target repetition number based on the service type or importance of the service accessed by the terminal device #B.
  • the network device #B may determine the larger number of repetitions in the repetition number set # 1 as the target number of repetitions.
  • the network device #B may determine the smaller repetition number in the repetition number set # 1 as the target repetition. frequency.
  • the network device #B may send the indication information of the target repetition number to the terminal device #B.
  • each repetition number in the repetition number set # 1 may uniquely correspond to an index value
  • the indication information of the target repetition number may be an index value corresponding to the target repetition number
  • the terminal device #B may transmit an uplink channel based on the target repetition number while it is in the DRX mode.
  • the beam used by the terminal device may be changed due to the movement of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device cannot reliably complete the transmission of the uplink channel because it cannot obtain information about the beam.
  • the repeated transmission in the DRX mode is not limited to the non-DRX mode, and thus can be used in In DRX mode, a large number of repetitions is used to increase the probability of successful transmission of the uplink channel.
  • non-DRX mode it can avoid wasting resources due to excessive repeated transmissions.
  • the network device #B may further send information of the uplink beam, and the information of the uplink beam may be used to indicate related parameters of the uplink beam.
  • the relevant parameters of the uplink beam may include spatial filters or spatial parameters.
  • the spatial filter may be at least one of the following: precoding, the weight of the antenna port, the phase deflection of the antenna port, and the amplitude gain of the antenna port.
  • the related parameters of the uplink beam may include configuration parameters of a reference signal, such as configuration information of a channel state information reference signal used for downlink channel measurement.
  • the terminal device #B After receiving the information of the uplink beam, the terminal device #B can determine the uplink beam information required for uplink channel transmission based on the information of the uplink beam, thereby improving the performance of transmitting the uplink channel.
  • the terminal device #B may be based on The number of target repetitions indicated by the network device #B sends the uplink channel.
  • the terminal device #B may be based on the number of repetitions.
  • the number of repetitions specified in the set # 2 may be indicated by the network device #B), and the uplink channel is transmitted.
  • the terminal device #B may adopt Non-repeating sending mechanism, sending uplink channel.
  • the terminal device #B may send confirmation information to the network device #B.
  • the network device #B may consider that the terminal device #B fails to determine an available beam for transmitting an uplink channel based on the uplink beam information, and the network Device #B can receive the uplink channel based on the target repetition number.
  • the network device #B can consider that the terminal device #B can determine the available beam for transmitting the uplink channel based on the uplink beam information, and the network device #B can The uplink channel is received based on the number of repetitions specified in the repetition number set # 2 (for example, it may be indicated by the network device #B).
  • the network device #B can consider that the terminal device #B can determine the beams that can be used to send the uplink channel based on the uplink beam information, and the network device # B can use a non-repeating transmission mechanism to receive the uplink channel.
  • the network device may also use the information of the downlink beam as the information of the uplink beam.
  • FIG. 8 shows an example of an uplink channel configuration determined based on the scheme of the present application.
  • the terminal device #B may send an uplink channel based on the number of repetitions #A.
  • the number of repetitions #A is the number of repetitions indicated by the network device in the above-mentioned number of repetitions set # 1.
  • the number of repetitions #A may be 4 in the configuration shown in FIG. 8.
  • the terminal device #B is in the DRX mode and the information of the uplink beam is obtained.
  • the terminal device #B may send an uplink channel based on the repetition number #B.
  • the number of repetitions #B is the number of repetitions indicated by the network device in the above-mentioned number of repetitions set # 2.
  • the number of repetitions #B may be two.
  • FIG. 9 shows a method 400 for transmitting an uplink channel between a network device #C (that is, an example of a network device) and a terminal device #C (that is, an example of a terminal device).
  • the uplink channel may be used to carry measurement results or detection results obtained based on a downlink reference signal, such as beam recovery request information or channel quality information. That is, the method 400 may be used in a transmission process of channel quality information and the like determined based on the above-mentioned downlink reference signal #A, for example.
  • the network device #C and the network device #B may be the same device, and the terminal device #C and the terminal device #B may be the same terminal device.
  • the uplink channel can also be used to transmit an uplink reference signal, for example, an SRS used for uplink channel measurement.
  • an uplink reference signal for example, an SRS used for uplink channel measurement.
  • the network device #C may configure related parameters of the DRX mode for the terminal device #C.
  • the network device #C may determine the drx-cycle parameter of the DRX mode of the terminal device #C, that is, the network device #C may determine the DRX cycle of the terminal device #C. For ease of understanding, this period is referred to as: cycle # 1 .
  • the network device #C can determine the drx start offset parameter of the DRX mode of the terminal device #C, that is, the network device #C can determine the offset corresponding to the start time unit of the DRX cycle of the terminal device #C, or , The network device #C may determine an offset corresponding to a start time unit of the wake-up period of the terminal device #C.
  • this offset is referred to as: offset # 1.
  • the network device #C may determine relevant parameters of the Y uplink channels (for example, uplink reference signals).
  • the Y uplink channels may correspond to the Y beams used by the network device #C one by one, and Y is an integer greater than or equal to 2.
  • the related parameters of at least one of the Y uplink channels are related to the related parameters of the DRX mode of terminal device #C.
  • the determination process of the related parameters of the at least one uplink channel is described in detail by using the uplink channel # 1 in the at least one uplink channel as an example.
  • related parameters of the uplink channel # 1 may include a period of the uplink channel # 1.
  • this cycle is referred to as: Cycle # 2.
  • the network device #C may determine the period # 2 based on the above period # 1 so that the relationship between the period # 1 and the period # 2 satisfies at least one of the following conditions.
  • Cycle # 2 is an integer multiple of cycle # 1.
  • CSI-report-cycle-in-DRX P ⁇ DRX-cycle, where P is a positive integer.
  • CSI-report-cycle-in-DRX represents cycle # 2, that is, the transmission cycle of uplink channel # 1.
  • DRX-cycle represents cycle # 1, that is, the DRX cycle of terminal device #C.
  • each transmission period of the uplink channel # 1 can fall within the DRX cycle of the terminal device #C.
  • Cycle # 1 is an integer multiple of cycle # 2.
  • DRX-cycle Q ⁇ CSI-report-cycle-in-DRX, where Q is a positive integer.
  • At least one transmission period of the uplink channel # 1 can exist in each DRX period of the terminal device #C.
  • the units (or granularity) of the cycle # 1 and the cycle # 2 may be the same, and the units of the cycle # 1 and the cycle # 2 may be time units (for example, a subframe Or time slot).
  • the related parameters of the uplink channel # 1 may include an offset (or a time domain position offset) of the uplink channel # 1.
  • this offset is written as: offset # 2.
  • the network device #C may determine the offset # 2 based on the above-mentioned offset # 1 so that the relationship between the offset # 1 and the offset # 2 satisfies the following conditions.
  • the offset # 2 is greater than or equal to the offset # 1.
  • the start time determined based on the offset # 2 is not earlier than the start time determined based on the offset # 1.
  • offset # 1 can be expressed as drx-StartOffset or drx-SlotOffset
  • CSI-report-offset-in-DRX drx-StartOffset + n
  • CSI-report-offset-in-DRX drx-SlotOffset + n
  • CSI-report-offset-in-DRX represents an offset # 2, that is, an offset of a transmission period of the uplink channel # 1.
  • DRX-cycle represents a period # 2, that is, an offset of a DRX cycle of the terminal device #C.
  • the unit (or granularity) of n may be the same as the unit of offset # 2 (or offset # 1), for example, it may be a subframe.
  • the unit (or granularity) of n may be different from the unit of offset # 2 (or offset # 1), for example, the unit of offset # 2 (or offset # 1) may be different Is a subframe, and the unit of n may be a time slot or a symbol.
  • the duration corresponding to n may be shorter than the duration of an on-duration period in the DRX cycle of terminal device #C.
  • the difference between the offset # 2 and the offset # 1 may be smaller than the duration of the wake-up period in the DRX cycle of the terminal device #C.
  • the transmission time of the uplink channel # 1 can be reliably included in the wake-up period in the DRX cycle of the terminal device #C.
  • FIG. 10 shows an example of the relationship between the configuration of the uplink channel # 1 and the DRX configuration of the terminal device #C determined based on the above method when P (or Q) is 1. That is, in this application, the period of the uplink channel # 1 may be the same as the period of the DRX of the terminal device #C, and the offset # 2 and the offset # 1 satisfy the above condition 3, so that the uplink channel can be made.
  • Each transmission cycle of # 1 corresponds to a DRX cycle, and the uplink channel # 1 can be sent into the wake-up period of the DRX cycle, thereby ensuring that the terminal device #C can wake up every time it wakes up.
  • the uplink channel # 1 is received, that is, it can be ensured that each uplink channel # 1 sent by the network device #C is received by the terminal device #C.
  • the network device #C may first determine the relevant parameters of the uplink channel # 1, and based on The related parameters of the uplink channel # 1 determine the related parameters of the DRX cycle of the terminal device #C, as long as the relationship between the cycle # 1 and the cycle # 2 can satisfy the condition # 1 or the condition # 2, and / or the offset # can be ensured.
  • the relationship between 1 and the offset # 2 may satisfy the condition # 3.
  • one or more reference signals that are not related to the configuration of the DRX may also exist in the multiple reference signals, that is, the configuration parameters of the partial reference signals may be determined based on the existing technology.
  • the period of the partial reference signal used by the network device #C may be independent of the period of the DRX, or the offset of the partial reference signal used by the network device #C may be independent of the offset of the DRX, that is, The sending period of this part of the reference signal may not fall within the wake-up period of the DRX.
  • related parameters of another part of the reference signal for example, the uplink channel # 1) used by the network device #C may be determined based on the foregoing manner so as to have correlation with the configuration of the DRX.
  • the network device #C may send the related parameters of the uplink channel # 1 to the terminal device #C.
  • the network device #C can receive the uplink channel # 1 based on the relevant parameters of the uplink channel # 1, and the terminal device #C can enter the DRX mode based on the DRX configuration parameters and send the uplink channel # 1 based on the relevant parameters of the uplink channel # 1. .
  • the possibility of the terminal device completing beam training and channel quality measurement during wake-up can be improved That is, it is possible to increase the possibility that the terminal device obtains information of the usable beams during the wake-up period, thereby improving the reliability of communication and improving the user experience.
  • the configuration parameters of the uplink channel for example, the uplink reference signal or the channel quality information report
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of a communication device 10 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the device 10 may be a terminal device, or a chip or a circuit, such as a chip or a circuit that may be provided in the terminal device. .
  • the apparatus 10 for detecting a beam may include a processing unit 11 (that is, an example of a processing unit) and a storage unit 12.
  • the storage unit 12 is configured to store instructions
  • the processing unit 11 is configured to execute the instructions stored by the storage unit 12 so that the apparatus 10 for beam detection implements a terminal device (for example, the above-mentioned terminal device #A, the above-mentioned terminal) in the foregoing method. Steps performed by device #B or the above-mentioned terminal device #C).
  • the device 10 may further include an input port 13 (that is, an example of a communication unit) and an output port 14 (that is, another example of a communication unit).
  • the processing unit 11, the storage unit 12, the input port 13 and the output port 14 can communicate with each other through an internal connection path to transfer control and / or data signals.
  • the storage unit 12 is used to store a computer program, and the processing unit 11 may be used to call and run the computer program from the storage unit 12 to control the input port 13 to receive signals and control the output port 14 to send signals to complete the above method. Steps for the terminal device.
  • the storage unit 12 may be integrated in the processing unit 11, or may be provided separately from the processing unit 11.
  • the input port 13 is a receiver
  • the output port 14 is a transmitter.
  • the receiver and the transmitter may be the same or different physical entities. When they are the same physical entity, they can be collectively referred to as transceivers.
  • the input port 13 is an input interface
  • the output port 14 is an output interface
  • the functions of the input port 13 and the output port 14 may be considered to be implemented through a transceiver circuit or a dedicated chip for transceiver.
  • the processing unit 11 may be implemented by a dedicated processing chip, a processing circuit, a processing unit, or a general-purpose chip.
  • a manner of using a general-purpose computer may be considered to implement the terminal device provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the program code that is to implement the functions of the processing unit 11, the input port 13, and the output port 14 is stored in the storage unit 12.
  • the general processing unit implements the functions of the processing unit 11, input port 13, and output port 14 by executing the codes in the storage unit 12. .
  • the input port 13 is configured to receive configuration information from a network device, and the configuration information is used to indicate a configuration parameter of a reference signal, wherein the configuration parameter of the reference signal is based on a discontinuous reception DRX mode of the terminal device. Or the configuration parameters of the DRX mode are determined according to the configuration parameters of the reference signal; the input port 13 may receive a reference from the network device under the control of the processing unit 11 according to the configuration parameters of the reference signal signal.
  • the configuration parameter of the reference signal includes a transmission period T1 of the reference signal
  • the configuration parameter of the DRX mode includes a period T2 of DRX
  • T1 P ⁇ T2, where P is a positive integer, or
  • T2 Q ⁇ T1, where Q is a positive integer.
  • the configuration parameter of the reference signal includes a time domain position offset S1 of the reference signal
  • the configuration parameter of the DRX mode includes a time domain position offset S2 of a wake-up period of the DRX mode, where S1 is greater than or Equal to S2.
  • the difference between S1 and S2 is less than or equal to the length of the wake-up period of the DRX mode.
  • the input port 13 is configured to receive indication information of a first number of repetitions from a network device.
  • the first number of repetitions belongs to a first number of repetitions set, and the first number of repetitions set includes at least one number of repetitions.
  • the first set of repetition times is dedicated to the discontinuous reception DRX mode; the output port 14 may send an uplink channel under the control of the processing unit 11 in the period of the DRX mode according to the first repetition times.
  • the maximum number of repetitions in the first set of repetitions is greater than or equal to the maximum number of repetitions in the second set of repetitions
  • the second set of repetitions includes at least one number of repetitions
  • the second set of repetitions is used for non- DRX mode
  • the uplink channel is transmitted in a non-repeated transmission manner.
  • the output port 14 may send the uplink channel according to the first repetition number before the input port 13 receives the beam indication information of the uplink channel under the control of the processing unit 11 during the period in the DRX mode. .
  • the output port 14 may send a confirmation to the network device after the terminal device is in the DRX mode under the control of the processing unit 11 and after the input port 13 receives the beam indication information of the uplink channel.
  • Information, the confirmation information is used to indicate that the terminal device receives beam indication information of the uplink channel;
  • the output port 14 may send an uplink channel according to a second repetition number under the control of the processing unit 11.
  • the second repetition number belongs to a second repetition number set, and the second repetition number set includes at least one repetition number.
  • the set of repetitions is dedicated to non-DRX mode; or
  • the output port 14 may send an uplink channel in a non-repeated transmission manner under the control of the processing unit 11.
  • the input port 13 is used to receive configuration information from a network device, and the configuration information is used to indicate a configuration parameter of an uplink channel, where the configuration parameter of the uplink channel is based on discontinuous reception of DRX by the terminal device.
  • the configuration parameters of the mode are determined, or the configuration parameters of the DRX mode are determined according to the configuration parameters of the uplink channel; the output port 14 may be sent to the network device under the control of the processing unit 11 according to the configuration parameters of the uplink channel. Upstream channel.
  • the configuration parameter of the uplink channel includes a transmission period T1 of the uplink channel
  • the configuration parameter of the DRX mode includes a period T2 of DRX
  • T1 P ⁇ T2, where P is a positive integer, or
  • T2 Q ⁇ T1, where Q is a positive integer.
  • the configuration parameter of the uplink channel includes a time domain position offset S1 of the uplink channel
  • the configuration parameter of the DRX mode includes a time domain position offset S2 of a wake-up period of the DRX mode, where S1 is greater than or Equal to S2.
  • the difference between S1 and S2 is less than the length of the wake-up period of the DRX mode.
  • each module or unit in the device 10 listed above are only exemplary descriptions, and each module or unit in the device 10 may be used to perform each action or process performed by the terminal device in the foregoing method.
  • each module or unit in the device 10 may be used to perform each action or process performed by the terminal device in the foregoing method.
  • the terminal device in the foregoing method.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device 20 provided in this application.
  • the above device 20 may be configured in the terminal device 20, or the device 20 itself may be the terminal device 20.
  • the terminal device 20 may perform the actions performed by the terminal device in the foregoing method 200, 300, or 400.
  • FIG. 14 shows only the main components of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device 20 includes a processor, a memory, a control circuit, an antenna, and an input / output device.
  • the processor is mainly used to process the communication protocol and communication data, and control the entire terminal device, execute a software program, and process the data of the software program.
  • the processor is used to support the terminal device to execute the foregoing method for transmitting a precoding matrix.
  • the memory is mainly used to store software programs and data, such as the codebook described in the foregoing embodiment.
  • the control circuit is mainly used for conversion of baseband signals and radio frequency signals and processing of radio frequency signals.
  • the control circuit and the antenna together can also be called a transceiver, which is mainly used to send and receive radio frequency signals in the form of electromagnetic waves.
  • Input / output devices such as a touch screen, a display screen, and a keyboard, are mainly used to receive data input by the user and output data to the user.
  • the processor can read the software program in the storage unit, interpret and execute the instructions of the software program, and process the data of the software program.
  • the processor performs baseband processing on the data to be sent, and then outputs the baseband signal to the radio frequency circuit. After the radio frequency circuit processes the baseband signal, the radio frequency signal is sent out in the form of electromagnetic waves through the antenna.
  • the RF circuit receives the RF signal through the antenna, converts the RF signal into a baseband signal, and outputs the baseband signal to the processor.
  • the processor converts the baseband signal into data and processes the data.
  • FIG. 14 shows only one memory and a processor. In an actual terminal device, there may be multiple processors and memories.
  • the memory may also be referred to as a storage medium or a storage device, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the processor may include a baseband processor and a central processor.
  • the baseband processor is mainly used to process communication protocols and communication data.
  • the central processor is mainly used to control the entire terminal device, execute software programs, and process software programs. data.
  • the processor in FIG. 14 integrates the functions of the baseband processor and the central processing unit.
  • the baseband processor and the central processing unit may also be independent processors, which are interconnected through technologies such as a bus.
  • the terminal device may include multiple baseband processors to adapt to different network standards, the terminal device may include multiple central processors to enhance its processing capabilities, and various components of the terminal device may be connected through various buses.
  • the baseband processor may also be expressed as a baseband processing circuit or a baseband processing chip.
  • the central processing unit may also be expressed as a central processing circuit or a central processing chip.
  • the function of processing communication protocols and communication data may be built in the processor or stored in the storage unit in the form of a software program, and the processor executes the software program to implement the baseband processing function.
  • the antenna and the control circuit having a transmitting and receiving function may be regarded as the transmitting and receiving unit 201 of the terminal device 20, and the processor having the processing function may be regarded as the processing unit 202 of the terminal device 20.
  • the terminal device 20 includes a transceiver unit 201 and a processing unit 202.
  • the transceiver unit may also be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver, a transceiver device, and the like.
  • a device for implementing a receiving function in the transceiver unit 201 may be regarded as a receiving unit, and a device for implementing a transmitting function in the transceiver unit 201 may be regarded as a transmitting unit, that is, the transceiver unit 201 includes a receiving unit and a transmitting unit.
  • the receiving unit may also be called a receiver, a receiver, a receiving circuit, etc.
  • the sending unit may be called a transmitter, a transmitter, or a transmitting circuit.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of a communication apparatus 30 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the apparatus 30 may be a network device (for example, network device #A, network device #B, or network device #C) It can also be a chip or circuit, such as a chip or circuit that can be set in a network device.
  • the device 30 may include a processing unit 31 and a storage unit 32.
  • the storage unit 32 is configured to store instructions
  • the processing unit 31 is configured to execute the instructions stored by the storage unit 32 to enable the apparatus 30 to implement the steps performed by the network device in the foregoing method.
  • the device 30 may further include an input port 33 (that is, an example of a communication unit) and an output port 33 (that is, another example of a processing unit).
  • an input port 33 that is, an example of a communication unit
  • an output port 33 that is, another example of a processing unit.
  • processing unit 31, the storage unit 32, the input port 33 and the output port 34 can communicate with each other through an internal connection path to transfer control and / or data signals.
  • a general-purpose computer to implement the network device provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the program code that is to implement the functions of the processing unit 31, the input port 33, and the output port 34 is stored in a storage unit, and the general-purpose processing unit implements the functions of the processing unit 31, input port 33, and output port 34 by executing the code in the storage unit.
  • the storage unit 32 is configured to store a computer program.
  • the processing unit 31 may be used to call and run the computing program from the storage unit 32 to control the output port 34 to send configuration information to the terminal device, where the configuration information is used to indicate the reference signal.
  • a configuration parameter wherein the configuration parameter of the reference signal is determined by the network device according to a configuration parameter of the discontinuous reception DRX mode of the terminal device, or the configuration parameter of the DRX mode is a configuration parameter of the network device according to the reference signal It is determined; and according to the configuration parameter of the reference signal, the output port 34 is controlled to send a reference signal to the terminal device.
  • the configuration parameter of the reference signal includes a transmission period T1 of the reference signal
  • the configuration parameter of the DRX mode includes a period T2 of DRX
  • T1 P ⁇ T2, where P is a positive integer, or
  • T2 Q ⁇ T1, where Q is a positive integer.
  • the configuration parameter of the reference signal includes a time domain position offset S1 of the reference signal
  • the configuration parameter of the DRX mode includes a time domain position offset S2 of a wake-up period of the DRX mode, where S1 is greater than or Equal to S2.
  • the difference between S1 and S2 is less than or equal to the length of the wake-up period of the DRX mode.
  • the processing unit 31 may be configured to call and run the calculation program from the storage unit 32 to control the output port 34 to send the instruction information of the first repetition times to the terminal device.
  • the number of repetitions belongs to a first number of repetitions set, the first number of repetitions set includes at least one number of repetitions, the first number of repetitions set is dedicated to a discontinuous reception DRX mode; and while the terminal device is in the DRX mode, The input port 33 is controlled to receive an uplink channel according to the first repetition number.
  • the maximum number of repetitions in the first set of repetitions is greater than or equal to the maximum number of repetitions in the second set of repetitions, the second set of repetitions includes at least one number of repetitions, and the second set of repetitions is used in a non-DRX mode;
  • the uplink channel is transmitted using non-repeated transmission.
  • the processing unit 31 is further configured to control the output port 34 to transmit the beam indication information of the uplink channel to the terminal device; and to control the input port 33 during the period when the terminal device is in the DRX mode, Before receiving the confirmation information sent by the terminal device, the uplink channel is received according to the first repetition number, and the confirmation information is used to indicate that the terminal device receives beam indication information of the uplink channel.
  • the processing unit 31 is further configured to control the output port 34 to transmit the beam indication information of the uplink channel to the terminal device; and to control the input port 33 during the period when the terminal device is in the DRX mode,
  • the uplink channel is received according to a second number of repetitions.
  • the second number of repetitions belongs to a second number of repetitions set.
  • the second number of repetitions set includes at least one number of repetitions.
  • the confirmation information is used to instruct the terminal device to receive beam indication information of the uplink channel.
  • the processing unit 31 is further configured to control the output port 34 to transmit the beam indication information of the uplink channel to the terminal device; and to control the input port 33 during the period when the terminal device is in the DRX mode, After receiving the confirmation information sent by the terminal device, the uplink channel is received in a non-repeated transmission manner, and the confirmation information is used to indicate that the terminal device receives beam indication information of the uplink channel.
  • the processing unit 31 may be configured to call and run the computing program from the storage unit 32 to control the output port 34 to send configuration information to the terminal device, where the configuration information is used to indicate an uplink channel.
  • the configuration parameters of the uplink channel are determined by the network device according to the configuration parameters of the discontinuous reception DRX mode of the terminal device, or the configuration parameters of the DRX mode are the network device according to the configuration of the uplink channel The parameters are determined; and according to the configuration parameters of the uplink channel, the input port 33 is controlled to receive the uplink channel from the terminal device.
  • the configuration parameter of the uplink channel includes a transmission period T1 of the uplink channel
  • the configuration parameter of the DRX mode includes a period T2 of DRX
  • T1 P ⁇ T2, where P is a positive integer, or
  • T2 Q ⁇ T1, where Q is a positive integer.
  • the configuration parameter of the uplink channel includes a time domain position offset S1 of the uplink channel
  • the configuration parameter of the DRX mode includes a time domain position offset S2 of a wake-up period of the DRX mode, where S1 is greater than or Equal to S2.
  • the difference between S1 and S2 is less than or equal to the length of the wake-up period of the DRX mode.
  • modules or units in the device 30 listed above are only exemplary descriptions, and the modules or units in the device 30 may be used to execute the network devices (for example, network device #A, network device #B) in the above method. Or each process or process performed by the network device #C).
  • network devices for example, network device #A, network device #B
  • network device #C each process or process performed by the network device #C.
  • detailed descriptions are omitted.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device 40 according to an embodiment of the present application, which may be used to implement functions of a network device (for example, an access network device #A or a core network device # ⁇ ) in the foregoing method.
  • the network device 40 includes one or more radio frequency units, such as a remote radio unit (RRU) 401 and one or more baseband units (BBU) (also referred to as a digital unit, DU). 402.
  • RRU 401 may be referred to as a transceiver unit, a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver, etc., and may include at least one antenna 4011 and a radio frequency unit 4012.
  • the RRU 401 part is mainly used for transmitting and receiving radio frequency signals and converting radio frequency signals and baseband signals, for example, for sending a signaling message described in the foregoing embodiment to a terminal device.
  • the BBU 402 part is mainly used for baseband processing and controlling base stations.
  • the RRU 401 and the BBU 402 may be physically located together or physically separated, that is, a distributed base station.
  • the BBU 402 is a control center of a base station, and may also be referred to as a processing unit, which is mainly used to complete baseband processing functions, such as channel coding, multiplexing, modulation, spread spectrum, and so on.
  • the BBU (Processing Unit) 402 may be used to control the base station 40 to execute the operation procedure on the network device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the BBU 402 may be composed of one or more boards, and multiple boards may jointly support a single access system wireless access network (such as an LTE system or a 5G system), or may support different Access standard wireless access network.
  • the BBU 402 further includes a memory 4021 and a processor 4022.
  • the memory 4021 is used to store necessary instructions and data.
  • the memory 4021 stores the codebook and the like in the foregoing embodiment.
  • the processor 4022 is configured to control the base station to perform necessary actions, for example, to control the base station to execute the operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the memory 4021 and the processor 4022 may serve one or more single boards. That is, the memory and processor can be set separately on each board. It is also possible that multiple boards share the same memory and processor. In addition, the necessary circuits can be set on each board.
  • SoC system-on-chip
  • all or part of the functions of part 402 and part 401 may be implemented by SoC technology, for example, a base station function chip
  • the base station function chip integrates a processor, a memory, an antenna interface and other devices.
  • a program of the base station related functions is stored in the memory, and the processor executes the program to realize the base station related functions.
  • the base station function chip can also read the external memory of the chip to realize the related functions of the base station.
  • FIG. 16 the structure of the network device illustrated in FIG. 16 is only one possible form, and should not be construed as any limitation in the embodiments of the present application. This application does not exclude the possibility of other forms of base station structures that may appear in the future.
  • the embodiment of the present application further provides a communication system, which includes the foregoing network device and one or more terminal devices.
  • the processor may be a central processing unit (CPU), and the processor may also be another general-purpose processor, digital signal processor (DSP), or special-purpose integration.
  • Circuit application specific integrated circuit, ASIC
  • ready-made programmable gate array field programmable gate array, FPGA
  • a general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may be any conventional processor or the like.
  • the memory in the embodiments of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory.
  • the non-volatile memory may be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), electrical memory Erase programmable read-only memory (EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
  • the volatile memory may be a random access memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache.
  • RAM random access memory
  • SRAM static random access memory
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • SDRAM synchronous dynamic random access Access memory
  • double SDRAM double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • enhanced SDRAM enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • SLDRAM synchronous connection dynamic random access Fetch memory
  • direct RAMbus RAM direct RAMbus RAM, DR RAM
  • the above embodiments may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any other combination.
  • the above embodiments may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions or computer programs.
  • the processes or functions according to the embodiments of the present application are wholly or partially generated.
  • the computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be from a website site, computer, server, or data center Transmission by wire (for example, infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) to another website site, computer, server, or data center.
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, a data center, and the like, including one or more sets of available media.
  • the usable medium may be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape), an optical medium (for example, a DVD), or a semiconductor medium.
  • the semiconductor medium may be a solid state drive.
  • the device embodiments described above are only schematic.
  • the division of the unit is only a logical function division.
  • multiple units or components may be combined or Can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not implemented.
  • the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, which may be electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each of the units may exist separately physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit. If the functions are implemented in the form of software functional units and sold or used as independent products, they can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of this application is essentially a part that contributes to the existing technology or a part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product.
  • the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to cause a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to perform all or part of the steps of the method described in the embodiments of the present application.
  • a computer device which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.
  • the foregoing storage medium includes various media that can store program codes, such as a U disk, a mobile hard disk, a read-only memory, a random access memory, a magnetic disk, or an optical disk.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

The present application provides a method for receiving a reference signal, the method comprising: a terminal apparatus receiving configuration information from a network apparatus, the configuration information indicating a configuration parameter of a reference signal, wherein the configuration parameter of the reference signal is determined according to a configuration parameter of a discontinuous reception (DRX) mode of the terminal apparatus, or the configuration parameter of the DRX mode is determined according to the configuration parameter of the reference signal; and the terminal apparatus receiving a reference signal from the network apparatus according to the configuration parameter of the reference signal. The invention associates a configuration parameter of a reference signal and a configuration parameter of a DRX mode, so as to increase the likelihood of a terminal apparatus completing beam training and a channel quality measurement during a wake-up period, that is, to increase the likelihood of the terminal apparatus acquiring available beam information during the wake-up period, thereby improving the reliability of communication, and enhancing the user experience.

Description

接收参考信号的方法和通信设备Method and communication device for receiving reference signal

本申请要求于2018年08月06日提交中国专利局、申请号为201810885487.4、申请名称为“接收参考信号的方法和通信设备”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims priority from a Chinese patent application filed with the Chinese Patent Office on August 6, 2018, with application number 201810885487.4, and with the application name "Method and Communication Device for Receiving Reference Signals", the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference. in.

技术领域Technical field

本申请实施例涉及通信领域,并且更具体地,涉及接收参考信号的方法、发送参考信号的方法、发送上行信道的方法、接收上行信道的方法和通信设备。The embodiments of the present application relate to the field of communications, and more specifically, to a method for receiving a reference signal, a method for transmitting a reference signal, a method for transmitting an uplink channel, a method for receiving an uplink channel, and a communication device.

背景技术Background technique

随着通信技术的发展,频谱资源已经难以满足用户对容量需求的爆炸式增长。具有更大的可用带宽的高频频段特别是毫米波频段,日益成为下一代通信系统的候选频段。然而,高频频段将导致更大的路径损耗,特别是大气、植被等因素的影响更进一步加剧了无线传播的损耗。With the development of communication technology, spectrum resources have been difficult to meet the explosive growth of users' capacity requirements. High-frequency bands, especially millimeter-wave bands, with larger available bandwidth are increasingly becoming candidate bands for next-generation communication systems. However, the high-frequency band will cause greater path loss, especially the influence of factors such as the atmosphere and vegetation, which will further exacerbate the loss of wireless propagation.

为克服上述较大的传播损耗,一种基于波束赋形技术的信号传输机制被采用,以通过较大的天线增益来补偿信号传播过程中的上述损耗。In order to overcome the above-mentioned large propagation loss, a signal transmission mechanism based on beamforming technology is adopted to compensate the above-mentioned loss in the signal propagation process through a large antenna gain.

当信号基于波束赋形技术进行传输时,一旦用户发生移动,可能出现传输信号对应的赋形波束的方向不再匹配移动后的用户位置,从而接收信号频繁中断的问题。为跟踪通信过程中的赋形波束变化,一种基于波束赋形技术的信道质量测量及结果上报被引入。该信道质量的测量可以基于波束赋形后的参考信号。When the signal is transmitted based on the beamforming technology, once the user moves, there may be a problem that the direction of the shaped beam corresponding to the transmitted signal no longer matches the position of the user after the movement, and the received signal is frequently interrupted. In order to track the change of the shaped beam during communication, a channel quality measurement and result reporting based on the beamforming technique is introduced. The measurement of the channel quality may be based on a reference signal after beamforming.

另外,为了减小终端设备的功耗,提出了非连续接收(discontinuous reception,DRX)技术,即,在DRX模式下,终端设备可以周期性的在某些时段进入睡眠状态(sleep mode),不去监听承载物理下行控制信道(physical downlink control channel,PDCCH)的子帧,而需要监听的时候,则从睡眠状态中唤醒(wake up),这样就能够使UE到达省电的目的。In addition, in order to reduce the power consumption of the terminal device, a discontinuous reception (DRX) technology is proposed, that is, in the DRX mode, the terminal device can periodically enter a sleep state (sleep mode) in certain periods. To monitor a subframe carrying a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH), and when monitoring is needed, wake up from a sleep state, so that the UE can achieve the purpose of power saving.

但是,在DRX模式下,当终端设备处于睡眠状态时,可能因发生移动等原因而导致该终端设备使用的赋形波束发生变化。例如,终端设备在时段#1处于唤醒状态,并且,终端设备#1可以基于在时段#1内接收到波束#1的参考信号完成信道质量的测量,进而确定使用该波束#1进行通信。在该时段#1之后的时段#2,终端设备进入睡眠状态,并且,在该时段#2期间,终端设备发生移动而离开波束#1的覆盖范围。在时段#2,当终端设备再次醒来后,该波束#1的信息失效,或者说,终端设备无法基于该波束#1进行通信,从而,导致通信错误,降低了通信的可靠性,严重影响用户体验。However, in the DRX mode, when a terminal device is in a sleep state, the shaped beam used by the terminal device may be changed due to movement and other reasons. For example, the terminal device is in the awake state during the period # 1, and the terminal device # 1 may complete the channel quality measurement based on the reference signal received by the beam # 1 during the period # 1, and then determine to use the beam # 1 for communication. During the period # 2 after the period # 1, the terminal device enters the sleep state, and during the period # 2, the terminal device moves and leaves the coverage of the beam # 1. In the period # 2, when the terminal device wakes up again, the information of the beam # 1 becomes invalid, or the terminal device cannot communicate based on the beam # 1, thereby causing communication errors, reducing the reliability of the communication, and severely affecting user experience.

发明内容Summary of the invention

本申请提供一种接收下行参考信号的方法、发送下行参考信号的方法、发送上行信道的方法、接收上行信道的方法和通信设备,能够提高通信的可靠性,改善用户体验。The present application provides a method for receiving a downlink reference signal, a method for sending a downlink reference signal, a method for sending an uplink channel, a method for receiving an uplink channel, and a communication device, which can improve communication reliability and improve user experience.

第一方面,提供了一种接收参考信号的方法,包括:终端设备从网络设备接收配置信息,该配置信息用于指示参考信号的配置参数,其中,该参考信号的配置参数是根据该终端设备的非连续接收DRX模式的配置参数确定的,或者,该DRX模式的配置参数是根据该参考信号的配置参数确定的;该终端设备根据该参考信号的配置参数,从该网络设备接收参考信号。In a first aspect, a method for receiving a reference signal is provided, including: a terminal device receiving configuration information from a network device, the configuration information used to indicate a configuration parameter of the reference signal, wherein the configuration parameter of the reference signal is based on the terminal device The configuration parameters of the discontinuous reception DRX mode are determined, or the configuration parameters of the DRX mode are determined according to the configuration parameters of the reference signal; the terminal device receives the reference signal from the network device according to the configuration parameters of the reference signal.

其中,该参考信号可以包括参考信号。The reference signal may include a reference signal.

根据本申请的方案,通过将参考信号参考信号的配置参数与DRX模式的配置参数相关联,能够提高终端设备在唤醒期间完成波束训练和信道质量测量的可能性,即,能够提高终端设备在唤醒期间获得可使用的波束的信息的可能性,从而能够提高通信的可靠性,能够改善用户体验。According to the solution of the present application, by associating the configuration parameters of the reference signal with the configuration parameters of the DRX mode, the possibility of the terminal device completing beam training and channel quality measurement during the wake-up period can be improved, that is, the terminal device can be improved during wake-up The possibility of obtaining information of the usable beams during this period can improve the reliability of communication and improve the user experience.

需要说明的是,上述“波束”可以理解为空间滤波器或空间参数。It should be noted that the above-mentioned "beam" can be understood as a spatial filter or a spatial parameter.

空间滤波器可以为以下至少之一:预编码,天线端口的权值,天线端口的相位偏转,天线端口的幅度增益。The spatial filter may be at least one of the following: precoding, the weight of the antenna port, the phase deflection of the antenna port, and the amplitude gain of the antenna port.

或者,“波束”可以理解为参考信号,例如用于下行信道测量的信道状态信息参考信号。Alternatively, "beam" can be understood as a reference signal, such as a channel state information reference signal used for downlink channel measurement.

可选地,该参考信号的配置参数包括该参考信号的发送周期T1。Optionally, the configuration parameter of the reference signal includes a sending period T1 of the reference signal.

并且,该DRX模式的配置参数包括DRX的周期T2。And, the configuration parameter of the DRX mode includes a period T2 of the DRX.

在本申请中,一个DRX的周期内可以包括唤醒时段和睡眠时段。In this application, a DRX cycle may include a wake-up period and a sleep period.

其中,该DRX的周期T2也可以理解为DRX模式中唤醒时段的出现周期。The period T2 of the DRX can also be understood as the appearance period of the wake-up period in the DRX mode.

另外,例如,该唤醒时段可以包括持续时间定时器(on duration timer)运行的时段。In addition, for example, the wake-up period may include a period during which a duration timer is running.

再例如,该唤醒时段可以包括DRX非激活定时器(drx-inactivity timer)运行的时段。As another example, the wake-up period may include a period during which a DRX-inactivity timer (drx-inactivity timer) runs.

再例如,该唤醒时段可以包括重传定时器(ReTransmission Timer)运行的时段。As another example, the wake-up period may include a period during which a retransmission timer (ReTransmission Timer) runs.

此外,该参考信号的发送周期也可以理解为相邻的两个相同配置的参考信号的发送时段之间的时间间隔。In addition, the sending period of the reference signal can also be understood as a time interval between sending periods of two neighboring reference signals of the same configuration.

在本申请中,例如,该参考信号的发送周期T1是该DRX的周期T2的整数倍,即,该T1=P×T2,其中,P为正整数。In the present application, for example, the transmission period T1 of the reference signal is an integer multiple of the period T2 of the DRX, that is, T1 = P × T2, where P is a positive integer.

可选地,该P的值可以为通信系统或通信协议预定义的。Optionally, the value of P may be predefined by a communication system or a communication protocol.

或者,该P的值可以为网络设备确定并通过例如高层信令等下发给终端设备的。Alternatively, the value of P may be determined by the network device and delivered to the terminal device through, for example, high-level signaling.

从而,能够确保每个参考信号的发送时段都处于DRX的周期内。Therefore, it is possible to ensure that the transmission period of each reference signal is within the period of the DRX.

再例如,该DRX的周期T2是该参考信号的发送周期T1的整数倍,即,T2=Q×T1,其中,Q为正整数。As another example, the period T2 of the DRX is an integer multiple of the transmission period T1 of the reference signal, that is, T2 = Q × T1, where Q is a positive integer.

可选地,该P的值可以为通信系统或通信协议预定义的。Optionally, the value of P may be predefined by a communication system or a communication protocol.

或者,该P的值可以为网络设备确定并通过例如高层信令等下发给终端设备的。Alternatively, the value of P may be determined by the network device and delivered to the terminal device through, for example, high-level signaling.

从而,能够确保每个DRX的周期内都存在参考信号的发送时段。Therefore, it is possible to ensure that a reference signal transmission period exists in each DRX cycle.

另外,需要说明的是,在本申请中,首个DRX的周期的起始时刻和首个参考信号的发送周期的起始时刻可以相同。In addition, it should be noted that, in this application, the start time of the first DRX cycle and the start time of the first reference signal transmission cycle may be the same.

可选地,该参考信号的配置参数包括该参考信号的时域位置偏移量S1。Optionally, the configuration parameter of the reference signal includes a time domain position offset S1 of the reference signal.

应理解,基站可以为UE配置K个参考信号,K为大于等于1的整数,当K大于1时,不同参考信号可以有不同的时域位置偏移量。It should be understood that the base station may configure K reference signals for the UE, where K is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and when K is greater than 1, different reference signals may have different time domain position offsets.

并且,该DRX模式的配置参数包括该DRX模式的唤醒时段的时域位置偏移量S2。In addition, the configuration parameters of the DRX mode include a time domain position offset S2 of a wake-up period of the DRX mode.

其中,该S1可以用于确定参考信号的传输起始时刻,或者说,该S1可以用于确定参考信号的发送周期的起始时刻。The S1 may be used to determine a transmission start time of a reference signal, or the S1 may be used to determine a start time of a reference signal transmission period.

其中,S2可以用于确定DRX周期的起始时刻。Among them, S2 can be used to determine the start time of the DRX cycle.

或者,S2可以用于确定DRX周期内的唤醒时段的起始时刻。在本申请中,该参考信号的时域位置偏移量S1可以是指参考信号的发送周期的起始时刻相对于预设的基准时刻的偏移量。该基准时刻可以是一个系统帧内的第一个时隙,或任意其他固定的时刻点,这里不做具体限定。Alternatively, S2 may be used to determine a start time of a wake-up period within a DRX cycle. In the present application, the time domain position offset S1 of the reference signal may refer to an offset of a start time of a reference signal transmission period from a preset reference time. The reference time may be the first time slot in a system frame, or any other fixed time point, which is not specifically limited herein.

或者说,在本申请中,该参考信号的时域位置偏移量S1可以用于确定参考信号的起始时刻。In other words, in the present application, the time domain position offset S1 of the reference signal may be used to determine the starting time of the reference signal.

DRX模式的唤醒时段的时域位置偏移量S2可以用于确定DRX模式下唤醒时段的起始时刻。The time domain position offset S2 of the wake-up period in the DRX mode can be used to determine the start time of the wake-up period in the DRX mode.

在本申请中,S1和S2的取值可以分别小于T1和T2的取值。In this application, the values of S1 and S2 may be smaller than the values of T1 and T2, respectively.

例如,在本申请中,系统时域范围可以被划分为多个时间单元。For example, in this application, the system time domain range may be divided into multiple time units.

作为示例而非限定,在本申请中,该时间单元可以包括符号(symbol)、时隙(slot)、迷你时隙(mini-slot,或non-slot)、子帧、传输时间间隔或短传输时间间隔。By way of example and not limitation, in this application, the time unit may include a symbol, a slot, a mini-slot, or a non-slot, a subframe, a transmission time interval, or a short transmission. time interval.

此情况下,该参考信号的时域位置偏移量S1可以是指参考信号的发送的起始时间单元(例如,起始子帧)。In this case, the time domain position offset S1 of the reference signal may refer to a start time unit (for example, a start subframe) of transmission of the reference signal.

或者,在本申请中,该参考信号的时域位置偏移量S1可以是指在每个参考信号的发送周期内,该参考信号的发送时刻相对于该发送周期的起始时刻的偏移量。Alternatively, in the present application, the time domain position offset S1 of the reference signal may refer to an offset of a transmission time of the reference signal with respect to a start time of the transmission period in each reference signal transmission period. .

即,设参考信号的发送周期#1的起始时刻为t#1,发送周期#1内的参考信号的发送的起始时刻为t#2,则该参考信号的时域位置偏移量S1可以是指t#2与t#1的差值。That is, let the start time of the transmission period # 1 of the reference signal be t # 1, and the start time of the transmission of the reference signal in the transmission period # 1 be t # 2, then the time domain position offset S1 of the reference signal It can be the difference between t # 2 and t # 1.

再例如,在本申请中,每个参考信号的发送周期可以包括多个时间单元,此情况下,该参考信号的时域位置偏移量S1可以是指在每个参考信号的发送周期内,该参考信号的发送时段所对应的时间单元在该发送周期所包括的多个时间单元中的序号。For another example, in this application, each reference signal transmission period may include multiple time units. In this case, the time domain position offset S1 of the reference signal may refer to each reference signal transmission period. Sequence numbers of time units corresponding to the sending period of the reference signal in a plurality of time units included in the sending period.

即,设参考信号在时域上对应于每个发送周期的第k个时间单元,则该参考信号的时域位置偏移量S1可以为k,其中,k为正整数或零。That is, assuming that the reference signal corresponds to the k-th time unit of each transmission cycle in the time domain, the time domain position offset S1 of the reference signal may be k, where k is a positive integer or zero.

另外,在本申请中,参考信号的时域位置偏移量S1可以是指首个参考信号发送周期的起始时刻相对于规定的系统基准时刻的偏移量。即,在本申请中,参考信号的发送时刻可以与参考信号的发送周期的起始时刻重合。In addition, in this application, the time domain position offset S1 of the reference signal may refer to an offset of a start time of the first reference signal transmission period from a predetermined system reference time. That is, in this application, the transmission time of the reference signal may coincide with the start time of the transmission cycle of the reference signal.

作为示例而非限定,在本申请中该S1的单位可以是slot。By way of example and not limitation, the unit of S1 in this application may be a slot.

在本申请中,该DRX模式的唤醒时段的时域位置偏移量S2可以是指DRX的唤醒时段的起始时刻相对于预设的基准时刻的偏移量。In the present application, the time domain position offset S2 of the wake-up period of the DRX mode may refer to an offset of a start time of the wake-up period of the DRX from a preset reference time.

例如,在本申请中,系统时域范围可以被划分为多个时间单元。For example, in this application, the system time domain range may be divided into multiple time units.

此情况下,该DRX模式的唤醒时段的时域位置偏移量S2可以是指DRX的周期的起始时间单元(例如,起始子帧)。In this case, the time domain position offset S2 of the wake-up period of the DRX mode may refer to a start time unit (for example, a start subframe) of a period of the DRX.

在本申请中,该DRX模式的唤醒时段的时域位置偏移量S2可以是指在每个DRX的周期内,该唤醒时段相对于该DRX的周期的起始时刻的偏移量。In the present application, the time domain position offset S2 of the wake-up period of the DRX mode may refer to an offset of the wake-up period with respect to a start time of the DRX cycle in each DRX cycle.

再例如,在本申请中,每个DRX的周期可以包括多个时间单元,此情况下,该DRX模式的唤醒时段的时域位置偏移量S2可以是指在每个DRX的周期内,该唤醒时段所对应 的时间单元在该DRX的周期所包括的多个时间单元中的序号。As another example, in this application, each DRX cycle may include multiple time units. In this case, the time domain position offset S2 of the wake-up period of the DRX mode may refer to each DRX cycle. Sequence numbers of time units corresponding to the wake-up period in a plurality of time units included in the DRX cycle.

即,设唤醒时段在时域上对应于每个DRX的周期的第h个时间单元,则该DRX模式的唤醒时段的时域位置偏移量S2可以为h,其中,h为正整数或零。That is, assuming that the wake-up period corresponds to the h-th time unit of each DRX cycle in the time domain, the time-domain position offset S2 of the wake-up period of the DRX mode may be h, where h is a positive integer or zero. .

需要说明的是,在本申请中,该参考信号的发送周期中的时间单元的单位与DRX的周期中的时间单元的单位相同,例如,该参考信号的发送周期中的时间单元与DRX的周期中的时间单元均为符号。或者,例如,该参考信号的发送周期中的时间单元与DRX的周期中的时间单元均为时隙。It should be noted that, in this application, the unit of the time unit in the sending cycle of the reference signal is the same as the unit of the time unit in the cycle of DRX, for example, the time unit in the sending cycle of the reference signal and the cycle of DRX The time units in are all symbols. Or, for example, the time unit in the transmission period of the reference signal and the time unit in the period of DRX are both time slots.

另外,在本申请中,该DRX模式的唤醒时段的时域位置偏移量S2可以是指首个DRX周期的起始时刻相对于规定的系统基准时刻的偏移量。即,在本申请中,DRX模式的唤醒时段的起始时刻可以与所处于的DRX周期的起始时刻重合。In addition, in the present application, the time domain position offset S2 of the wake-up period of the DRX mode may refer to an offset of a start time of the first DRX cycle from a predetermined system reference time. That is, in this application, the start time of the wake-up period of the DRX mode may coincide with the start time of the DRX cycle in which it is located.

作为示例而非限定,例如,在本申请中,该S2可以的偏移量(具体地说,是DRX周期的起始位置在时域上的偏移量),记作drx-StartOffset,并且,作为示例而非限定,该drx-StartOffset的单位可以为毫秒。By way of example and not limitation, for example, in this application, the offset that S2 can (specifically, the offset of the start position of the DRX cycle in the time domain) is denoted as drx-StartOffset, and, By way of example and not limitation, the unit of the drx-StartOffset may be milliseconds.

再例如,在本申请中,该S2可以包括唤醒时段的偏移量(具体地说,是唤醒时段的起始位置在DRX周期内的偏移量),记作drx-SlotOffset,并且,作为示例而非限定,该drx-SlotOffset的单位可以为slot。As another example, in the present application, the S2 may include an offset of the wake-up period (specifically, an offset of a start position of the wake-up period within a DRX cycle), which is denoted as drx-SlotOffset, and, as an example Without limitation, the unit of the drx-SlotOffset may be a slot.

作为示例而非限定,例如,在本申请中,该S2可以为用于确定唤醒时段的起始时刻的偏移量,记作drx-StartOffset,并且,作为示例而非限定,该drx-StartOffset的单位可以为毫秒。By way of example and not limitation, for example, in the present application, S2 may be an offset for determining a start time of a wake-up period, and is denoted as drx-StartOffset, and, as an example and not limitation, The unit can be milliseconds.

另外,作为示例而非限定,该唤醒时段可以包括但不限定于,on duration timer、drx-inactivity timer和DRX Retransmission timer中的至少一个定时器运行期间对应的时段。In addition, by way of example and not limitation, the wake-up period may include, but is not limited to, a period corresponding to at least one of the on-duration timers, drx-inactivity timers, and DRX Retransmission timers.

可选地,基于该S1确定的参考信号的传输起始时刻不早于基于该S2确定的DRX周期的起始时刻。Optionally, the transmission start time of the reference signal determined based on the S1 is not earlier than the start time of the DRX cycle determined based on the S2.

具体地说,设DRX周期#a和参考信号发送周期#b处于同一时间范围内(或者说,周期#a和周期#a具有重合部分)。Specifically, it is assumed that the DRX cycle #a and the reference signal transmission cycle #b are within the same time range (or that the cycle #a and the cycle #a have overlapping portions).

例如,该周期#a的起始时刻可以基于该S2确定(或者说,参考信号的发送时刻可以基于该S2确定),该周期#b的起始时刻可以基于S1确定,其中,周期#b的起始时刻可以与该周期#a的起始时刻相同,或者,周期#b的起始时刻可以位于周期#a的起始时刻之后。For example, the starting time of the cycle #a may be determined based on the S2 (or the sending time of the reference signal may be determined based on the S2), and the starting time of the cycle #b may be determined based on S1, where the cycle # b's The start time may be the same as the start time of the cycle #a, or the start time of the cycle #b may be located after the start time of the cycle #a.

或者,该周期#a的起始时刻可以基于该S2确定,该周期#b内的唤醒时段的起始时刻可以基于S1确定,其中,该周期#b内的唤醒时段的起始时刻可以与该周期#a的起始时刻相同,或者,该周期#b内的唤醒时段的起始时刻可以位于周期#a的起始时刻之后。Alternatively, the start time of the cycle #a may be determined based on the S2, and the start time of the wake-up period in the cycle #b may be determined based on S1, where the start time of the wake-up period in the cycle #b may be related to the The start time of the cycle #a is the same, or the start time of the wake-up period in the cycle #b may be after the start time of the cycle #a.

并且,基于该S1确定的参考信号的传输起始与基于该S2确定的DRX周期的起始时刻之间的时间间隔小于或等于该DRX模式的唤醒时段的长度。And, a time interval between a transmission start of the reference signal determined based on the S1 and a start time of the DRX cycle determined based on the S2 is less than or equal to a length of a wake-up period of the DRX mode.

即,该周期#b的起始时刻落入该周期#b内的唤醒时段内。That is, the start time of the period #b falls within the wake-up period in the period #b.

可选地,K个参考信号中至少存在一个参考信号的时域位置偏移量大于或等于DRX模式的唤醒时段的时域位置偏移量。Optionally, the time domain position offset of at least one of the K reference signals is greater than or equal to the time domain position offset of the wake-up period of the DRX mode.

可选的,该K个参考信号中至少存在一个参考信号的时域位置偏移量的取值使得所述至少一个参考信号的时域位置位于所述DRX模式的唤醒时段。Optionally, the time domain position offset of at least one reference signal in the K reference signals is such that the time domain position of the at least one reference signal is located in the wake-up period of the DRX mode.

即,参考信号的周期#b内的参考信号发送时段的起始时刻位于DRX的周期#a的唤醒时段的起始时刻之后。That is, the start time of the reference signal transmission period within the period #b of the reference signal is after the start time of the wake-up period of the period #a of the DRX.

应理解,这里S1和S2间的关系主要用来实现K个参考信号中的至少一个参考信号的发送时段不早于DRX周期中的唤醒时段。其中,用来表征S1和S2的时间单位(如,毫秒,时隙,符号等)和表示方式可以相同或不同,这里不做具体限定。而S1大于等于S2是指在基于相同的参考标准和或时间单位下对S1和S2进行的比较。It should be understood that the relationship between S1 and S2 is mainly used to implement that the sending period of at least one of the K reference signals is not earlier than the wake-up period in the DRX cycle. The time units (such as milliseconds, time slots, symbols, and so on) and representations used to characterize S1 and S2 may be the same or different, and are not specifically limited here. S1 is greater than or equal to S2, which refers to the comparison between S1 and S2 based on the same reference standard and / or time unit.

即,参考信号的周期#b内的参考信号发送时段的起始时刻位于DRX的周期#a的唤醒时段的结束时刻之前。That is, the start time of the reference signal transmission period within the period #b of the reference signal is before the end time of the wake-up period of the period #a of the DRX.

从而,能够确保在起始时刻相同的DRX的周期和参考信号的发送周期内,参考信号的发送时段位于DRX的唤醒时段内,从而,能够确保终端设备可靠地接收到参考信号。Therefore, it is possible to ensure that the transmission period of the reference signal is within the wake-up period of the DRX within the DRX cycle and the reference signal transmission cycle at the same starting time, thereby ensuring that the terminal device receives the reference signal reliably.

另外,在本申请中,网络设备可以为终端设备发送K个参考信号的配置信息,其中,上述配置参数与DRX模式的配置参数具有对应关系的参考信号可以是该K个中的一个或多个。其中,K为大于或等于2的整数。In addition, in this application, the network device may send configuration information of K reference signals for the terminal device, where the reference signal having a corresponding relationship between the configuration parameter and the configuration parameter of the DRX mode may be one or more of the K reference signals . Here, K is an integer greater than or equal to two.

并且,该K个参考信号中,还可以包括一个或多个配置参数与DRX模式的配置参数无关的参考信号。In addition, the K reference signals may further include one or more reference signals whose configuration parameters are not related to the configuration parameters of the DRX mode.

第二方面,提供了一种发送参考信号的方法,包括:网络设备向终端设备发送配置信息,该配置信息用于指示参考信号的配置参数,其中,该参考信号的配置参数是该网络设备根据该终端设备的非连续接收DRX模式的配置参数确定的,或者,该DRX模式的配置参数是该网络设备根据该参考信号的配置参数确定的;该网络设备根据该参考信号的配置参数,向该终端设备发送参考信号。In a second aspect, a method for sending a reference signal is provided, which includes: a network device sends configuration information to a terminal device, where the configuration information is used to indicate a configuration parameter of the reference signal, wherein the configuration parameter of the reference signal is The discontinuous reception DRX mode configuration parameters of the terminal device are determined, or the DRX mode configuration parameters are determined by the network device according to the configuration parameters of the reference signal; the network device reports the configuration parameters to the reference signal according to the configuration parameters of the reference signal. The terminal device sends a reference signal.

其中,该参考信号可以包括下行参考信号The reference signal may include a downlink reference signal

根据本申请的方案,通过将参考信号的配置参数与DRX模式的配置参数相关联,能够提高终端设备在唤醒期间完成波束训练和信道质量测量的可能性,即,能够提高终端设备在唤醒期间获得可使用的波束的信息的可能性,从而能够提高通信的可靠性,能够改善用户体验。According to the solution of the present application, by associating the configuration parameters of the reference signal with the configuration parameters of the DRX mode, the possibility that the terminal device completes beam training and channel quality measurement during the wake-up period can be improved, that is, the terminal device can obtain The possibility of using available beam information can improve the reliability of communication and improve the user experience.

需要说明的是,上述“波束”可以理解为空间滤波器或空间参数。It should be noted that the above-mentioned "beam" can be understood as a spatial filter or a spatial parameter.

空间滤波器可以为以下至少之一:预编码,天线端口的权值,天线端口的相位偏转,天线端口的幅度增益。The spatial filter may be at least one of the following: precoding, the weight of the antenna port, the phase deflection of the antenna port, and the amplitude gain of the antenna port.

或者,“波束”可以理解为参考信号,例如用于下行信道测量的信道状态信息参考信号。Alternatively, "beam" can be understood as a reference signal, such as a channel state information reference signal used for downlink channel measurement.

可选地,该参考信号的配置参数包括该参考信号的发送周期T1。Optionally, the configuration parameter of the reference signal includes a sending period T1 of the reference signal.

并且,该DRX模式的配置参数包括DRX的周期T2。And, the configuration parameter of the DRX mode includes a period T2 of the DRX.

在本申请中,一个DRX的周期内可以包括唤醒时段和睡眠时段。In this application, a DRX cycle may include a wake-up period and a sleep period.

其中,该DRX的周期T2也可以理解为DRX模式中唤醒时段的出现周期。The period T2 of the DRX can also be understood as the appearance period of the wake-up period in the DRX mode.

另外,例如,该唤醒时段可以包括持续时间定时器运行的时段。In addition, for example, the wake-up period may include a period in which the duration timer runs.

再例如,该唤醒时段可以包括DRX非激活定时器运行的时段。As another example, the wake-up period may include a period during which the DRX inactive timer runs.

再例如,该唤醒时段可以包括重传定时器运行的时段。As another example, the wake-up period may include a period during which the retransmission timer runs.

此外,该参考信号的发送周期也可以理解为相邻的两个参考信号的发送时段之间的时间间隔。In addition, the sending period of the reference signal can also be understood as a time interval between sending periods of two adjacent reference signals.

在本申请中,例如,该参考信号的发送周期T1是该DRX的周期T2的整数倍,即, 该T1=P×T2,其中,P为正整数。In the present application, for example, the transmission period T1 of the reference signal is an integer multiple of the period T2 of the DRX, that is, T1 = P × T2, where P is a positive integer.

可选地,该P的值可以为通信系统或通信协议预定义的。Optionally, the value of P may be predefined by a communication system or a communication protocol.

或者,该P的值可以为网络设备确定并通过例如高层信令等下发给终端设备的。Alternatively, the value of P may be determined by the network device and delivered to the terminal device through, for example, high-level signaling.

从而,能够确保每个参考信号的发送时段都处于DRX的周期内。Therefore, it is possible to ensure that the transmission period of each reference signal is within the period of the DRX.

再例如,该DRX的周期T2是该参考信号的发送周期T1的整数倍,即,T2=Q×T1,其中,Q为正整数。As another example, the period T2 of the DRX is an integer multiple of the transmission period T1 of the reference signal, that is, T2 = Q × T1, where Q is a positive integer.

可选地,该Q的值可以为通信系统或通信协议预定义的。Optionally, the value of Q may be predefined by a communication system or a communication protocol.

或者,该Q的值可以为网络设备确定并通过例如高层信令等下发给终端设备的。Alternatively, the value of Q may be determined by the network device and delivered to the terminal device through, for example, high-level signaling.

从而,能够确保每个DRX的周期内都存在参考信号的发送时段。Therefore, it is possible to ensure that a reference signal transmission period exists in each DRX cycle.

另外,需要说明的是,在本申请中,首个DRX的周期的起始时刻和首个参考信号的发送周期的起始时刻可以相同。In addition, it should be noted that, in this application, the start time of the first DRX cycle and the start time of the first reference signal transmission cycle may be the same.

可选地,该参考信号的配置参数包括该参考信号的时域位置偏移量S1。Optionally, the configuration parameter of the reference signal includes a time domain position offset S1 of the reference signal.

应理解,基站可以为UE配置K个参考信号,K为大于等于1的整数,当K大于1时,不同参考信号可以有不同的时域位置偏移量。It should be understood that the base station may configure K reference signals for the UE, where K is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and when K is greater than 1, different reference signals may have different time domain position offsets.

并且,该DRX模式的配置参数包括该DRX模式的唤醒时段的时域位置偏移量S2。In addition, the configuration parameters of the DRX mode include a time domain position offset S2 of a wake-up period of the DRX mode.

可选地,K个参考信号中至少存在一个参考信号的时域位置偏移量大于或等于DRX模式的唤醒时段的时域位置偏移量。Optionally, the time domain position offset of at least one of the K reference signals is greater than or equal to the time domain position offset of the wake-up period of the DRX mode.

可选的,该K个参考信号中至少存在一个参考信号的时域位置偏移量的取值使得所述至少一个参考信号的时域位置位于所述DRX模式的唤醒时段。Optionally, the time domain position offset of at least one reference signal in the K reference signals is such that the time domain position of the at least one reference signal is located in the wake-up period of the DRX mode.

在本申请中,该参考信号的时域位置偏移量S1可以是指在每个参考信号的发送周期内,该参考信号的发送时段相对于该发送周期的起始时刻的偏移量。In the present application, the time domain position offset S1 of the reference signal may refer to an offset of a transmission period of the reference signal with respect to a start time of the transmission period within each transmission period of the reference signal.

或者,在本申请中,该参考信号的时域位置偏移量S1可以用于确定参考信号的起始时刻。Alternatively, in the present application, the time-domain position offset S1 of the reference signal may be used to determine a start time of the reference signal.

DRX模式的唤醒时段的时域位置偏移量S2可以用于确定DRX模式下唤醒时段的起始时刻。The time domain position offset S2 of the wake-up period in the DRX mode can be used to determine the start time of the wake-up period in the DRX mode.

在本申请中,S1和S2的取值可以分别小于T1和T2的取值。In this application, the values of S1 and S2 may be smaller than the values of T1 and T2, respectively.

即,设参考信号的发送周期#1的起始时刻为t#1,发送周期#1内的参考信号的发送时段的起始时刻为t#2,则该参考信号的时域位置偏移量S1可以是指t#2与t#1的差值。That is, let the start time of the transmission period # 1 of the reference signal be t # 1, and the start time of the transmission period of the reference signal in the transmission period # 1 be t # 2, then the time domain position offset of the reference signal S1 can be the difference between t # 2 and t # 1.

再例如,在本申请中,每个参考信号的发送周期可以包括多个时间单元,此情况下,该参考信号的时域位置偏移量S1可以是指在每个参考信号的发送周期内,该参考信号的发送时段所对应的时间单元在该发送周期所包括的多个时间单元中的序号。For another example, in this application, each reference signal transmission period may include multiple time units. In this case, the time domain position offset S1 of the reference signal may refer to each reference signal transmission period. Sequence numbers of time units corresponding to the sending period of the reference signal in a plurality of time units included in the sending period.

作为示例而非限定,在本申请中,该时间单元可以包括符号、时隙、迷你时隙、传输时间间隔或短传输时间间隔。By way of example and not limitation, in this application, the time unit may include a symbol, a time slot, a mini time slot, a transmission time interval, or a short transmission time interval.

即,设参考信号在时域上对应于每个发送周期的第k个时间单元,则该参考信号的时域位置偏移量S1可以为k,其中,k为正整数或零。That is, assuming that the reference signal corresponds to the k-th time unit of each transmission cycle in the time domain, the time domain position offset S1 of the reference signal may be k, where k is a positive integer or zero.

作为示例而非限定,该S1的单位可以包括slot。By way of example and not limitation, the unit of S1 may include a slot.

在本申请中,该DRX模式的唤醒时段的时域位置偏移量S2可以是指在每个DRX的周期内,该唤醒时段相对于该DRX的周期的起始时刻的偏移量。In the present application, the time domain position offset S2 of the wake-up period of the DRX mode may refer to an offset of the wake-up period with respect to a start time of the DRX cycle in each DRX cycle.

再例如,在本申请中,每个DRX的周期可以包括多个时间单元,此情况下,该DRX 模式的唤醒时段的时域位置偏移量S2可以是指在每个DRX的周期内,该唤醒时段所对应的时间单元在该DRX的周期所包括的多个时间单元中的序号。As another example, in the present application, each DRX cycle may include multiple time units. In this case, the time domain position offset S2 of the wake-up period of the DRX mode may refer to each DRX cycle. Sequence numbers of time units corresponding to the wake-up period in a plurality of time units included in the DRX cycle.

即,设唤醒时段的起始时刻在时域上对应于每个DRX的周期的第h个时间单元,则该DRX模式的唤醒时段的时域位置偏移量S2可以为h,其中,h为正整数或零。That is, assuming that the start time of the wake-up period corresponds to the h-th time unit of each DRX cycle in the time domain, the time-domain position offset S2 of the wake-up period of the DRX mode may be h, where h is Positive integer or zero.

需要说明的是,在本申请中,该参考信号的发送周期中的时间单元的单位与DRX的周期中的时间单元的单位相同,例如,该参考信号的发送周期中的时间单元与DRX的周期中的时间单元均为符号。或者,例如,该参考信号的发送周期中的时间单元与DRX的周期中的时间单元均为时隙或子帧,或任意其他时间单位,这里不做具体限定。It should be noted that, in this application, the unit of the time unit in the sending cycle of the reference signal is the same as the unit of the time unit in the cycle of DRX, for example, the time unit in the sending cycle of the reference signal and the cycle of DRX The time units in are all symbols. Or, for example, the time unit in the sending period of the reference signal and the time unit in the DRX cycle are both time slots or subframes, or any other time unit, which are not specifically limited herein.

作为示例而非限定,例如,在本申请中,该S2可以包括DRX周期的偏移量(具体地说,是DRX周期的起始位置在时域上的偏移量),记作drx-StartOffset,并且,作为示例而非限定,该drx-StartOffset的单位可以为毫秒。By way of example and not limitation, for example, in this application, the S2 may include the offset of the DRX cycle (specifically, the offset of the start position of the DRX cycle in the time domain), which is denoted as drx-StartOffset And, as an example and not limitation, the unit of the drx-StartOffset may be milliseconds.

再例如,在本申请中,该S2可以包括唤醒时段的偏移量(具体地说,是唤醒时段的起始位置在DRX周期内的偏移量),记作drx-SlotOffset,并且,作为示例而非限定,该drx-SlotOffset的单位可以为slot。As another example, in the present application, the S2 may include an offset of the wake-up period (specifically, an offset of a start position of the wake-up period within a DRX cycle), which is denoted as drx-SlotOffset, and, as an example, Without limitation, the unit of the drx-SlotOffset may be a slot.

另外,作为示例而非限定,该唤醒时段可以包括但不限定于,on duration timer、drx-inactivity timer和DRX Retransmission timer中的至少一个定时器运行期间对应的时段。In addition, by way of example and not limitation, the wake-up period may include, but is not limited to, a period corresponding to at least one of the on-duration timers, drx-inactivity timers, and DRX Retransmission timers.

可选地,在本申请中,S1对应的时间长度大于或等于S2对应的时间长度。Optionally, in this application, the time length corresponding to S1 is greater than or equal to the time length corresponding to S2.

即,参考信号的周期#b内的参考信号发送时段的起始时刻位于DRX的周期#a的唤醒时段的起始时刻之后。That is, the start time of the reference signal transmission period within the period #b of the reference signal is after the start time of the wake-up period of the period #a of the DRX.

应理解,这里S1和S2间的关系主要用来实现K个参考信号中的至少一个参考信号的发送时段不早于DRX周期中的唤醒时段。其中,用来表征S1和S2的时间单位(如,毫秒,时隙,符号等)和表示方式可以相同或不同,这里不做具体限定。而S1大于等于S2是指在基于相同的参考标准和或时间单位下对S1和S2进行的比较。It should be understood that the relationship between S1 and S2 is mainly used to implement that the sending period of at least one of the K reference signals is not earlier than the wake-up period in the DRX cycle. The time units (such as milliseconds, time slots, symbols, and so on) and representations used to characterize S1 and S2 may be the same or different, and are not specifically limited here. S1 is greater than or equal to S2, which refers to the comparison between S1 and S2 based on the same reference standard and / or time unit.

其中,该S1可以用于确定参考信号的传输起始时刻,或者说,该S1可以用于确定参考信号的发送周期的起始时刻。The S1 may be used to determine a transmission start time of a reference signal, or the S1 may be used to determine a start time of a reference signal transmission period.

其中,S2可以用于确定DRX周期的起始时刻。Among them, S2 can be used to determine the start time of the DRX cycle.

或者,S2可以用于确定DRX周期内的唤醒时段的起始时刻。Alternatively, S2 may be used to determine a start time of a wake-up period within a DRX cycle.

可选地,基于该S1确定的参考信号的传输起始时刻不早于基于该S2确定的DRX周期的起始时刻。Optionally, the transmission start time of the reference signal determined based on the S1 is not earlier than the start time of the DRX cycle determined based on the S2.

具体地说,设DRX周期#a和参考信号发送周期#b处于同一时间范围内(或者说,周期#a和周期#a具有重合部分)。Specifically, it is assumed that the DRX cycle #a and the reference signal transmission cycle #b are within the same time range (or that the cycle #a and the cycle #a have overlapping portions).

例如,该周期#a的起始时刻可以基于该S2确定(或者说,参考信号的发送时刻可以基于该S2确定),该周期#b的起始时刻可以基于S1确定,其中,周期#b的起始时刻可以与该周期#a的起始时刻相同,或者,周期#b的起始时刻可以位于周期#a的起始时刻之后。For example, the starting time of the cycle #a may be determined based on the S2 (or the sending time of the reference signal may be determined based on the S2), and the starting time of the cycle #b may be determined based on S1, where the cycle # b's The start time may be the same as the start time of the cycle #a, or the start time of the cycle #b may be located after the start time of the cycle #a.

或者,该周期#a的起始时刻可以基于该S2确定,该周期#b内的唤醒时段的起始时刻可以基于S1确定,其中,该周期#b内的唤醒时段的起始时刻可以与该周期#a的起始时刻相同,或者,该周期#b内的唤醒时段的起始时刻可以位于周期#a的起始时刻之后。Alternatively, the start time of the cycle #a may be determined based on the S2, and the start time of the wake-up period in the cycle #b may be determined based on S1, where the start time of the wake-up period in the cycle #b may be related to the The start time of the cycle #a is the same, or the start time of the wake-up period in the cycle #b may be after the start time of the cycle #a.

并且,基于该S1确定的参考信号的传输起始与基于该S2确定的DRX周期的起始时 刻之间的时间间隔小于或等于该DRX模式的唤醒时段的长度。And, a time interval between the transmission start of the reference signal determined based on the S1 and the start time of the DRX cycle determined based on the S2 is less than or equal to the length of the wake-up period of the DRX mode.

即,该周期#b的起始时刻落入该周期#b内的唤醒时段内。That is, the start time of the period #b falls within the wake-up period in the period #b.

可选地,S1对应的时间长度与S2对应的时间长度的差值小于或等于该DRX模式的唤醒时段的时间长度。Optionally, the difference between the time length corresponding to S1 and the time length corresponding to S2 is less than or equal to the time length of the wake-up period of the DRX mode.

即,参考信号的周期#b内的参考信号发送时段的起始时刻位于DRX的周期#a的唤醒时段的起始时刻之后。That is, the start time of the reference signal transmission period within the period #b of the reference signal is after the start time of the wake-up period of the period #a of the DRX.

即,参考信号的周期#b内的参考信号发送时段的起始时刻位于DRX的周期#a的唤醒时段的结束时刻之前。That is, the start time of the reference signal transmission period within the period #b of the reference signal is before the end time of the wake-up period of the period #a of the DRX.

从而,能够确保在起始时刻相同的DRX的周期和参考信号的发送周期内,参考信号的发送时段位于DRX的唤醒时段内,从而,能够确保终端设备可靠地接收到参考信号。Therefore, it is possible to ensure that the transmission period of the reference signal is within the wake-up period of the DRX within the DRX cycle and the reference signal transmission cycle at the same starting time, thereby ensuring that the terminal device receives the reference signal reliably.

另外,在本申请中,网络设备可以为终端设备发送K个参考信号的配置信息,其中,上述配置参数与DRX模式的配置参数具有对应关系的参考信号可以是该K个中的一个或多个。其中,K为大于或等于2的整数。In addition, in this application, the network device may send configuration information of K reference signals for the terminal device, where the reference signal having a corresponding relationship between the configuration parameter and the configuration parameter of the DRX mode may be one or more of the K reference signals . Here, K is an integer greater than or equal to two.

并且,该K个参考信号中,还可以包括一个或多个配置参数与DRX模式的配置参数无关的参考信号。In addition, the K reference signals may further include one or more reference signals whose configuration parameters are not related to the configuration parameters of the DRX mode.

第三方面,提供一种发送上行信道的方法,包括:终端设备从网络设备接收第一重复次数的指示信息,该第一重复次数属于第一重复次数集合,该第一重复次数集合包括至少一个重复次数,该第一重复次数集合专用于非连续接收DRX模式;该终端设备在处于该DRX模式下的期间内,根据该第一重复次数发送上行信道。According to a third aspect, a method for transmitting an uplink channel is provided, including: receiving, by a terminal device, indication information of a first number of repetitions from a network device, where the first number of repetitions belongs to a first number of repetitions set, and the first number of repetitions set includes at least one The number of repetitions, the first set of repetition times is dedicated to a discontinuous reception DRX mode; the terminal device sends an uplink channel according to the first number of repetitions during a period in the DRX mode.

在本申请中,“发送上行信道”可以理解为在上行信道上发送信息或信号,例如,参考信号、数据或控制信息等。In this application, “sending an uplink channel” can be understood as sending information or signals on the uplink channel, for example, reference signals, data, or control information.

可选地,该上行信道用于承载信道质量信息。Optionally, the uplink channel is used to carry channel quality information.

根据本申请的方案,通过为DRX模式独立配置重复次数集合,能够在DRX模式下因用户移动等原因而导致终端设备无法获得上行波束信息进而无法完成上行信道的发送的情况下,提高上行信道传输的可靠性和接收性能。According to the solution of this application, by independently configuring the repetition number set for the DRX mode, it is possible to improve the transmission of the uplink channel when the terminal device cannot obtain the uplink beam information and cannot complete the transmission of the uplink channel due to user movement and other reasons in the DRX mode. Reliability and reception performance.

需要说明的是,上述“波束”可以理解为空间滤波器或空间参数。It should be noted that the above-mentioned "beam" can be understood as a spatial filter or a spatial parameter.

空间滤波器可以为以下至少之一:预编码,天线端口的权值,天线端口的相位偏转,天线端口的幅度增益。The spatial filter may be at least one of the following: precoding, the weight of the antenna port, the phase deflection of the antenna port, and the amplitude gain of the antenna port.

或者,“波束”可以理解为参考信号,例如用于下行信道测量的信道状态信息参考信号。Alternatively, "beam" can be understood as a reference signal, such as a channel state information reference signal used for downlink channel measurement.

其中,该第一重复次数集合专用于非连续接收DRX模式可以理解为,该第一重复次数集合仅在DRX模式使用,不能在非DRX模式下使用。The first set of repetition times is dedicated to the discontinuous reception DRX mode. It can be understood that the first set of repetition times is used only in the DRX mode and cannot be used in the non-DRX mode.

该第一重复次数集合专用于非连续接收DRX模式可以理解为,该第二重复次数集合的使用不区分DRX模式和非DRX模式,即,第二重复次数集合在使用DRX模式和非DRX模式下均能够使用,而该第一重复次数集合的使用要区分DRX模式和非DRX模式,即该第一重复次数集合不在非DRX模式下使用,且该第一重复次数集合能够在DRX模式下使用。The first set of repetition times is dedicated to the discontinuous reception DRX mode. It can be understood that the use of the second set of repetition times does not distinguish between DRX mode and non-DRX mode, that is, the second set of repetition times is under the use of DRX mode and non-DRX mode Both can be used, and the use of the first set of repetition times needs to distinguish between DRX mode and non-DRX mode, that is, the first set of repetition times is not used in non-DRX mode, and the first set of repetition times can be used in DRX mode.

或者,该第一重复次数集合专用于非连续接收DRX模式可以理解为,在DRX模式使用的重复次数集合(即,第一重复次数集合)与在非DRX模式使用的重复次数集合(即,第二重复次数集合)相异。Alternatively, the first set of repetition times dedicated to the discontinuous reception DRX mode can be understood as the set of repetition times used in the DRX mode (that is, the first set of repetition times) and the set of repetition times used in the non-DRX mode (that is, the first The set of two repetitions) is different.

例如,可选地,该第一重复次数集合中最大的重复次数大于或等于第二重复次数集合中最大的重复次数,该第二重复次数集合包括至少一个重复次数,该第二重复次数集合用于非DRX模式。For example, optionally, the maximum number of repetitions in the first set of repetitions is greater than or equal to the maximum number of repetitions in the second set of repetitions, and the second set of repetitions includes at least one number of repetitions. In non-DRX mode.

或者,该第一重复次数集合专用于非连续接收DRX模式可以理解为,在DRX模式使用的重复次数集合(即,第一重复次数集合)相对于在非DRX模式使用的重复次数集合(即,第二重复次数集合)独立配置。Alternatively, the first set of repetition times dedicated to the discontinuous reception DRX mode can be understood as the set of repetition times used in the DRX mode (ie, the first set of repetition times) relative to the set of repetition times used in the non-DRX mode (ie, The second set of repetition times) is independently configured.

可选地,在非DRX模式下上行信道是采用非重复传输方式传输的,等价于上行信道的重复次数为1。Optionally, in a non-DRX mode, the uplink channel is transmitted in a non-repeating transmission manner, which is equivalent to the number of repetitions of the uplink channel being 1.

即,该第一重复次数集合专用于非连续接收DRX模式可以理解为,在DRX模式下可以采用重复传输方式(即,基于第一重复次数集合进行的传输方式)进行信道质量信息的传输,在非DRX模式下可以采用非重复传输方式(或者说,一次性传输方式)进行信道质量信息的传输。That is, the first set of repetition times is dedicated to the discontinuous reception DRX mode. It can be understood that in the DRX mode, the transmission quality information can be transmitted in a repeated transmission mode (that is, a transmission mode based on the first set of repetition times). In the non-DRX mode, a non-repeated transmission mode (or a one-time transmission mode) can be used to transmit channel quality information.

可选地,该终端设备在处于该DRX模式下的期间内,根据该第一重复次数发送上行信道,包括:该终端设备在处于该DRX模式下的期间内,在接收到该上行信道的波束指示信息之前,根据该第一重复次数发送上行信道。Optionally, the terminal device sending an uplink channel according to the first repetition number during a period in the DRX mode includes: the terminal device receiving a beam of the uplink channel during the period in the DRX mode Before the indication information, the uplink channel is sent according to the first repetition number.

可选地,该方法还包括:该终端设备在处于该DRX模式下的期间内,在接收到该上行信道的波束指示信息之后,向该网络设备发送确认信息,该确认信息用于指示该终端设备接收到该上行信道的波束指示信息;该终端设备根据第二重复次数发送上行信道,该第二重复次数属于第二重复次数集合,该第二重复次数集合包括至少一个重复次数,该第二重复次数集合专用于非DRX模式。Optionally, the method further includes: after the terminal device is in the DRX mode, after receiving the beam indication information of the uplink channel, sending the confirmation information to the network device, the confirmation information is used to instruct the terminal The device receives the beam indication information of the uplink channel; the terminal device sends the uplink channel according to a second repetition number, the second repetition number belongs to a second repetition number set, the second repetition number set includes at least one repetition number, and the second The repetition set is dedicated to non-DRX mode.

其中,“在接收到该上行信道的波束指示信息之前,根据该第一重复次数发送上行信道”和“在接收到该上行信道的波束指示信息之后,向该网络设备发送确认信息,该确认信息用于指示该终端设备接收到该上行信道的波束指示信息”中的“波束指示信息”是指同一波束指示信息,即,该终端设备需要发送的上行信道所使用的波束的波束指示信息。Among them, "before receiving the beam indication information of the uplink channel, send the uplink channel according to the first repetition number" and "after receiving the beam indication information of the uplink channel, send confirmation information to the network device, the confirmation information The "beam instruction information" in the "beam instruction information used to indicate that the terminal device receives the uplink channel" refers to the same beam instruction information, that is, the beam instruction information of a beam used by the terminal device for the uplink channel to be transmitted.

通过使终端设备在DRX模式下,在接收到该上行信道的波束指示信息之后采用较小的重复发送次数发送上行信道,能够减少功耗。By enabling the terminal device in the DRX mode to transmit the uplink channel with a small number of repeated transmissions after receiving the beam indication information of the uplink channel, power consumption can be reduced.

可选地,该方法还包括:该终端设备在处于该DRX模式下的期间内,在接收到该上行信道的波束指示信息之后,向该网络设备发送确认信息,该确认信息用于指示该终端设备接收到该上行信道的波束指示信息;该终端设备采用非重复传输方式发送上行信道。Optionally, the method further includes: after the terminal device is in the DRX mode, after receiving the beam indication information of the uplink channel, sending the confirmation information to the network device, the confirmation information is used to instruct the terminal The device receives the beam indication information of the uplink channel; the terminal device sends the uplink channel in a non-repeating transmission manner.

通过使终端设备在DRX模式下,在接收到该上行信道的波束指示信息之后采用非重复传输方式发送上行信道,能够减少因重复发送上行信道而导致的功耗和资源浪费。By enabling the terminal device to send the uplink channel in a non-repeating transmission manner after receiving the beam indication information of the uplink channel in the DRX mode, power consumption and resource waste caused by repeatedly sending the uplink channel can be reduced.

第四方面,提供一种接收上行信道的方法,包括:网络设备向终端设备发送第一重复次数的指示信息,该第一重复次数属于第一重复次数集合,该第一重复次数集合包括至少一个重复次数,该第一重复次数集合专用于非连续接收DRX模式;该网络设备在该终端设备在处于该DRX模式下的期间内,根据该第一重复次数接收上行信道。According to a fourth aspect, a method for receiving an uplink channel is provided, including: sending, by a network device, indication information of a first repetition number to a terminal device, where the first repetition number belongs to a first repetition number set, and the first repetition number set includes at least one The number of repetitions, the first set of repetition times is dedicated to the discontinuous reception DRX mode; the network device receives the uplink channel according to the first number of repetitions while the terminal device is in the DRX mode.

在本申请中,“接收上行信道”可以理解为在上行信道上接收信息或信号,例如,参考信号、数据或控制信息等。In the present application, "receiving an uplink channel" can be understood as receiving information or signals on the uplink channel, for example, reference signals, data, or control information.

可选地,该上行信道用于承载信道质量信息。Optionally, the uplink channel is used to carry channel quality information.

根据本申请的方案,通过为DRX模式独立配置重复次数集合,能够在DRX模式下因 用户移动等原因而导致终端设备无法获得上行波束信息进而无法完成上行信道的发送的情况下,提高上行信道传输的可靠性和接收性能。According to the solution of this application, by independently configuring the repetition number set for the DRX mode, it is possible to improve the transmission of the uplink channel when the terminal device cannot obtain the uplink beam information and cannot complete the transmission of the uplink channel due to user movement and other reasons in the DRX mode. Reliability and reception performance.

需要说明的是,上述“波束”可以理解为空间滤波器或空间参数。It should be noted that the above-mentioned "beam" can be understood as a spatial filter or a spatial parameter.

空间滤波器可以为以下至少之一:预编码,天线端口的权值,天线端口的相位偏转,天线端口的幅度增益。The spatial filter may be at least one of the following: precoding, the weight of the antenna port, the phase deflection of the antenna port, and the amplitude gain of the antenna port.

或者,“波束”可以理解为参考信号,例如用于下行信道测量的信道状态信息参考信号。Alternatively, "beam" can be understood as a reference signal, such as a channel state information reference signal used for downlink channel measurement.

其中,该第一重复次数集合专用于非连续接收DRX模式可以理解为,该第一重复次数集合仅在DRX模式使用,不能在非DRX模式下使用。The first set of repetition times is dedicated to the discontinuous reception DRX mode. It can be understood that the first set of repetition times is used only in the DRX mode and cannot be used in the non-DRX mode.

或者,该第一重复次数集合专用于非连续接收DRX模式可以理解为,在DRX模式使用的重复次数集合(即,第一重复次数集合)与在非DRX模式使用的重复次数集合(即,第二重复次数集合)相异。Alternatively, the first set of repetition times dedicated to the discontinuous reception DRX mode can be understood as the set of repetition times used in the DRX mode (that is, the first set of repetition times) and the set of repetition times used in the non-DRX mode (that is, the first The set of two repetitions) is different.

例如,可选地,该第一重复次数集合中最大的重复次数大于或等于第二重复次数集合中最大的重复次数,该第二重复次数集合包括至少一个重复次数,该第二重复次数集合用于非DRX模式,或者该第二重复次数集合不专用于DRX模式。For example, optionally, the maximum number of repetitions in the first set of repetitions is greater than or equal to the maximum number of repetitions in the second set of repetitions, and the second set of repetitions includes at least one number of repetitions. In non-DRX mode, or the second set of repetition times is not dedicated to DRX mode.

或者,该第一重复次数集合专用于非连续接收DRX模式可以理解为,在DRX模式使用的重复次数集合(即,第一重复次数集合)相对于在非DRX模式使用的重复次数集合(即,第二重复次数集合)独立配置。Alternatively, the first set of repetition times dedicated to the discontinuous reception DRX mode can be understood as the set of repetition times used in the DRX mode (ie, the first set of repetition times) relative to the set of repetition times used in the non-DRX mode (ie, The second set of repetition times) is independently configured.

可选地,在非DRX模式下上行信道是采用非重复传输方式传输的,等价于上行信道的重复次数为1。Optionally, in a non-DRX mode, the uplink channel is transmitted in a non-repeating transmission manner, which is equivalent to the number of repetitions of the uplink channel being 1.

即,该第一重复次数集合专用于非连续接收DRX模式可以理解为,在DRX模式下可以采用重复传输方式(即,基于第一重复次数集合进行的传输方式)进行信道质量信息的传输,在非DRX模式下可以采用非重复传输方式(或者说,一次性传输方式)进行信道质量信息的传输。That is, the first set of repetition times is dedicated to the discontinuous reception DRX mode. It can be understood that in the DRX mode, the transmission quality information can be transmitted in a repeated transmission mode (that is, a transmission mode based on the first set of repetition times). In the non-DRX mode, a non-repeated transmission mode (or a one-time transmission mode) can be used to transmit channel quality information.

可选地,该网络设备向该终端设备发送该上行信道的波束指示信息;以及该网络设备在该终端设备处于该DRX模式下的期间内,根据该第一重复次数集合,接收上行信道,包括:该网络设备在该终端设备处于该DRX模式下的期间内,在接收到该终端设备发送的确认信息之前,根据该第一重复次数接收上行信道,该确认信息用于指示该终端设备接收到该上行信道的波束指示信息。Optionally, the network device sends beam indication information of the uplink channel to the terminal device; and the network device receives the uplink channel according to the first set of repetition times while the terminal device is in the DRX mode, including: : During the period when the terminal device is in the DRX mode, the network device receives an uplink channel according to the first repetition number before receiving the confirmation information sent by the terminal device, and the confirmation information is used to instruct the terminal device to receive Beam indication information of the uplink channel.

可选地,该方法还包括:该网络设备向该终端设备发送该上行信道的波束指示信息;该网络设备在该终端设备处于该DRX模式下的期间内,在接收到该终端设备发送的确认信息之后,根据第二重复次数接收上行信道,该第二重复次数属于第二重复次数集合,该第二重复次数集合包括至少一个重复次数,该第二重复次数集合用于非DRX模式,该确认信息用于指示该终端设备接收到该上行信道的波束指示信息。Optionally, the method further includes: the network device sends beam indication information of the uplink channel to the terminal device; the network device receives a confirmation sent by the terminal device during a period when the terminal device is in the DRX mode After the information is received, the uplink channel is received according to a second repetition number, which belongs to a second repetition number set, the second repetition number set includes at least one repetition number, the second repetition number set is used in a non-DRX mode, the confirmation The information is used to indicate that the terminal device receives beam indication information of the uplink channel.

通过使终端设备在DRX模式下,在接收到该上行信道的波束指示信息之后采用较小的重复发送次数发送上行信道,能够减少功耗。By enabling the terminal device in the DRX mode to transmit the uplink channel with a small number of repeated transmissions after receiving the beam indication information of the uplink channel, power consumption can be reduced.

可选地,该方法还包括:该网络设备向该终端设备发送该上行信道的波束指示信息;该网络设备在该终端设备处于该DRX模式下的期间内,在接收到该终端设备发送的确认信息之后,采用非重复传输方式接收上行信道,该确认信息用于指示该终端设备接收到该上行信道的波束指示信息。Optionally, the method further includes: the network device sends beam indication information of the uplink channel to the terminal device; the network device receives a confirmation sent by the terminal device during a period when the terminal device is in the DRX mode After the information is received, the uplink channel is received in a non-repeated transmission manner, and the confirmation information is used to indicate that the terminal device receives beam indication information of the uplink channel.

通过使终端设备在DRX模式下,在接收到该上行信道的波束指示信息之后采用非重复传输方式发送上行信道,能够减少因重复发送上行信道而导致的功耗。By enabling the terminal device to send the uplink channel in a non-repeating transmission manner after receiving the beam indication information of the uplink channel in the DRX mode, power consumption caused by repeatedly sending the uplink channel can be reduced.

第五方面,提供了一种发送上行信道的方法,包括:终端设备从网络设备接收配置信息,该配置信息用于指示上行信道的配置参数,其中,该上行信道的配置参数是根据该终端设备的非连续接收DRX模式的配置参数确定的,或者,该DRX模式的配置参数是根据该上行信道的配置参数确定的;该终端设备根据该上行信道的配置参数,向该网络设备发送上行信道。According to a fifth aspect, a method for sending an uplink channel is provided, including: a terminal device receiving configuration information from a network device, where the configuration information is used to indicate a configuration parameter of the uplink channel, wherein the configuration parameter of the uplink channel is based on the terminal device The configuration parameters of the discontinuous reception DRX mode are determined, or the configuration parameters of the DRX mode are determined according to the configuration parameters of the uplink channel; the terminal device sends the uplink channel to the network device according to the configuration parameters of the uplink channel.

其中,“发送上行信道”可以理解为,在上行信道上发送信息或信号,例如,数据、控制信息或参考信号。The “sending uplink channel” can be understood as sending information or signals on the uplink channel, for example, data, control information, or reference signals.

可选地,该上行信道用于承载探测参考信号(sounding reference signal,SRS)。Optionally, the uplink channel is used to carry a sounding reference signal (SRS).

可选地,该上行信道用于承载信道质量信息。Optionally, the uplink channel is used to carry channel quality information.

其中,该信道质量信息可以是终端设备根据网络设备发送的下行参考信号进行信道质量测量后确定的。The channel quality information may be determined after the terminal device performs channel quality measurement according to the downlink reference signal sent by the network device.

根据本申请的方案,通过将上行信道的配置参数与DRX模式的配置参数相关联,能够提高终端设备在唤醒期间完成波束训练和信道质量测量的可能性,即,能够提高终端设备在唤醒期间获得可使用的波束的信息的可能性,从而能够提高通信的可靠性,能够改善用户体验。According to the solution of the present application, by associating the configuration parameters of the uplink channel with the configuration parameters of the DRX mode, the possibility that the terminal device completes beam training and channel quality measurement during the wake-up period can be improved, that is, the terminal device can be obtained during the wake-up period. The possibility of using available beam information can improve the reliability of communication and improve the user experience.

需要说明的是,上述“波束”可以理解为空间滤波器或空间参数。It should be noted that the above-mentioned "beam" can be understood as a spatial filter or a spatial parameter.

空间滤波器可以为以下至少之一:预编码,天线端口的权值,天线端口的相位偏转,天线端口的幅度增益。The spatial filter may be at least one of the following: precoding, the weight of the antenna port, the phase deflection of the antenna port, and the amplitude gain of the antenna port.

或者,“波束”可以理解为参考信号,例如用于下行信道测量的信道状态信息参考信号。Alternatively, "beam" can be understood as a reference signal, such as a channel state information reference signal used for downlink channel measurement.

可选地,该上行信道的配置参数包括该上行信道的发送周期T1。Optionally, the configuration parameter of the uplink channel includes a sending period T1 of the uplink channel.

并且,该DRX模式的配置参数包括DRX的周期T2。And, the configuration parameter of the DRX mode includes a period T2 of the DRX.

在本申请中,一个DRX的周期内可以包括唤醒时段和睡眠时段。In this application, a DRX cycle may include a wake-up period and a sleep period.

其中,该DRX的周期T2也可以理解为DRX模式中唤醒时段的出现周期。The period T2 of the DRX can also be understood as the appearance period of the wake-up period in the DRX mode.

另外,例如,该唤醒时段可以包括持续时间定时器运行的时段。In addition, for example, the wake-up period may include a period in which the duration timer runs.

再例如,该唤醒时段可以包括DRX非激活定时器运行的时段。As another example, the wake-up period may include a period during which the DRX inactive timer runs.

再例如,该唤醒时段可以包括重传定时器运行的时段。As another example, the wake-up period may include a period during which the retransmission timer runs.

此外,该上行信道的发送周期也可以理解为相邻的两个相同配置的上行信道的发送时段之间的时间间隔。In addition, the transmission period of the uplink channel may also be understood as a time interval between transmission periods of two adjacent uplink channels with the same configuration.

在本申请中,例如,该上行信道的发送周期T1是该DRX的周期T2的整数倍,即,该T1=P×T2,其中,P为正整数。In the present application, for example, the transmission period T1 of the uplink channel is an integer multiple of the period T2 of the DRX, that is, T1 = P × T2, where P is a positive integer.

可选地,该P的值可以为通信系统或通信协议预定义的。Optionally, the value of P may be predefined by a communication system or a communication protocol.

或者,该P的值可以为网络设备确定并通过例如高层信令等下发给终端设备的。Alternatively, the value of P may be determined by the network device and delivered to the terminal device through, for example, high-level signaling.

从而,能够确保每个上行信道的发送时段都处于DRX的周期内。Therefore, it is possible to ensure that the transmission period of each uplink channel is within the period of the DRX.

再例如,该DRX的周期T2是该上行信道的发送周期T1的整数倍,即,T2=Q×T1,其中,Q为正整数。As another example, the period T2 of the DRX is an integer multiple of the transmission period T1 of the uplink channel, that is, T2 = Q × T1, where Q is a positive integer.

可选地,该Q的值可以为通信系统或通信协议预定义的。Optionally, the value of Q may be predefined by a communication system or a communication protocol.

或者,该Q的值可以为网络设备确定并通过例如高层信令等下发给终端设备的。Alternatively, the value of Q may be determined by the network device and delivered to the terminal device through, for example, high-level signaling.

从而,能够确保每个DRX的周期内都存在上行信道的发送时段。Therefore, it is possible to ensure that a transmission period of an uplink channel exists in each DRX cycle.

另外,需要说明的是,在本申请中,首个DRX的周期的起始时刻和首个上行信道的发送周期的起始时刻可以相同。In addition, it should be noted that, in this application, the start time of the first DRX cycle and the start time of the first uplink channel transmission cycle may be the same.

可选地,该上行信道的配置参数包括该上行信道的时域位置偏移量S1。Optionally, the configuration parameter of the uplink channel includes a time domain position offset S1 of the uplink channel.

应理解,基站可以为UE配置K个参考信号,K为大于等于1的整数,当K大于1时,不同参考信号可以有不同的时域位置偏移量。It should be understood that the base station may configure K reference signals for the UE, where K is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and when K is greater than 1, different reference signals may have different time domain position offsets.

并且,该DRX模式的配置参数包括该DRX模式的唤醒时段的时域位置偏移量S2。In addition, the configuration parameters of the DRX mode include a time domain position offset S2 of a wake-up period of the DRX mode.

可选地,K个参考信号中至少存在一个参考信号的时域位置偏移量大于或等于DRX模式的唤醒时段的时域位置偏移量。Optionally, the time domain position offset of at least one of the K reference signals is greater than or equal to the time domain position offset of the wake-up period of the DRX mode.

可选的,该K个参考信号中至少存在一个参考信号的时域位置偏移量的取值使得所述至少一个参考信号的时域位置位于所述DRX模式的唤醒时段。Optionally, the time domain position offset of at least one reference signal in the K reference signals is such that the time domain position of the at least one reference signal is located in the wake-up period of the DRX mode.

在本申请中,该上行信道的时域位置偏移量S1可以是指在每个上行信道的发送周期内,该上行信道的发送时段相对于该发送周期的起始时刻的偏移量。In this application, the time domain position offset S1 of the uplink channel may refer to an offset of a transmission period of the uplink channel with respect to a start time of the transmission period in each uplink channel transmission period.

在本申请中,该参考信号的时域位置偏移量S1可以是指参考信号的发送周期的起始时刻相对于预设的基准时刻的偏移量。该基准时刻可以是一个系统帧内的第一个时隙,或任意其他固定的时刻点,这里不做具体限定。In the present application, the time domain position offset S1 of the reference signal may refer to an offset of a start time of a reference signal transmission period from a preset reference time. The reference time may be the first time slot in a system frame, or any other fixed time point, which is not specifically limited herein.

或者,在本申请中,该参考信号的时域位置偏移量S1可以用于确定参考信号的起始时刻。DRX模式的唤醒时段的时域位置偏移量S2可以用于确定DRX模式下唤醒时段的起始时刻。Alternatively, in the present application, the time-domain position offset S1 of the reference signal may be used to determine a start time of the reference signal. The time domain position offset S2 of the wake-up period in the DRX mode can be used to determine the start time of the wake-up period in the DRX mode.

在本申请中,S1和S2的取值可以分别小于T1和T2的取值。In this application, the values of S1 and S2 may be smaller than the values of T1 and T2, respectively.

再例如,在本申请中,每个上行信道的发送周期可以包括多个时间单元,此情况下,该上行信道的时域位置偏移量S1可以是指在每个上行信道的发送周期内,该上行信道的发送时段所对应的时间单元在该发送周期所包括的多个时间单元中的序号。作为示例而非限定,在本申请中,该时间单元可以包括符号、时隙、迷你时隙、子帧、传输时间间隔或短传输时间间隔。As another example, in the present application, the transmission period of each uplink channel may include multiple time units. In this case, the time domain position offset S1 of the uplink channel may refer to the transmission period of each uplink channel. Sequence numbers of time units corresponding to the sending period of the uplink channel in a plurality of time units included in the sending period. By way of example and not limitation, in this application, the time unit may include a symbol, a time slot, a mini time slot, a subframe, a transmission time interval, or a short transmission time interval.

即,设上行信道的起始时刻在时域上对应于每个发送周期的第k个时间单元,则该上行信道的时域位置偏移量S1可以为k,其中,k为正整数或零。That is, assuming that the starting time of the uplink channel corresponds to the k-th time unit of each transmission cycle in the time domain, the time domain position offset S1 of the uplink channel may be k, where k is a positive integer or zero. .

作为示例而非限定,该S1的单位可以包括slot。By way of example and not limitation, the unit of S1 may include a slot.

在本申请中,该DRX模式的唤醒时段的时域位置偏移量S2可以是指在每个DRX的周期内,该唤醒时段相对于该DRX的周期的起始时刻的偏移量。In the present application, the time domain position offset S2 of the wake-up period of the DRX mode may refer to an offset of the wake-up period with respect to a start time of the DRX cycle in each DRX cycle.

即,设DRX的周期#a的起始时刻为t#a,DRX的周期#a内的唤醒时段的起始时刻为t#b,则该DRX模式的唤醒时段的时域位置偏移量S2可以是指t#b与t#a的差值。That is, let the start time of the DRX cycle #a be t # a and the start time of the wake-up period in the DRX cycle #a be t # b, then the time domain position offset S2 of the wake-up period of the DRX mode It can be the difference between t # b and t # a.

再例如,在本申请中,每个DRX的周期可以包括多个时间单元,此情况下,该DRX模式的唤醒时段的时域位置偏移量S2可以是指在每个DRX的周期内,该唤醒时段所对应的时间单元在该DRX的周期所包括的多个时间单元中的序号。As another example, in this application, each DRX cycle may include multiple time units. In this case, the time domain position offset S2 of the wake-up period of the DRX mode may refer to each DRX cycle. Sequence numbers of time units corresponding to the wake-up period in a plurality of time units included in the DRX cycle.

即,设唤醒时段的起始时刻在时域上对应于每个DRX的周期的第h个时间单元,则该DRX模式的唤醒时段的时域位置偏移量S2可以为h,其中,h为正整数或零。That is, assuming that the start time of the wake-up period corresponds to the h-th time unit of each DRX cycle in the time domain, the time-domain position offset S2 of the wake-up period of the DRX mode may be h, where h is Positive integer or zero.

需要说明的是,在本申请中,该上行信道的发送周期中的时间单元的单位与DRX的周期中的时间单元的单位相同,例如,该上行信道的发送周期中的时间单元与DRX的周 期中的时间单元均为符号。或者,例如,该上行信道的发送周期中的时间单元与DRX的周期中的时间单元均为时隙或子帧,或任意其他时间单位,这里不做具体限定。It should be noted that, in this application, the unit of the time unit in the transmission cycle of the uplink channel is the same as the unit of the time unit in the cycle of DRX, for example, the time unit in the transmission cycle of the uplink channel and the cycle of DRX The time units in are all symbols. Or, for example, the time unit in the sending cycle of the uplink channel and the time unit in the DRX cycle are both time slots or subframes, or any other time unit, which are not specifically limited herein.

作为示例而非限定,例如,在本申请中,该S2可以包括DRX周期的偏移量(具体地说,是DRX周期的起始位置在时域上的偏移量),记作drx-StartOffset,并且,作为示例而非限定,该drx-StartOffset的单位可以为毫秒。By way of example and not limitation, for example, in this application, the S2 may include the offset of the DRX cycle (specifically, the offset of the start position of the DRX cycle in the time domain), which is denoted as drx-StartOffset And, as an example and not limitation, the unit of the drx-StartOffset may be milliseconds.

再例如,在本申请中,该S2可以包括唤醒时段的偏移量(具体地说,是唤醒时段的起始位置在DRX周期内的偏移量),记作drx-SlotOffset,并且,作为示例而非限定,该drx-SlotOffset的单位可以为slot。As another example, in the present application, the S2 may include an offset of the wake-up period (specifically, an offset of a start position of the wake-up period within a DRX cycle), which is denoted as drx-SlotOffset, and, as an example, Without limitation, the unit of the drx-SlotOffset may be a slot.

另外,作为示例而非限定,该唤醒时段可以包括但不限定于,on duration timer、drx-inactivity timer和DRX Retransmission timer中的至少一个定时器运行期间对应的时段。In addition, by way of example and not limitation, the wake-up period may include, but is not limited to, a period corresponding to at least one of the on-duration timers, drx-inactivity timers, and DRX Retransmission timers.

其中,该S1可以用于确定参考信号的传输起始时刻,或者说,该S1可以用于确定参考信号的发送周期的起始时刻。The S1 may be used to determine a transmission start time of a reference signal, or the S1 may be used to determine a start time of a reference signal transmission period.

其中,S2可以用于确定DRX周期的起始时刻。Among them, S2 can be used to determine the start time of the DRX cycle.

或者,S2可以用于确定DRX周期内的唤醒时段的起始时刻。Alternatively, S2 may be used to determine a start time of a wake-up period within a DRX cycle.

可选地,基于该S1确定的参考信号的传输起始时刻不早于基于该S2确定的DRX周期的起始时刻。Optionally, the transmission start time of the reference signal determined based on the S1 is not earlier than the start time of the DRX cycle determined based on the S2.

具体地说,设DRX周期#a和参考信号发送周期#b处于同一时间范围内(或者说,周期#a和周期#a具有重合部分)。Specifically, it is assumed that the DRX cycle #a and the reference signal transmission cycle #b are within the same time range (or that the cycle #a and the cycle #a have overlapping portions).

例如,该周期#a的起始时刻可以基于该S2确定(或者说,参考信号的发送时刻可以基于该S2确定),该周期#b的起始时刻可以基于S1确定,其中,周期#b的起始时刻可以与该周期#a的起始时刻相同,或者,周期#b的起始时刻可以位于周期#a的起始时刻之后。For example, the starting time of the cycle #a may be determined based on the S2 (or the sending time of the reference signal may be determined based on the S2), and the starting time of the cycle #b may be determined based on S1, where the cycle # b's The start time may be the same as the start time of the cycle #a, or the start time of the cycle #b may be located after the start time of the cycle #a.

或者,该周期#a的起始时刻可以基于该S2确定,该周期#b内的唤醒时段的起始时刻可以基于S1确定,其中,该周期#b内的唤醒时段的起始时刻可以与该周期#a的起始时刻相同,或者,该周期#b内的唤醒时段的起始时刻可以位于周期#a的起始时刻之后。Alternatively, the start time of the cycle #a may be determined based on the S2, and the start time of the wake-up period in the cycle #b may be determined based on S1, where the start time of the wake-up period in the cycle #b may be related to the The start time of the cycle #a is the same, or the start time of the wake-up period in the cycle #b may be after the start time of the cycle #a.

并且,基于该S1确定的参考信号的传输起始与基于该S2确定的DRX周期的起始时刻之间的时间间隔小于或等于该DRX模式的唤醒时段的长度。And, a time interval between a transmission start of the reference signal determined based on the S1 and a start time of the DRX cycle determined based on the S2 is less than or equal to a length of a wake-up period of the DRX mode.

即,该周期#b的起始时刻落入该周期#b内的唤醒时段内。That is, the start time of the period #b falls within the wake-up period in the period #b.

即,参考信号的周期#b内的参考信号发送时段的起始时刻位于DRX的周期#a的唤醒时段的起始时刻之后。That is, the start time of the reference signal transmission period within the period #b of the reference signal is after the start time of the wake-up period of the period #a of the DRX.

应理解,这里S1和S2间的关系主要用来实现K个参考信号中的至少一个参考信号的发送时段不早于DRX周期中的唤醒时段。其中,用来表征S1和S2的时间单位(如,毫秒,时隙,符号等)和表示方式可以相同或不同,这里不做具体限定。而S1大于等于S2是指在基于相同的参考标准和或时间单位下对S1和S2进行的比较。It should be understood that the relationship between S1 and S2 is mainly used to implement that the sending period of at least one of the K reference signals is not earlier than the wake-up period in the DRX cycle. The time units (such as milliseconds, time slots, symbols, and so on) and representations used to characterize S1 and S2 may be the same or different, and are not specifically limited here. S1 is greater than or equal to S2, which refers to the comparison between S1 and S2 based on the same reference standard and / or time unit.

可选地,S1对应的时间长度与S2对应的时间长度的差值小于或等于该DRX模式的唤醒时段的时间长度。Optionally, the difference between the time length corresponding to S1 and the time length corresponding to S2 is less than or equal to the time length of the wake-up period of the DRX mode.

即,上行信道的周期#b内的上行信道发送时段的起始时刻位于DRX的周期#a的唤醒时段的结束时刻之前。That is, the start time of the uplink channel transmission period within the period #b of the uplink channel is before the end time of the wake-up period of the period #a of the DRX.

即,当该上行信道用于承载SRS时,S1也可以小于或等于S2。即,上行信道可以在 DRX周期的唤醒时刻之前传输。That is, when the uplink channel is used to carry SRS, S1 may also be less than or equal to S2. That is, the uplink channel can be transmitted before the wake-up time of the DRX cycle.

从而,能够确保在起始时刻相同的DRX的周期和上行信道的发送周期内,上行信道的发送时段位于DRX的唤醒时段内,从而,能够确保终端设备可靠地发送到上行信道。Therefore, it is possible to ensure that the transmission period of the uplink channel is within the wake-up period of the DRX in the DRX cycle and the uplink channel transmission cycle at the same starting time, thereby ensuring that the terminal device reliably transmits to the uplink channel.

第六方面,提供了一种接收上行信道的方法,包括:网络设备向终端设备发送配置信息,该配置信息用于指示上行信道的配置参数,其中,该上行信道的配置参数是该网络设备根据该终端设备的非连续接收DRX模式的配置参数确定的,或者,该DRX模式的配置参数是该网络设备根据该上行信道的配置参数确定的;该网络设备根据该上行信道的配置参数,从该终端设备接收上行信道。According to a sixth aspect, a method for receiving an uplink channel is provided, including: the network device sends configuration information to a terminal device, where the configuration information is used to indicate configuration parameters of the uplink channel, where the configuration parameters of the uplink channel are The terminal device's discontinuous reception DRX mode configuration parameter is determined, or the DRX mode configuration parameter is determined by the network device according to the configuration parameter of the uplink channel; the network device is determined from the configuration parameter of the uplink channel from the The terminal device receives the uplink channel.

其中,“接收上行信道”可以理解为通过上行信道接收信息或信号,例如,数据、控制信息或参考信号等。The “receiving uplink channel” can be understood as receiving information or signals through the uplink channel, for example, data, control information, or reference signals.

可选地,该上行信道用于承载探测参考信号。Optionally, the uplink channel is used to carry a sounding reference signal.

可选地,该上行信道用于承载信道质量信息。Optionally, the uplink channel is used to carry channel quality information.

其中,该信道质量信息可以是终端设备根据网络设备发送的下行参考信号进行信道质量测量后确定的。The channel quality information may be determined after the terminal device performs channel quality measurement according to the downlink reference signal sent by the network device.

根据本申请的方案,通过将上行信道的配置参数与DRX模式的配置参数相关联,能够提高终端设备在唤醒期间完成波束训练和信道质量测量的可能性,即,能够提高终端设备在唤醒期间获得可使用的波束的信息的可能性,从而能够提高通信的可靠性,能够改善用户体验。According to the solution of the present application, by associating the configuration parameters of the uplink channel with the configuration parameters of the DRX mode, the possibility that the terminal device completes beam training and channel quality measurement during the wake-up period can be improved, that is, the terminal device can be obtained The possibility of using available beam information can improve the reliability of communication and improve the user experience.

需要说明的是,上述“波束”可以理解为空间滤波器或空间参数。It should be noted that the above-mentioned "beam" can be understood as a spatial filter or a spatial parameter.

空间滤波器可以为以下至少之一:预编码,天线端口的权值,天线端口的相位偏转,天线端口的幅度增益。The spatial filter may be at least one of the following: precoding, the weight of the antenna port, the phase deflection of the antenna port, and the amplitude gain of the antenna port.

或者,“波束”可以理解为参考信号,例如用于下行信道测量的信道状态信息参考信号。Alternatively, "beam" can be understood as a reference signal, such as a channel state information reference signal used for downlink channel measurement.

可选地,该上行信道的配置参数包括该上行信道的发送周期T1。Optionally, the configuration parameter of the uplink channel includes a sending period T1 of the uplink channel.

并且,该DRX模式的配置参数包括DRX的周期T2。And, the configuration parameter of the DRX mode includes a period T2 of the DRX.

在本申请中,一个DRX的周期内可以包括唤醒时段和睡眠时段。In this application, a DRX cycle may include a wake-up period and a sleep period.

其中,该DRX的周期T2也可以理解为DRX模式中唤醒时段的出现周期。The period T2 of the DRX can also be understood as the appearance period of the wake-up period in the DRX mode.

另外,例如,该唤醒时段可以包括on duration timer运行的时段。In addition, for example, the wake-up period may include a period during which the timer is running.

再例如,该唤醒时段可以包括drx-inactivity timer运行的时段。As another example, the wake-up period may include a period during which the drx-inactivity timer is running.

再例如,该唤醒时段可以包括ReTransmission Timer运行的时段。As another example, the wake-up period may include a period during which the ReTransmission Timer is running.

此外,该上行信道的发送周期也可以理解为相邻的两个相同配置的上行信道的发送时段之间的时间间隔。In addition, the transmission period of the uplink channel may also be understood as a time interval between transmission periods of two adjacent uplink channels with the same configuration.

在本申请中,例如,该上行信道的发送周期T1是该DRX的周期T2的整数倍,即,该T1=P×T2,其中,P为正整数。In the present application, for example, the transmission period T1 of the uplink channel is an integer multiple of the period T2 of the DRX, that is, T1 = P × T2, where P is a positive integer.

可选地,该P的值可以为通信系统或通信协议预定义的。Optionally, the value of P may be predefined by a communication system or a communication protocol.

或者,该P的值可以为网络设备确定并通过例如高层信令等下发给终端设备的。Alternatively, the value of P may be determined by the network device and delivered to the terminal device through, for example, high-level signaling.

从而,能够确保每个上行信道的发送时段都处于DRX的周期内。Therefore, it is possible to ensure that the transmission period of each uplink channel is within the period of the DRX.

再例如,该DRX的周期T2是该上行信道的发送周期T1的整数倍,即,T2=Q×T1,其中,Q为正整数。As another example, the period T2 of the DRX is an integer multiple of the transmission period T1 of the uplink channel, that is, T2 = Q × T1, where Q is a positive integer.

可选地,该Q的值可以为通信系统或通信协议预定义的。Optionally, the value of Q may be predefined by a communication system or a communication protocol.

或者,该Q的值可以为网络设备确定并通过例如高层信令等下发给终端设备的。Alternatively, the value of Q may be determined by the network device and delivered to the terminal device through, for example, high-level signaling.

从而,能够确保每个DRX的周期内都存在上行信道的发送时段。Therefore, it is possible to ensure that a transmission period of an uplink channel exists in each DRX cycle.

另外,需要说明的是,在本申请中,首个DRX的周期的起始时刻和首个上行信道的发送周期的起始时刻可以相同。In addition, it should be noted that, in this application, the start time of the first DRX cycle and the start time of the first uplink channel transmission cycle may be the same.

可选地,该上行信道的配置参数包括该上行信道的时域位置偏移量S1。Optionally, the configuration parameter of the uplink channel includes a time domain position offset S1 of the uplink channel.

应理解,基站可以为UE配置K个参考信号,K为大于等于1的整数,当K大于1时,不同参考信号可以有不同的时域位置偏移量。It should be understood that the base station may configure K reference signals for the UE, where K is an integer greater than or equal to 1, and when K is greater than 1, different reference signals may have different time domain position offsets.

并且,该DRX模式的配置参数包括该DRX模式的唤醒时段的时域位置偏移量S2。In addition, the configuration parameters of the DRX mode include a time domain position offset S2 of a wake-up period of the DRX mode.

可选地,K个参考信号中至少存在一个参考信号的时域位置偏移量大于或等于DRX模式的唤醒时段的时域位置偏移量。Optionally, the time domain position offset of at least one of the K reference signals is greater than or equal to the time domain position offset of the wake-up period of the DRX mode.

在本申请中,该上行信道的时域位置偏移量S1可以是指在每个上行信道的发送周期内,该上行信道的发送时段相对于该发送周期的起始时刻的偏移量。In this application, the time domain position offset S1 of the uplink channel may refer to an offset of a transmission period of the uplink channel with respect to a start time of the transmission period in each uplink channel transmission period.

在本申请中,该参考信号的时域位置偏移量S1可以是指参考信号的发送周期的起始时刻相对于预设的基准时刻的偏移量。该基准时刻可以是一个系统帧内的第一个时隙,或任意其他固定的时刻点,这里不做具体限定。In the present application, the time domain position offset S1 of the reference signal may refer to an offset of a start time of a reference signal transmission period from a preset reference time. The reference time may be the first time slot in a system frame, or any other fixed time point, which is not specifically limited herein.

或者,在本申请中,该参考信号的时域位置偏移量S1可以用于确定参考信号的起始时刻。DRX模式的唤醒时段的时域位置偏移量S2可以用于确定DRX模式下唤醒时段的起始时刻。Alternatively, in the present application, the time-domain position offset S1 of the reference signal may be used to determine a start time of the reference signal. The time domain position offset S2 of the wake-up period in the DRX mode can be used to determine the start time of the wake-up period in the DRX mode.

在本申请中,S1和S2的取值可以分别小于T1和T2的取值。In this application, the values of S1 and S2 may be smaller than the values of T1 and T2, respectively.

即,设上行信道的发送周期#1的起始时刻为t#1,发送周期#1内的上行信道的发送时段的起始时刻为t#2,则该上行信道的时域位置偏移量S1可以是指t#2与t#1的差值。That is, if the starting time of the transmission period # 1 of the uplink channel is t # 1, and the starting time of the transmission period of the uplink channel in the transmission period # 1 is t # 2, the time domain position offset of the uplink channel S1 can be the difference between t # 2 and t # 1.

再例如,在本申请中,每个上行信道的发送周期可以包括多个时间单元,此情况下,该上行信道的时域位置偏移量S1可以是指在每个上行信道的发送周期内,该上行信道的发送时段所对应的时间单元在该发送周期所包括的多个时间单元中的序号。As another example, in the present application, the transmission period of each uplink channel may include multiple time units. In this case, the time domain position offset S1 of the uplink channel may refer to the transmission period of each uplink channel. Sequence numbers of time units corresponding to the sending period of the uplink channel in a plurality of time units included in the sending period.

作为示例而非限定,在本申请中,该时间单元可以包括符号、时隙、迷你时隙、子帧、传输时间间隔或短传输时间间隔。By way of example and not limitation, in this application, the time unit may include a symbol, a time slot, a mini time slot, a subframe, a transmission time interval, or a short transmission time interval.

即,设上行信道的起始时刻在时域上对应于每个发送周期的第k个时间单元,则该上行信道的时域位置偏移量S1可以为k,其中,k为正整数或零。That is, assuming that the starting time of the uplink channel corresponds to the k-th time unit of each transmission cycle in the time domain, the time domain position offset S1 of the uplink channel may be k, where k is a positive integer or zero. .

作为示例而非限定,该S1的单位可以包括slot。By way of example and not limitation, the unit of S1 may include a slot.

在本申请中,该DRX模式的唤醒时段的时域位置偏移量S2可以是指在每个DRX的周期内,该唤醒时段相对于该DRX的周期的起始时刻的偏移量。In the present application, the time domain position offset S2 of the wake-up period of the DRX mode may refer to an offset of the wake-up period with respect to a start time of the DRX cycle in each DRX cycle.

即,设DRX的周期#a的起始时刻为t#a,DRX的周期#a内的唤醒时段的起始时刻为t#b,则该DRX模式的唤醒时段的时域位置偏移量S2可以是指t#b与t#a的差值。That is, let the start time of the DRX cycle #a be t # a and the start time of the wake-up period in the DRX cycle #a be t # b, then the time domain position offset S2 of the wake-up period of the DRX mode It can be the difference between t # b and t # a.

再例如,在本申请中,每个DRX的周期可以包括多个时间单元,此情况下,该DRX模式的唤醒时段的时域位置偏移量S2可以是指在每个DRX的周期内,该唤醒时段所对应的时间单元在该DRX的周期所包括的多个时间单元中的序号。As another example, in this application, each DRX cycle may include multiple time units. In this case, the time domain position offset S2 of the wake-up period of the DRX mode may refer to each DRX cycle. Sequence numbers of time units corresponding to the wake-up period in a plurality of time units included in the DRX cycle.

即,设唤醒时段的起始时刻在时域上对应于每个DRX的周期的第h个时间单元,则该DRX模式的唤醒时段的时域位置偏移量S2可以为h,其中,h为正整数或零。That is, assuming that the start time of the wake-up period corresponds to the h-th time unit of each DRX cycle in the time domain, the time-domain position offset S2 of the wake-up period of the DRX mode may be h, where h is Positive integer or zero.

需要说明的是,在本申请中,该上行信道的发送周期中的时间单元的单位与DRX的 周期中的时间单元的单位相同,例如,该上行信道的发送周期中的时间单元与DRX的周期中的时间单元均为符号。或者,例如,该上行信道的发送周期中的时间单元与DRX的周期中的时间单元均为时隙或子帧,或任意其他时间单位,这里不做具体限定。It should be noted that, in this application, the unit of the time unit in the transmission cycle of the uplink channel is the same as the unit of the time unit in the cycle of DRX, for example, the time unit in the transmission cycle of the uplink channel and the cycle of DRX The time units in are all symbols. Or, for example, the time unit in the sending cycle of the uplink channel and the time unit in the DRX cycle are both time slots or subframes, or any other time unit, which are not specifically limited herein.

作为示例而非限定,例如,在本申请中,该S2可以包括DRX周期的偏移量(具体地说,是DRX周期的起始位置在时域上的偏移量),记作drx-StartOffset,并且,作为示例而非限定,该drx-StartOffset的单位可以为毫秒。By way of example and not limitation, for example, in this application, the S2 may include the offset of the DRX cycle (specifically, the offset of the start position of the DRX cycle in the time domain), which is denoted as drx-StartOffset And, as an example and not limitation, the unit of the drx-StartOffset may be milliseconds.

再例如,在本申请中,该S2可以包括唤醒时段的偏移量(具体地说,是唤醒时段的起始位置在DRX周期内的偏移量),记作drx-SlotOffset,并且,作为示例而非限定,该drx-SlotOffset的单位可以为slot。As another example, in the present application, the S2 may include an offset of the wake-up period (specifically, an offset of a start position of the wake-up period within a DRX cycle), which is denoted as drx-SlotOffset, and, as an example, Without limitation, the unit of the drx-SlotOffset may be a slot.

另外,作为示例而非限定,该唤醒时段可以包括但不限定于,on duration timer、drx-inactivity timer和DRX Retransmission timer中的至少一个定时器运行期间对应的时段。In addition, by way of example and not limitation, the wake-up period may include, but is not limited to, a period corresponding to at least one of the on-duration timers, drx-inactivity timers, and DRX Retransmission timers.

其中,该S1可以用于确定参考信号的传输起始时刻,或者说,该S1可以用于确定参考信号的发送周期的起始时刻。The S1 may be used to determine a transmission start time of a reference signal, or the S1 may be used to determine a start time of a reference signal transmission period.

其中,S2可以用于确定DRX周期的起始时刻。Among them, S2 can be used to determine the start time of the DRX cycle.

或者,S2可以用于确定DRX周期内的唤醒时段的起始时刻。Alternatively, S2 may be used to determine a start time of a wake-up period within a DRX cycle.

可选地,基于该S1确定的参考信号的传输起始时刻不早于基于该S2确定的DRX周期的起始时刻。Optionally, the transmission start time of the reference signal determined based on the S1 is not earlier than the start time of the DRX cycle determined based on the S2.

具体地说,设DRX周期#a和参考信号发送周期#b处于同一时间范围内(或者说,周期#a和周期#a具有重合部分)。Specifically, it is assumed that the DRX cycle #a and the reference signal transmission cycle #b are within the same time range (or that the cycle #a and the cycle #a have overlapping portions).

例如,该周期#a的起始时刻可以基于该S2确定(或者说,参考信号的发送时刻可以基于该S2确定),该周期#b的起始时刻可以基于S1确定,其中,周期#b的起始时刻可以与该周期#a的起始时刻相同,或者,周期#b的起始时刻可以位于周期#a的起始时刻之后。For example, the starting time of the cycle #a may be determined based on the S2 (or the sending time of the reference signal may be determined based on the S2), and the starting time of the cycle #b may be determined based on S1, where the cycle # b's The start time may be the same as the start time of the cycle #a, or the start time of the cycle #b may be located after the start time of the cycle #a.

或者,该周期#a的起始时刻可以基于该S2确定,该周期#b内的唤醒时段的起始时刻可以基于S1确定,其中,该周期#b内的唤醒时段的起始时刻可以与该周期#a的起始时刻相同,或者,该周期#b内的唤醒时段的起始时刻可以位于周期#a的起始时刻之后。Alternatively, the start time of the cycle #a may be determined based on the S2, and the start time of the wake-up period in the cycle #b may be determined based on S1, where the start time of the wake-up period in the cycle #b may be related to the The start time of the cycle #a is the same, or the start time of the wake-up period in the cycle #b may be after the start time of the cycle #a.

并且,基于该S1确定的参考信号的传输起始与基于该S2确定的DRX周期的起始时刻之间的时间间隔小于或等于该DRX模式的唤醒时段的长度。And, a time interval between a transmission start of the reference signal determined based on the S1 and a start time of the DRX cycle determined based on the S2 is less than or equal to a length of a wake-up period of the DRX mode.

即,该周期#b的起始时刻落入该周期#b内的唤醒时段内。在本申请中,参考信号的周期#b内的参考信号发送时段的起始时刻位于DRX的周期#a的唤醒时段的起始时刻之后。That is, the start time of the period #b falls within the wake-up period in the period #b. In the present application, the start time of the reference signal transmission period within the period #b of the reference signal is after the start time of the wake-up period of the period #a of the DRX.

应理解,这里S1和S2间的关系主要用来实现K个参考信号中的至少一个参考信号的发送时段不早于DRX周期中的唤醒时段。其中,用来表征S1和S2的时间单位(如,毫秒,时隙,符号等)和表示方式可以相同或不同,这里不做具体限定。而S1大于等于S2是指在基于相同的参考标准和或时间单位下对S1和S2进行的比较。It should be understood that the relationship between S1 and S2 is mainly used to implement that the sending period of at least one of the K reference signals is not earlier than the wake-up period in the DRX cycle. The time units (such as milliseconds, time slots, symbols, and so on) and representations used to characterize S1 and S2 may be the same or different, and are not specifically limited here. S1 is greater than or equal to S2, which refers to the comparison between S1 and S2 based on the same reference standard and / or time unit.

即,上行信道的周期#b内的上行信道发送时段的起始时刻位于DRX的周期#a的唤醒时段的起始时刻之后。That is, the start time of the uplink channel transmission period in the period #b of the uplink channel is after the start time of the wake-up period in the period #a of the DRX.

即,上行信道的周期#b内的上行信道发送时段的起始时刻位于DRX的周期#a的唤醒时段的结束时刻之前。That is, the start time of the uplink channel transmission period within the period #b of the uplink channel is before the end time of the wake-up period of the period #a of the DRX.

从而,能够确保在相同的DRX的周期和上行信道的发送周期内,上行信道的发送时段位于DRX的唤醒时段内,从而,能够确保终端设备可靠地发送上行信道。Therefore, it can be ensured that the transmission period of the uplink channel is within the wake-up period of the DRX in the same DRX cycle and the uplink channel transmission cycle, thereby ensuring that the terminal device reliably transmits the uplink channel.

第七方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括用于执行上述第一方面至第六方面中的任一方面及其各实现方式中的方法的各步骤的单元。According to a seventh aspect, there is provided a communication device including a unit for performing each step of the method in any one of the first to sixth aspects and the implementation methods thereof.

应理解,本申请方案中DRX的唤醒时段可以包括DRX周期中专用于下行控制信道检测的On_duration时间段,以及PDCCH检测到有数据传输后的上行或下行数据传输时间段(Inactivity时间段)和数据传输确认的HARQ RTT时间段中的至少一个。It should be understood that the wake-up period of DRX in the solution of the present application may include an On_duration time period dedicated to downlink control channel detection in the DRX cycle, and an uplink or downlink data transmission time period (Inactivity time period) and data after the PDCCH detects data transmission. Transmission of at least one of HARQ and RTT periods of acknowledgement.

在一种设计中,该通信装置为通信芯片,通信芯片可以包括用于发送信息或数据的输入电路或者接口,以及用于接收信息或数据的输出电路或者接口。In one design, the communication device is a communication chip, and the communication chip may include an input circuit or interface for transmitting information or data, and an output circuit or interface for receiving information or data.

在另一种设计中,所述通信装置为通信设备(例如,终端设备或网络设备),通信芯片可以包括用于发送信息或数据的发射机,以及用于接收信息或数据的接收机。In another design, the communication device is a communication device (for example, a terminal device or a network device), and the communication chip may include a transmitter for transmitting information or data, and a receiver for receiving information or data.

第八方面,提供了一种终端设备,包括收发器、处理器和存储器。该处理器用于控制收发器收发信号,该存储器用于存储计算机程序,该处理器用于从存储器中调用并运行该计算机程序,使得该终端设备执行第一方面或第一方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法、或者第三方面或第三方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法、或者第五方面或第五方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法。According to an eighth aspect, a terminal device is provided, including a transceiver, a processor, and a memory. The processor is used to control the transceiver to send and receive signals, the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that the terminal device executes the first aspect or any possible implementation manner of the first aspect Method, or the method in the third aspect or any one of the possible implementations of the third aspect, or the method in the fifth aspect or any one of the possible implementations of the fifth aspect.

可选地,所述处理器为一个或多个,所述存储器为一个或多个。Optionally, there are one or more processors, and one or more memories.

可选地,所述存储器可以与所述处理器集成在一起,或者所述存储器与处理器分离设置。Optionally, the memory may be integrated with the processor, or the memory is separately provided from the processor.

第九方面,提供了一种网络设备,包括收发器、处理器和存储器。该处理器用于控制收发器收发信号,该存储器用于存储计算机程序,该处理器用于从存储器中调用并运行该计算机程序,使得该网络设备执行第二方面或第二方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法、或者第四方面或第四方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法、或者第六方面或第六方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法。In a ninth aspect, a network device is provided, including a transceiver, a processor, and a memory. The processor is used to control the transceiver to send and receive signals, the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that the network device executes the second aspect or any possible implementation manner of the second aspect Method, or the method in the fourth aspect or any one of the possible implementations of the fourth aspect, or the method in the sixth aspect or any one of the possible implementations of the sixth aspect.

可选地,所述处理器为一个或多个,所述存储器为一个或多个。Optionally, there are one or more processors, and one or more memories.

可选地,所述存储器可以与所述处理器集成在一起,或者所述存储器与处理器分离设置。Optionally, the memory may be integrated with the processor, or the memory is separately provided from the processor.

在具体实现过程中,上述处理器可用于进行,例如但不限于,基带相关处理,接收器和发射器可分别用于进行,例如但不限于,射频收发。上述器件可以分别设置在彼此独立的芯片上,也可以至少部分的或者全部的设置在同一块芯片上,例如,接收器和发射器可以设置在彼此独立的接收器芯片和发射器芯片上,也可以整合为收发器继而设置在收发器芯片上。又例如,处理器可以进一步划分为模拟基带处理器和数字基带处理器,其中模拟基带处理器可以与收发器集成在同一块芯片上,数字基带处理器可以设置在独立的芯片上。随着集成电路技术的不断发展,可以在同一块芯片上集成的器件越来越多,例如,数字基带处理器可以与多种应用处理器(例如但不限于图形处理器,多媒体处理器等)集成在同一块芯片之上。这样的芯片可以称为系统芯片(system on chip)。将各个器件独立设置在不同的芯片上,还是整合设置在一个或者多个芯片上,往往取决于产品设计的具体需要。本申请实施例对上述器件的具体实现形式不做限定。In a specific implementation process, the foregoing processor may be used to perform, for example, but not limited to, baseband related processing, and the receiver and the transmitter may be respectively used to perform, such as, but not limited to, radio frequency transceiver. The above devices may be provided on separate chips, or at least partly or entirely on the same chip. For example, the receiver and the transmitter may be provided on the receiver chip and the transmitter chip which are independent of each other. It can be integrated into a transceiver and then set on the transceiver chip. For another example, the processor may be further divided into an analog baseband processor and a digital baseband processor. The analog baseband processor and the transceiver may be integrated on the same chip, and the digital baseband processor may be provided on a separate chip. With the continuous development of integrated circuit technology, more and more devices can be integrated on the same chip. For example, digital baseband processors can be used with multiple application processors (such as, but not limited to, graphics processors, multimedia processors, etc.) Integrated on the same chip. Such a chip may be referred to as a system chip. Whether each device is independently set on a different chip or integrated on one or more chips often depends on the specific needs of the product design. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific implementation form of the device.

第十方面,提供一种处理器,包括:输入电路、输出电路和处理电路。所述处理电路 用于通过所述输入电路接收信号,并通过所述输出电路发射信号,使得所述处理器执行第一方面至第六方面以及第一方面至第六方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法。According to a tenth aspect, a processor is provided, including: an input circuit, an output circuit, and a processing circuit. The processing circuit is configured to receive a signal through the input circuit and transmit a signal through the output circuit, so that the processor executes any one of the first aspect to the sixth aspect and any possible implementation manner of the first aspect to the sixth aspect. Method.

在具体实现过程中,上述处理器可以为芯片,输入电路可以为输入管脚,输出电路可以为输出管脚,处理电路可以为晶体管、门电路、触发器和各种逻辑电路等。输入电路所接收的输入的信号可以是由例如但不限于接收器接收并输入的,输出电路所输出的信号可以是例如但不限于输出给发射器并由发射器发射的,且输入电路和输出电路可以是同一电路,该电路在不同的时刻分别用作输入电路和输出电路。本申请实施例对处理器及各种电路的具体实现方式不做限定。In a specific implementation process, the processor may be a chip, the input circuit may be an input pin, the output circuit may be an output pin, and the processing circuit may be a transistor, a gate circuit, a flip-flop, and various logic circuits. An input signal received by the input circuit may be received and input by, for example, but not limited to, a receiver, and a signal output by the output circuit may be, for example, but not limited to, output to a transmitter and transmitted by the transmitter, and the input circuit and output The circuits may be the same circuit, which are used as input circuits and output circuits respectively at different times. The embodiments of the present application do not limit specific implementations of the processor and various circuits.

第十一方面,提供一种处理装置,包括:存储器和处理器。所述处理器用于读取所述存储器中存储的指令,并可通过接收器接收信号,通过发射器发射信号,以执行第一方面至第六方面以及第一方面至第六方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法。According to an eleventh aspect, a processing device is provided, including: a memory and a processor. The processor is configured to read an instruction stored in the memory, and can receive a signal through a receiver and transmit a signal through a transmitter to execute any one of the first to sixth aspects and the first to sixth aspects. Method in implementation.

可选地,所述处理器为一个或多个,所述存储器为一个或多个。Optionally, there are one or more processors, and one or more memories.

可选地,所述存储器可以与所述处理器集成在一起,或者所述存储器与处理器分离设置。Optionally, the memory may be integrated with the processor, or the memory is separately provided from the processor.

在具体实现过程中,存储器可以为非瞬时性(non-transitory)存储器,例如只读存储器(read only memory,ROM),其可以与处理器集成在同一块芯片上,也可以分别设置在不同的芯片上,本申请实施例对存储器的类型以及存储器与处理器的设置方式不做限定。In the specific implementation process, the memory may be a non-transitory memory, such as a read-only memory (ROM), which may be integrated on the same chip as the processor, or may be separately set in different On the chip, the embodiment of the present application does not limit the type of the memory and the way of setting the memory and the processor.

第十二方面,提供了一种芯片,包括处理器和存储器,该存储器用于存储计算机程序,该处理器用于从存储器中调用并运行该计算机程序,该计算机程序用于实现第一方面至第六方面以及第一方面至第六方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法。According to a twelfth aspect, a chip is provided, including a processor and a memory, where the memory is used to store a computer program, the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory, and the computer program is used to implement the first aspect to the first The method in the six aspects and any one of the possible implementation methods of the first to sixth aspects.

第十三方面,提供了一种计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品包括:计算机程序(也可以称为代码,或指令),当所述计算机程序被运行时,使得计算机执行上述第一方面至第六方面以及第一方面至第六方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。According to a thirteenth aspect, a computer program product is provided. The computer program product includes a computer program (also referred to as code or instructions), and when the computer program is executed, causes a computer to execute the first aspect to The sixth aspect and the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect to the sixth aspect.

第十四方面,提供了一种计算机可读介质,所述计算机可读介质存储有计算机程序(也可以称为代码,或指令)当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述第一方面至第六方面以及第一方面至第六方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。According to a fourteenth aspect, a computer-readable medium is provided, where the computer-readable medium stores a computer program (also referred to as code, or instructions), which when executed on a computer, causes the computer to execute the first aspect to The sixth aspect and the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect to the sixth aspect.

根据本申请的方案,通过将下行参考信号的配置参数与DRX模式的配置参数相关联,能够提高终端设备在唤醒期间完成波束训练和信道质量测量的可能性,即,能够提高终端设备在唤醒期间获得可使用的波束的信息的可能性,从而能够提高通信的可靠性,能够改善用户体验。According to the solution of the present application, by associating the configuration parameters of the downlink reference signal with the configuration parameters of the DRX mode, the possibility of the terminal device completing beam training and channel quality measurement during the wake-up period can be improved, that is, the terminal device can be improved during the wake-up period The possibility of obtaining information on the available beams can improve the reliability of communication and improve the user experience.

附图说明BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

图1是本申请的通信系统的示意性架构图。FIG. 1 is a schematic architecture diagram of a communication system of the present application.

图2是DRX的配置的示意图。FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of a configuration of the DRX.

图3是本申请的下行参考信号的传输过程的一例的示意性流程图。FIG. 3 is a schematic flowchart of an example of a downlink reference signal transmission process of the present application.

图4是基于DRX的配置参数确定的下行参考信号的配置的一例的示意图。FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of an example of a configuration of a downlink reference signal determined based on a configuration parameter of DRX.

图5是基于DRX的配置参数确定的下行参考信号的配置的另一例的示意图。5 is a schematic diagram of another example of a configuration of a downlink reference signal determined based on a configuration parameter of DRX.

图6是基于DRX的配置参数确定的下行参考信号的配置的再一例的示意图。FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of still another example of a configuration of a downlink reference signal determined based on a configuration parameter of DRX.

图7是本申请的上行信道的发送过程的一例的示意图。FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of an example of a transmission process of an uplink channel of the present application.

图8是本申请的上行信道的配置的一例的示意图。FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of an example of an uplink channel configuration of the present application.

图9是本申请的上行信道的发送过程的另一例的示意图。FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of another example of a transmission process of an uplink channel of the present application.

图10是基于DRX的配置参数确定的上行信道的配置的一例的示意图。FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of an example of an uplink channel configuration determined based on DRX configuration parameters.

图11是基于DRX的配置参数确定的上行信道的配置的另一例的示意图。FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of another example of an uplink channel configuration determined based on DRX configuration parameters.

图12是基于DRX的配置参数确定的上行信道的配置的再一例的示意图。FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of still another example of an uplink channel configuration determined based on DRX configuration parameters.

图13是本申请的通信装置的一例的示意性框图。FIG. 13 is a schematic block diagram of an example of a communication device of the present application.

图14是本申请的终端设备的一例的示意性框图。FIG. 14 is a schematic block diagram of an example of a terminal device of the present application.

图15是本申请的通信装置的另一例的示意性框图。FIG. 15 is a schematic block diagram of another example of a communication device of the present application.

图16是本申请的网络设备的一例的示意性框图。FIG. 16 is a schematic block diagram of an example of a network device of the present application.

具体实施方式detailed description

下面将结合附图,对本申请中的技术方案进行描述。The technical solutions in this application will be described below with reference to the drawings.

本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统,例如:全球移动通信(global system for mobile communications,GSM)系统、码分多址(code division multiple access,CDMA)系统、宽带码分多址(wideband code division multiple access,WCDMA)系统、通用分组无线业务(general packet radio service,GPRS)、长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)系统、LTE频分双工(frequency division duplex,FDD)系统、LTE时分双工(time division duplex,TDD)、通用移动通信系统(universal mobile telecommunication system,UMTS)、全球互联微波接入(worldwide interoperability for microwave access,WiMAX)通信系统、未来的第五代(5th generation,5G)系统或新无线(new radio,NR)等。The technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can be applied to various communication systems, for example: a global mobile communication (GSM) system, a code division multiple access (CDMA) system, and a broadband code division multiple access (wideband code division multiple access (WCDMA) system, general packet radio service (GPRS), long term evolution (LTE) system, LTE frequency division duplex (FDD) system, LTE Time Division Duplex (TDD), Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS), Global Interoperability for Microwave Access (WiMAX) communication system, 5th generation in the future, 5G) system or new radio (NR).

作为示例而非限定,在本申请实施例中,本申请实施例中的终端设备可以指用户设备、接入终端、用户单元、用户站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、用户终端、终端、无线通信设备、用户代理或用户装置。终端设备还可以是蜂窝电话、无绳电话、会话启动协议(session initiation protocol,SIP)电话、无线本地环路(wireless local loop,WLL)站、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant,PDA)、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备,未来5G网络中的终端设备或者未来演进的公用陆地移动通信网络(public land mobile network,PLMN)中的终端设备等,本申请实施例对此并不限定。By way of example and not limitation, in the embodiments of the present application, the terminal device in the embodiments of the present application may refer to user equipment, access terminal, user unit, user station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile device , User terminal, terminal, wireless communication device, user agent, or user device. Terminal equipment can also be cellular phones, cordless phones, session initiation protocol (SIP) phones, wireless local loop (WLL) stations, personal digital assistants (PDAs), and wireless communications Functional handheld devices, computing devices, or other processing devices connected to wireless modems, in-vehicle devices, wearable devices, terminal devices in the future 5G network, or public land mobile network (PLMN) in future evolution Terminal equipment and the like are not limited in this embodiment of the present application.

作为示例而非限定,在本申请实施例中,该终端设备还可以是可穿戴设备。可穿戴设备也可以称为穿戴式智能设备,是应用穿戴式技术对日常穿戴进行智能化设计、开发出可以穿戴的设备的总称,如眼镜、手套、手表、服饰及鞋等。可穿戴设备即直接穿在身上,或是整合到用户的衣服或配件的一种便携式设备。可穿戴设备不仅仅是一种硬件设备,更是通过软件支持以及数据交互、云端交互来实现强大的功能。广义穿戴式智能设备包括功能全、尺寸大、可不依赖智能手机实现完整或者部分的功能,例如:智能手表或智能眼镜等,以及只专注于某一类应用功能,需要和其它设备如智能手机配合使用,如各类进行体征监测的智能手环、智能首饰等。By way of example and not limitation, in the embodiments of the present application, the terminal device may also be a wearable device. Wearable devices can also be referred to as wearable smart devices. They are the general name for applying wearable technology to intelligently design daily wear and develop wearable devices, such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing and shoes. A wearable device is a device that is worn directly on the body or is integrated into the user's clothing or accessories. Wearable devices are not only a hardware device, but also powerful functions through software support, data interaction, and cloud interaction. Broad-spectrum wearable smart devices include full-featured, large-sized, full or partial functions that do not rely on smart phones, such as smart watches or smart glasses, and only focus on certain types of application functions, and need to cooperate with other devices such as smart phones Use, such as smart bracelets, smart jewelry, etc. for physical signs monitoring.

此外,在本申请实施例中,终端设备还可以是物联网(internet of things,IoT)系统中的终端设备,IoT是未来信息技术发展的重要组成部分,其主要技术特点是将物品通过 通信技术与网络连接,从而实现人机互连,物物互连的智能化网络。In addition, in the embodiments of the present application, the terminal device may also be a terminal device in an Internet of Things (IoT) system. The IoT is an important part of the development of future information technology. Its main technical feature is to pass items through communication technology. It is connected to the network to realize the intelligent network of human-machine interconnection and physical interconnection.

在本申请实施例中,IOT技术可以通过例如窄带(narrow band)NB技术,做到海量连接,深度覆盖,终端省电。例如,NB只包括一个资源块(resource block,RB),即,NB的带宽只有180KB。要做到海量接入,必须要求终端在接入上是离散的,根据本申请实施例的通信方法,能够有效解决IOT技术海量终端在通过NB接入网络时的拥塞问题。In the embodiment of the present application, the IOT technology may implement, for example, narrow band NB technology, to achieve mass connection, deep coverage, and terminal power saving. For example, the NB includes only one resource block (RB), that is, the bandwidth of the NB is only 180 KB. To achieve mass access, the terminals must be discrete in access. According to the communication method of the embodiment of the present application, the congestion problem of mass terminals of IOT technology when accessing the network through NB can be effectively solved.

此外,在本申请中,终端设备还可以包括智能打印机、火车探测器、加油站等传感器,主要功能包括收集数据(部分终端设备)、接收网络设备的控制信息与下行数据,并发送电磁波,向网络设备传输上行数据。In addition, in this application, the terminal equipment may also include sensors such as smart printers, train detectors, and gas stations. The main functions include collecting data (some terminal equipment), receiving control information and downlink data from network equipment, and sending electromagnetic waves to Network equipment transmits uplink data.

本申请实施例中的网络设备可以是用于与终端设备通信的设备,该网络设备可以是全球移动通信(global system for mobile communications,GSM)系统或码分多址(code division multiple access,CDMA)中的基站(base transceiver station,BTS),也可以是宽带码分多址(wideband code division multiple access,WCDMA)系统中的基站(NodeB,NB),还可以是LTE系统中的演进型基站(evolved NodeB,eNB或eNodeB),还可以是云无线接入网络(cloud radio access network,CRAN)场景下的无线控制器,或者该网络设备可以为中继站、接入点、车载设备、可穿戴设备以及未来5G网络中的网络设备或者未来演进的PLMN网络中的网络设备等,可以是WLAN中的接入点(access point,AP),可以是新型无线系统(new radio,NR)系统中的gNB本申请实施例并不限定。The network device in the embodiment of the present application may be a device for communicating with a terminal device, and the network device may be a Global System for Mobile Communication (GSM) system or a Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) system. The base station (Base Transceiver Station (BTS)) can also be a base station (NodeB, NB) in a wideband code division multiple access (WCDMA) system, or an evolved base station (evolved) in an LTE system. (NodeB, eNB or eNodeB), can also be a wireless controller in a cloud radio access network (CRAN) scenario, or the network device can be a relay station, access point, in-vehicle device, wearable device, and future A network device in a 5G network or a network device in a future evolved PLMN network may be an access point (AP) in a WLAN, or a gNB in a new wireless (NR) system The examples are not limited.

另外,在本申请实施例中,接入网设备为小区提供服务,终端设备通过该小区使用的传输资源(例如,频域资源,或者说,频谱资源)与接入网设备进行通信,该小区可以是接入网设备(例如基站)对应的小区,小区可以属于宏基站,也可以属于小小区(small cell)对应的基站,这里的小小区可以包括:城市小区(metro cell)、微小区(micro cell)、微微小区(pico cell)、毫微微小区(femto cell)等,这些小小区具有覆盖范围小、发射功率低的特点,适用于提供高速率的数据传输服务。In addition, in the embodiment of the present application, an access network device provides services to a cell, and a terminal device communicates with the access network device through a transmission resource (for example, a frequency domain resource or a spectrum resource) used by the cell. It may be a cell corresponding to an access network device (such as a base station), and the cell may belong to a macro base station or a small cell. The small cell here may include: a metro cell, a micro cell ( micro cells, pico cells, femto cells, etc. These small cells have the characteristics of small coverage and low transmission power, and are suitable for providing high-rate data transmission services.

此外,LTE系统或5G系统中的载波上可以同时有多个小区同频工作,在某些特殊场景下,也可以认为上述载波与小区的概念等同。例如在载波聚合(carrier aggregation,CA)场景下,当为UE配置辅载波时,会同时携带辅载波的载波索引和工作在该辅载波的辅小区的小区标识(cell indentification,Cell ID),在这种情况下,可以认为载波与小区的概念等同,比如UE接入一个载波和接入一个小区是等同的。In addition, multiple carriers on the carrier in the LTE system or 5G system can work on the same frequency at the same time. In some special scenarios, the above carrier and cell concepts can be considered equivalent. For example, in a carrier aggregation (CA) scenario, when a secondary carrier is configured for a UE, the carrier index of the secondary carrier and the cell ID (cell ID) of the secondary cell operating on the secondary carrier will be carried at the same time. In this case, it can be considered that the concept of a carrier is the same as a cell. For example, a UE accessing a carrier and accessing a cell are equivalent.

核心网设备可以与多个接入网设备连接,用于控制接入网设备,并且,可以将从网络侧(例如,互联网)接收到的数据分发至接入网设备。The core network device may be connected to multiple access network devices for controlling the access network device, and may distribute data received from the network side (for example, the Internet) to the access network device.

此外,在本申请中,网络设备可以包括基站(gNB),例如宏站、微基站、室内热点、以及中继节点等,功能是向终端设备发送无线电波,一方面实现下行数据传输,另一方面发送调度信息控制上行传输,并接收终端设备发送的无线电波,接收上行数据传输。In addition, in this application, the network device may include a base station (gNB), such as a macro station, a micro base station, an indoor hotspot, and a relay node. The function is to send radio waves to the terminal device. The aspect sends scheduling information to control uplink transmission, and receives radio waves sent by the terminal device, and receives uplink data transmission.

其中,以上列举的终端设备、接入网设备和核心网设备的功能和具体实现方式仅为示例性说明,本申请并未限定于此。The functions and specific implementations of the terminal equipment, access network equipment, and core network equipment listed above are only exemplary descriptions, and the present application is not limited thereto.

在本申请实施例中,终端设备或网络设备包括硬件层、运行在硬件层之上的操作系统层,以及运行在操作系统层上的应用层。该硬件层包括中央处理器(central processing unit,CPU)、内存管理单元(memory management unit,MMU)和内存(也称为主存)等硬件。该操作系统可以是任意一种或多种通过进程(process)实现业务处理的计算机操作系统, 例如,Linux操作系统、Unix操作系统、Android操作系统、iOS操作系统或windows操作系统等。该应用层包含浏览器、通讯录、文字处理软件、即时通信软件等应用。并且,本申请实施例并未对本申请实施例提供的方法的执行主体的具体结构特别限定,只要能够通过运行记录有本申请实施例的提供的方法的代码的程序,以根据本申请实施例提供的方法进行通信即可,例如,本申请实施例提供的方法的执行主体可以是终端设备或网络设备,或者,是终端设备或网络设备中能够调用程序并执行程序的功能模块。In the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device or the network device includes a hardware layer, an operating system layer running on the hardware layer, and an application layer running on the operating system layer. This hardware layer includes hardware such as a central processing unit (CPU), a memory management unit (MMU), and a memory (also called main memory). The operating system may be any one or more computer operating systems that implement business processing through processes, such as a Linux operating system, a Unix operating system, an Android operating system, an iOS operating system, or a windows operating system. This application layer contains applications such as browsers, address books, word processing software, and instant messaging software. In addition, the embodiment of the present application does not specifically limit the specific structure of the execution subject of the method provided by the embodiment of the present application, as long as the program that records the code of the method provided by the embodiment of the application can be run to provide the program according to the embodiment of the application. The communication may be performed by using the method described above. For example, the method execution subject provided in the embodiments of the present application may be a terminal device or a network device, or a function module in the terminal device or the network device that can call a program and execute the program.

另外,本申请的各个方面或特征可以实现成方法、装置或使用标准编程和/或工程技术的制品。本申请中使用的术语“制品”涵盖可从任何计算机可读器件、载体或介质访问的计算机程序。例如,计算机可读介质可以包括,但不限于:磁存储器件(例如,硬盘、软盘或磁带等),光盘(例如,压缩盘(compact disc,CD)、数字通用盘(digital versatile disc,DVD)等),智能卡和闪存器件(例如,可擦写可编程只读存储器(erasable programmable read-only memory,EPROM)、卡、棒或钥匙驱动器等)。另外,本文描述的各种存储介质可代表用于存储信息的一个或多个设备和/或其它机器可读介质。术语“机器可读介质”可包括但不限于,无线信道和能够存储、包含和/或承载指令和/或数据的各种其它介质。In addition, various aspects or features of the present application may be implemented as a method, apparatus, or article of manufacture using standard programming and / or engineering techniques. The term "article of manufacture" as used in this application encompasses a computer program accessible from any computer-readable device, carrier, or medium. For example, computer-readable media may include, but are not limited to: magnetic storage devices (eg, hard disks, floppy disks, or magnetic tapes, etc.), optical disks (eg, compact discs (CD), digital versatile discs (DVD) Etc.), smart cards and flash memory devices (for example, erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), cards, sticks or key drives, etc.). In addition, the various storage media described herein may represent one or more devices and / or other machine-readable media used to store information. The term "machine-readable medium" may include, but is not limited to, wireless channels and various other media capable of storing, containing, and / or carrying instruction (s) and / or data.

需要说明的是,在本申请实施例中,在应用层可以运行多个应用程序,此情况下,执行本申请实施例的通信方法的应用程序与用于控制接收端设备完成所接收到的数据所对应的动作的应用程序可以是不同的应用程序。It should be noted that in the embodiment of the present application, multiple application programs can be run at the application layer. In this case, the application program that executes the communication method of the embodiment of the present application and the method for controlling the receiving end device to complete the received data The application of the corresponding action may be a different application.

图1是能够适用本申请实施例通信方法的系统100的示意图。如图1所示,该系统100包括接入网设备102,接入网设备102可包括1个天线或多个天线例如,天线104、106、108、110、112和114。另外,接入网设备102可附加地包括发射机链和接收机链,本领域普通技术人员可以理解,它们均可包括与信号发送和接收相关的多个部件(例如处理器、调制器、复用器、解调器、解复用器或天线等)。FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a system 100 capable of applying a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 1, the system 100 includes an access network device 102, and the access network device 102 may include one antenna or multiple antennas, for example, antennas 104, 106, 108, 110, 112, and 114. In addition, the access network device 102 may additionally include a transmitter chain and a receiver chain. Those of ordinary skill in the art can understand that each of them can include multiple components related to signal transmission and reception (such as a processor, a modulator, Router, demodulator, demultiplexer or antenna, etc.).

接入网设备102可以与多个终端设备(例如终端设备116和终端设备122)通信。然而,可以理解,接入网设备102可以与类似于终端设备116或终端设备122的任意数目的终端设备通信。终端设备116和122可以是例如蜂窝电话、智能电话、便携式电脑、手持通信设备、手持计算设备、卫星无线电装置、全球定位系统、PDA和/或用于在无线通信系统100上通信的任意其它适合设备。The access network device 102 may communicate with multiple terminal devices (such as the terminal device 116 and the terminal device 122). However, it can be understood that the access network device 102 can communicate with any number of terminal devices similar to the terminal device 116 or the terminal device 122. The terminal devices 116 and 122 may be, for example, cellular phones, smartphones, laptops, handheld communication devices, handheld computing devices, satellite radios, global positioning systems, PDAs, and / or any other suitable for communicating on the wireless communication system 100 device.

如图1所示,终端设备116与天线112和114通信,其中天线112和114通过前向链路(也称为下行链路)118向终端设备116发送信息,并通过反向链路(也称为上行链路)120从终端设备116接收信息。此外,终端设备122与天线104和106通信,其中天线104和106通过前向链路124向终端设备122发送信息,并通过反向链路126从终端设备122接收信息。As shown in FIG. 1, the terminal device 116 communicates with the antennas 112 and 114, where the antennas 112 and 114 send information to the terminal device 116 through a forward link (also referred to as a downlink) 118, and through the reverse link (also (Referred to as the uplink) 120 receives information from the terminal device 116. In addition, the terminal device 122 communicates with the antennas 104 and 106, where the antennas 104 and 106 send information to the terminal device 122 through the forward link 124 and receive information from the terminal device 122 through the reverse link 126.

例如,在频分双工(frequency division duplex,FDD)系统中,例如,前向链路118可与反向链路120使用不同的频带,前向链路124可与反向链路126使用不同的频带。For example, in a frequency division duplex (FDD) system, for example, forward link 118 may use a different frequency band from reverse link 120, and forward link 124 may use a different frequency band than reverse link 126. The frequency band.

再例如,在时分双工(time division duplex,TDD)系统和全双工(full duplex)系统中,前向链路118和反向链路120可使用共同频带,前向链路124和反向链路126可使用共同频带。For another example, in a time division duplex (TDD) system and a full duplex system, the forward link 118 and the reverse link 120 may use a common frequency band, and the forward link 124 and the reverse link The link 126 may use a common frequency band.

被设计用于通信的每个天线(或者由多个天线组成的天线组)和/或区域称为接入网设备102的扇区。例如,可将天线组设计为与接入网设备102覆盖区域的扇区中的终端设 备通信。接入网设备可以通过单个天线或多天线发射分集向其对应的扇区内所有的终端设备发送信号。在接入网设备102通过前向链路118和124分别与终端设备116和122进行通信的过程中,接入网设备102的发射天线也可利用波束成形来改善前向链路118和124的信噪比。此外,与接入网设备通过单个天线或多天线发射分集向它所有的终端设备发送信号的方式相比,在接入网设备102利用波束成形向相关覆盖区域中随机分散的终端设备116和122发送信号时,相邻小区中的移动设备会受到较少的干扰。Each antenna (or antenna group consisting of multiple antennas) and / or area designed for communication is called a sector of the access network device 102. For example, the antenna group may be designed to communicate with terminal equipment in a sector covered by the access network equipment 102. The access network device can send signals to all terminal devices in its corresponding sector through a single antenna or multiple antenna transmit diversity. In the process that the access network device 102 communicates with the terminal devices 116 and 122 through the forward links 118 and 124, respectively, the transmitting antenna of the access network device 102 can also use beamforming to improve the forward link 118 and 124. Signal to noise ratio. In addition, compared to the way in which the access network device sends signals to all of its terminal devices through a single antenna or multiple antenna transmit diversity, the access network device 102 uses beamforming to randomly scattered terminal devices 116 and 122 in the relevant coverage area. When transmitting signals, mobile devices in adjacent cells experience less interference.

在给定时间,接入网设备102、终端设备116或终端设备122可以是无线通信发送装置和/或无线通信接收装置。当发送数据时,无线通信发送装置可对数据进行编码以用于传输。具体地,无线通信发送装置可获取(例如生成、从其它通信装置接收、或在存储器中保存等)要通过信道发送至无线通信接收装置的一定数目的数据比特。这种数据比特可包含在数据的传输块(或多个传输块)中,传输块可被分段以产生多个码块。At a given time, the access network device 102, the terminal device 116, or the terminal device 122 may be a wireless communication sending device and / or a wireless communication receiving device. When transmitting data, the wireless communication transmitting device may encode the data for transmission. Specifically, the wireless communication transmitting device may obtain (for example, generate, receive from another communication device, or save in a memory, etc.) a certain number of data bits to be transmitted to the wireless communication receiving device through a channel. Such data bits may be contained in a transport block (or transport blocks) of data, which may be segmented to generate multiple code blocks.

此外,该通信系统100可以是PLMN网络、设备到设备(device-to-device,D2D)网络、机器到机器(machine to machine,M2M)网络、IoT网络或者其他网络,图1只是举例的简化示意图,网络中还可以包括其他接入网设备,图1中未予以画出。In addition, the communication system 100 may be a PLMN network, a device-to-device (D2D) network, a machine-to-machine (M2M) network, an IoT network, or other networks. FIG. 1 is only a simplified schematic diagram of an example. The network may also include other access network equipment, which is not shown in Figure 1.

在本申请实施例中,数据或信息可以通过时频资源来承载,其中,该时频资源可以包括时域上的资源和频域上的资源。其中,在时域上,时频资源可以包括一个或多个时间单元。In the embodiment of the present application, data or information may be carried by time-frequency resources, where the time-frequency resources may include resources in the time domain and resources in the frequency domain. In the time domain, the time-frequency resource may include one or more time units.

其中,一个时间单元可以是一个符号,或者一个迷你时隙(Mini-slot),或者一个时隙(slot),或者一个子帧(subframe),其中,一个子帧在时域上的持续时间可以是1毫秒(ms),一个时隙由7个或者14个符号组成,一个迷你时隙可以包括至少一个符号(例如,2个符号或4个符号或者7个符号,或者小于等于14个符号的任意数目符号)。Among them, a time unit can be a symbol, or a mini-slot, or a slot, or a subframe, where the duration of a subframe in the time domain can be It is 1 millisecond (ms). A time slot consists of 7 or 14 symbols. A mini time slot can include at least one symbol (for example, 2 symbols or 4 symbols or 7 symbols, or less than or equal to 14 symbols). Any number of symbols).

在通信系统中,例如5G系统,为了在高频场景下对抗路径损耗,具有通信连接的两个通信设备之间可分别通过波束赋形(beam forming)来获得增益。发送端(例如,网络设备)和接收端(例如,终端设备),可通过波束(beam)训练来获取发射波束与接收波束之间的配对关系。In a communication system, such as a 5G system, in order to counteract path loss in a high-frequency scenario, two communication devices having a communication connection may respectively obtain a gain through beam forming. The transmitting end (for example, a network device) and the receiving end (for example, a terminal device) may obtain a pairing relationship between a transmitting beam and a receiving beam through beam training.

其中,波束可以理解为空间滤波器(spatial filter)或空间参数(spatial parameters)。用于发送信号的波束可以称为发射波束(transmission beam,Tx beam),可以为空间发送滤波器(spatial domain transmit filter)或空间发射参数(spatial domain transmit parameter);用于接收信号的波束可以称为接收波束(reception beam,Rx beam),可以为空间接收滤波器(spatial domain receive filter)或空间接收参数(spatial domain receive parameter)。Among them, the beam can be understood as a spatial filter or a spatial parameter. The beam used to send the signal can be called a transmission beam (transmission beam, Tx beam), which can be a spatial transmission filter (spatial domain transmission filter) or a spatial transmission parameter (spatial domain transmission parameter); the beam used to receive the signal can be called To receive the beam (reception beam, Rx beam), it can be a spatial receive filter (spatial domain receive filter) or a spatial receive parameter (spatial domain receive parameter).

形成波束的技术可以是波束赋形技术或者其他技术。例如,波束赋形技术具体可以为数字波束赋形技术、模拟波束赋形技术或者混合数字/模拟波束赋形技术等。发射波束可以是指信号经天线发射出去后在空间不同方向上形成的信号强度的分布,接收波束可以是指从天线上接收到的无线信号在空间不同方向上的信号强度分布。The beam forming technology may be a beam forming technology or other technologies. For example, the beamforming technology may specifically be a digital beamforming technology, an analog beamforming technology, or a hybrid digital / analog beamforming technology. A transmitting beam may refer to a signal intensity distribution in different directions of a space after a signal is transmitted through an antenna, and a receiving beam may refer to a signal intensity distribution of a wireless signal received from an antenna in different directions in space.

在NR协议中,波束例如可以是空间滤波器(spatial filter)。但应理解,本申请并不排除在未来的协议中定义其他的术语来表示相同或相似的含义的可能。In the NR protocol, the beam may be, for example, a spatial filter. However, it should be understood that this application does not exclude the possibility of defining other terms to represent the same or similar meaning in future agreements.

波束配对关系,即,发射波束与接收波束之间的配对关系,也就是空间发射滤波器与空间接收滤波器之间的配对关系。在具有波束配对关系的发射波束和接收波束之间传输信号可以获得较大的波束赋形增益。The beam pairing relationship, that is, the pairing relationship between the transmitting beam and the receiving beam, that is, the pairing relationship between the spatial transmitting filter and the spatial receiving filter. Transmitting a signal between a transmitting beam and a receiving beam having a beam pairing relationship can obtain a large beamforming gain.

在一种实现方式中,发送端可通过波束扫描的方式发送参考信号,接收端也可通过波束扫描的方式接收参考信号。具体地,发送端可通过波束赋形的方式在空间形成不同指向性的波束,并可以在多个具有不同指向性的波束上轮询,以通过不同指向性的波束将参考信号发射出去,使得参考信号在发送波束所指向的方向上发射参考信号的功率可以达到最大。接收端也可通过波束赋形的方式在空间形成不同指向性的波束,并可以在多个具有不同指向性的波束上轮询,以通过不同指向性的波束接收参考信号,使得该接收端接收参考信号的功率在接收波束所指向的方向上可以达到最大。In an implementation manner, the transmitting end may send the reference signal in a beam scanning manner, and the receiving end may also receive the reference signal in a beam scanning manner. Specifically, the transmitting end may form beams with different directivity in space by means of beamforming, and may poll on multiple beams with different directivity, so as to transmit the reference signal through beams with different directivity, so The power of the reference signal to transmit the reference signal in the direction pointed by the transmission beam can reach the maximum. The receiving end can also form beams with different directivity in the space by means of beamforming, and can poll on multiple beams with different directivity to receive reference signals through the beams with different directivity, so that the receiving end receives The power of the reference signal can be maximized in the direction pointed by the receiving beam.

通过遍历各发射波束和接收波束,接收端可基于接收到的参考信号进行信道测量,并将测量结果上报发送端。例如,接收端可以将参考信号接收功率(reference signal receiving power,RSRP)较大的部分参考信号资源上报给发送端,如上报参考信号资源的标识,以便发送端在传输数据或信令时采用信道质量较好的波束配对关系来收发信号。By traversing each transmitting beam and receiving beam, the receiving end can perform channel measurement based on the received reference signal and report the measurement result to the transmitting end. For example, the receiving end may report a portion of the reference signal receiving power (reference signal receiving power (RSRP)) of the larger reference signal resource to the transmitting end, such as reporting the identifier of the reference signal resource, so that the transmitting end uses the channel when transmitting data or signaling Better quality beam pairing to send and receive signals.

在本申请中,参考信号可以包括例如可以为用于下行信道测量的信道状态信息参考信号(channel state information reference signal,CSI-RS)、同步信号块(synchronization signal block,SSB)等。参考信号资源的配置信息可用于配置参考信号的传输属性,例如。本申请实施例中的参考信号资源可以包括CSI-RS资源(resource)、SSB资源(SS/PBCH Block resource)等,与此相对应地,参考信号资源的标识例如可以包括CSI-RS资源标识(CSI-RS resource indicator,CRI)、SSB资源标识(SSB resource indicator,SSBRI)、SRS资源标识(SRS resource index)。应理解,上文中列举的下行参考信号的功能和具体示例仅为示例性说明,不应对本申请构成任何限定,本申请并不排除在未来的协议中定义其他功能或用途的下行参考信号的可能。In this application, the reference signal may include, for example, a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS), a synchronization signal block (SSB), and the like for downlink channel measurement. The configuration information of the reference signal resource can be used to configure the transmission properties of the reference signal, for example. The reference signal resources in the embodiments of the present application may include CSI-RS resources (resources), SSB resources (SS / PBCH, Block Resources), etc. Correspondingly, the identifiers of the reference signal resources may include, for example, CSI-RS resource identifiers ( CSI-RS resource identifier (CRI), SSB resource identifier (SSBRI), and SRS resource identifier (SRS resource identifier). It should be understood that the functions and specific examples of the downlink reference signals listed above are merely illustrative, and should not constitute any limitation to this application. This application does not exclude the possibility of defining downlink reference signals of other functions or uses in future agreements. .

在本申请中,网络设备可以为各下行参考信号(或者说,波束)确定配置参数,并基于该配置参数发送下行参考信号。In this application, the network device may determine a configuration parameter for each downlink reference signal (or beam), and send a downlink reference signal based on the configuration parameter.

作为示例而非限定,下行参考信号的配置参数可以包括但不限于以下参数:By way of example and not limitation, the configuration parameters of the downlink reference signal may include, but are not limited to, the following parameters:

参数A.下行参考信号的发送周期Parameter A. Transmission period of downlink reference signal

具体地说,下行参考信号的发送周期可以是指同一个下行参考信号连续两次传输间的时间间隔的长度。Specifically, the sending period of the downlink reference signal may refer to a length of a time interval between two consecutive transmissions of the same downlink reference signal.

在本申请中,各波束的参考信号可以周期性发送。即,每个发送周期可以包括发送时段和非发送时段,网络设备可以在发送时段内发送下行参考信号,在非发送时段不发送下行参考信号。In this application, the reference signal of each beam may be sent periodically. That is, each sending period may include a sending period and a non-sending period. The network device may send a downlink reference signal during the sending period, and may not send a downlink reference signal during the non-sending period.

另外,需要说明的是,在本申请实施例中,不同的参考信号(例如,不同波束的参考信号)的发送周期可以相同,并且,不同的参考信号的对应同一时段的发送周期的起始时刻可以相同。In addition, it should be noted that, in the embodiment of the present application, the transmission periods of different reference signals (for example, reference signals of different beams) may be the same, and the start times of the transmission periods of different reference signals corresponding to the same period. Can be the same.

参数B.下行参考信号的时域位置偏移量Parameter B. Time domain position offset of the downlink reference signal

具体地说,在本申请中,下行参考信号的时域位置偏移量可以是指下行参考信号的发送周期的起始时刻相对于预设的基准时刻的偏移量。例如,下行参考信号的时域位置偏移量可以指示下行参考信号的发送周期的起始时间单元(例如,起始子帧)。Specifically, in the present application, the time-domain position offset of the downlink reference signal may refer to an offset of a start time of a sending period of the downlink reference signal with respect to a preset reference time. For example, the time-domain position offset of the downlink reference signal may indicate a start time unit (for example, a start subframe) of a transmission period of the downlink reference signal.

需要说明的是,通信系统在时域上可以被划分为多个系统周期,该下行参考信号的时域位置偏移量可以是指下行参考信号的首个发送时段的起始时刻相对于该起始时刻所处于的系统周期的起始时刻的偏移量。即,该预设的基准时刻可以是指下行参考信号的首个 发送时段所处于的系统周期的起始时刻。It should be noted that the communication system can be divided into multiple system cycles in the time domain. The time domain position offset of the downlink reference signal may refer to the start time of the first sending period of the downlink reference signal relative to the The offset of the start time of the system cycle in which the start time is located. That is, the preset reference time may refer to a start time of a system cycle in which a first transmission period of a downlink reference signal is located.

或者,下行参考信号的时域位置偏移可以是指下行参考信号的每个周期内的发送时段相对于该发送周期的起始时刻的偏移量。例如,下行参考信号的时域位置偏移可以是指下行参考信号的每个周期内的发送时段对应的时间单元在该发送周期所包括的多个时间单元中的序号。Alternatively, the time-domain position offset of the downlink reference signal may refer to an offset of a transmission period in each period of the downlink reference signal with respect to a start time of the transmission period. For example, the time domain position offset of the downlink reference signal may refer to a sequence number of a time unit corresponding to a transmission period in each period of the downlink reference signal in multiple time units included in the transmission period.

另外,需要说明的是,在本申请实施例中,不同的参考信号(例如,不同波束的参考信号)的偏移量可以相异,从而,终端设备能够在不同的时刻接收不同的参考信号(或者说,波束)。In addition, it should be noted that in the embodiments of the present application, offsets of different reference signals (for example, reference signals of different beams) may be different, so that the terminal device can receive different reference signals at different times ( Or, beam).

本申请的方法可以适用于能够使用DRX机制的通信系统。The method of the present application can be applied to a communication system capable of using a DRX mechanism.

DRX可让UE周期性的在某些时候进入眠状态(sleep mode),不去监听PDCCH,而需要监听的时候,则从睡眠状态中唤醒(wake up),这样就能够使UE达到省电的目的。DRX allows the UE to enter the sleep mode periodically at some times, not to monitor the PDCCH, and to wake up from sleep when it needs to monitor, so that the UE can achieve power saving. purpose.

图2示出了一个典型的DRX周期。如图2所示,在本申请中,一个DRX周期可以包括唤醒(on duration)时段和睡眠时段。Figure 2 shows a typical DRX cycle. As shown in FIG. 2, in this application, one DRX cycle may include an on-duration period and a sleep period.

该唤醒时段也可以称为激活期。终端设备可以在唤醒时段与网络设备进行通信。This wake-up period may also be referred to as an activation period. The terminal device can communicate with the network device during the wake-up period.

如图2所示,在On Duration时段,UE监控下行PDCCH子帧,在这段时间里,UE是处于唤醒状态的。As shown in FIG. 2, during an OnDuration period, the UE monitors a downlink PDCCH subframe. During this period, the UE is in an awake state.

睡眠时段也可以称为DRX机会(Opportunity for DRX)时段。终端设备可以在睡眠时段不进行数据传输。The sleep period can also be referred to as the Opportunity Opportunity (DRX) period. The terminal device may not perform data transmission during the sleep period.

如图2所示,在Opportunity for DRX时段,UE为了省电,进入了睡眠而不监控PDCCH子帧的时间。As shown in FIG. 2, in the Opportunity for DRX period, the UE enters sleep without monitoring the time of the PDCCH subframe in order to save power.

从图2中可以看到,用于DRX睡眠的时间越长,UE的功率消耗就越低,但相应的,业务传输的时延也会随着增加。It can be seen from FIG. 2 that the longer the time spent for DRX sleep, the lower the power consumption of the UE, but correspondingly, the delay of service transmission will also increase.

在DRX机制中,终端设备可以在激活期接收下行数据和上行授权。并且,终端设备可以在空闲模式下根据寻呼周期进行DRX的循环。或者,终端设备可以在无线资源控(Radio Resource Control,RRC)连接状态下采用多种定时器配合运作来保证下行数据与上行授权的接收。随后,对上述定时器进行详细说明。In the DRX mechanism, the terminal device can receive downlink data and uplink authorization during the activation period. In addition, the terminal device can perform a DRX cycle according to a paging cycle in the idle mode. Alternatively, the terminal device may cooperate with multiple timers in a radio resource control (RRC) connection state to ensure the reception of downlink data and uplink authorization. Subsequently, the above timer will be described in detail.

大数据量的通信势必造成耗电量的急剧增加,从而使得电池的供应不足或造成因为耗电量加大造成的散热量加大而导致系统运转故障。而DRX功能的利用大大降低了耗电量。A large amount of data communication will inevitably cause a sharp increase in power consumption, resulting in insufficient battery supply or increased heat dissipation due to increased power consumption, which will cause system operation failure. The use of the DRX function greatly reduces power consumption.

在本申请中,DRX功能控制实体可以位于协议栈的MAC层,其主要功能是控制向物理层发送指令,通知物理层在特定的时间监视PDCCH,其余时间不会开启接收天线,处于睡眠状态。In this application, the DRX function control entity may be located at the MAC layer of the protocol stack. Its main function is to control the sending of instructions to the physical layer to notify the physical layer to monitor the PDCCH at a specific time, and the rest of the time will not turn on the receiving antenna and is in a sleep state.

作为示例而非限定,在本申请中,DRX周期可以包括短DRX周期和长DRX周期。By way of example and not limitation, in this application, the DRX cycle may include a short DRX cycle and a long DRX cycle.

具体地说,如上所述,一个DRX周期等于唤醒(on duration)时段和睡眠时间的总和。通信系统可以根据不同的业务场景,给UE分别配置短DRX周期(short DRX cycle)或长DRX周期(long DRX cycle)。比如在进行语音业务时,语音编解码器通常每20毫秒(ms)发送1个语音数据包,此情况下,可以配置长度为20ms的短DRX周期,而在语音通话期间较长的静默期,可以配置长DRX周期。Specifically, as described above, one DRX cycle is equal to the sum of the on-duration period and the sleep time. The communication system may configure the UE with a short DRX cycle (short DRX cycle) or a long DRX cycle (long DRX cycle) according to different service scenarios. For example, when performing voice services, the voice codec usually sends a voice data packet every 20 milliseconds (ms). In this case, you can configure a short DRX cycle with a length of 20ms, and a longer silent period during a voice call. You can configure long DRX cycles.

即,如果在终端设备自身配置中包含有短DRX周期及短DRX周期定时器,则按照短DRX周期进行运行,在短DRX周期定时器超时后将会进入长DRX周期运行状态。That is, if the terminal device itself includes a short DRX cycle and a short DRX cycle timer, it runs according to the short DRX cycle, and will enter the long DRX cycle running state after the short DRX cycle timer expires.

并且,在激活期之后或短DRX环定时器超时后进入长DRX周期运行阶段。And, after the activation period or after the short DRX ring timer expires, it enters the long DRX cycle operation phase.

在本申请中,可以通过DRX起始偏移量(drx start offset)参数来指示DRX周期的起始时刻或者说,起始时间单元(例如,起始子帧)。drx start offset的取值范围可以基于DRX周期的大小确定,例如,DRX周期包括10个子帧,则drx start offset的取值范围可以为0~9;如果DRX周期包括20个子帧,drx start offset的取值范围可以为0~19。例如,drx start offset的取值为0,则表示DRX周期的起始子帧为周期内的第一个子帧;例如,drx start offset的取值为8,则表示DRX周期的起始子帧为周期内的第九个子帧。In the present application, a DRX start offset (drx start offset) parameter may be used to indicate a start time of a DRX cycle or a start time unit (for example, a start subframe). The value range of drx start offset can be determined based on the size of the DRX cycle. For example, if the DRX cycle includes 10 subframes, the value range of drx start offset can be 0-9; if the DRX cycle includes 20 subframes, the value of drx start offset The value ranges from 0 to 19. For example, if the value of drxstartoffset is 0, it means that the starting subframe of the DRX cycle is the first subframe in the cycle; for example, if the value of drxstartoffset is 8, it means the starting subframe of the DRX cycle Is the ninth subframe in the period.

其中,DRX周期的起始时刻(或者说,起始时间单元)可以等于或不等于DRX周期的唤醒时段的起始时刻(或者说,起始时间单元)。The start time (or start time unit) of the DRX cycle may be equal to or not equal to the start time (or start time unit) of the wake-up period of the DRX cycle.

下面,对DRX机制中使用的定时器进行示例性说明。In the following, the timers used in the DRX mechanism are exemplarily described.

1.持续时间定时器(on duration timer)1. Duration timer (on duration timer)

该on duration timer用于确定唤醒时段的时长,终端设备在on duration timer运行期间或者说,在on duration timer超时之前,终端处于唤醒(on duration)时段内,终端设备可以开启接收天线监听PDCCH。The on-duration timer is used to determine the duration of the wake-up period. During the running of the on-duration timer or before the on-duration timer expires, the terminal is in the on-duration period, and the terminal device can turn on the receiving antenna to monitor the PDCCH.

2.DRX非激活定时器(drx-inactivity timer)2.DRX inactivity timer (drx-inactivity timer)

具体地说,设0号子帧是on duration时段的最后一个子帧,此时网络侧恰好有一个较大字节的数据需要发给UE,这些数据没法在0号子帧全部发送完。如果依照on duration timer执行,则UE将在1号子帧进入DRX睡眠状态,不会再去监听PDCCH,也不不能接收来自网侧的任何下行PDSCH数据。网侧也只能等到DRX周期结束,并在下1个on duration时段到来时,继续向终端设备发送没有传完的数据。这类处理机制虽然没有错,但明显增加了全部业务的处理时延。为了不这类情况的出现,DRX机制中增加了drx-inactivity timer。如果drx-inactivity timer正在运行,则即使本来配置的on duration timer超时(即,on duration时段结束),UE依然需要继续监听下行PDCCH子帧,直到drx-inactivity timer超时。增加了DRX-Inactivity机制以后,明显会减少数据的处理时延。Specifically, suppose that the subframe No. 0 is the last subframe in the on-duration period. At this time, the network side happens to have a larger byte of data to send to the UE, and these data cannot be completely transmitted in the subframe No. 0. If executed in accordance with the on-duration timer, the UE will enter the DRX sleep state in subframe 1 and will no longer monitor the PDCCH and cannot receive any downlink PDSCH data from the network side. The network side can only wait until the end of the DRX cycle, and when the next on-duration period arrives, it continues to send the untransmitted data to the terminal device. Although there is nothing wrong with this type of processing mechanism, it obviously increases the processing delay of all services. In order to avoid this kind of situation, drx-inactivity timer is added to the DRX mechanism. If the drx-inactivity timer is running, even if the originally configured ontime timer expires (ie, the onduration period ends), the UE still needs to continue to monitor the downlink PDCCH subframe until the drx-inactivity timer expires. After the DRX-Inactivity mechanism is added, the processing delay of data is obviously reduced.

3.DRX重传定时器(DRX Retransmission Timer)3.DRX Retransmission Timer

在DRX机制中,DRX Retransmission Timer含义是:UE在收到期望的下行重传数据之前,需要等待的最少子帧个数。对FDD-LTE来讲,HARQ RTT Timer的值固定等于8个子帧。对TDD-LTE来讲,HARQ RTT Timer的值等于(k+4)个子帧,k表示下行信道传输与其应对反馈信息的时延。而DRX Retransmission Timer是指在HARQ RTT Timer超时后,UE为了接收没有传输成功而需要重传的数据,监听PDCCH的时间长度。In the DRX mechanism, the meaning of DRX Retransmission Timer is: the minimum number of subframes that the UE needs to wait before receiving the expected downlink retransmission data. For FDD-LTE, the value of HARQ RTT Timer is fixed equal to 8 subframes. For TDD-LTE, the value of HARQ RTT Timer is equal to (k + 4) subframes, where k represents the delay of the downlink channel transmission and its response to the feedback information. DRXRetransmissionTimer refers to the length of time that the UE monitors the PDCCH after HARQ, RTT, and Timer expire.

在本申请中,唤醒时段可以包括上述on duration timer、drx-inactivity timer和DRX Retransmission Timer中的至少一个定时器运行期间对应的时段。In this application, the wake-up period may include a period corresponding to at least one of the on-duration timer, drx-inactivity timer, and DRXRetransmission Timer.

应理解,以上列举的定时器仅为示例性说明,本申请并未限定于此。It should be understood that the timers listed above are only exemplary descriptions, and the present application is not limited thereto.

在空闲模式下,对PDCCH的监视功能可以采用DRX方式,从而降低了功耗,空闲模式下的DRX工作机制固定,采用固定的周期,并在寻呼时刻(paging occasion,PO)到来时启动监视PDCCH的功能,进入空闲模式下的激活期,在激活期需要全面监视PDCCH,在DRX激活期过去之后再次进入睡眠状态,寻呼帧(paging frame,PF)表示含有一个或者多个PO的无线帧;若使用DRX,那么终端设备仅监控每个DRX周期的PO。在终端设备开机后将会按照默认的DRX周期(Cycle)配置进行周期循环。在寻呼时刻到 来时对PDCCH进行接收。In the idle mode, the monitoring function of the PDCCH can adopt the DRX method, thereby reducing power consumption. The DRX working mechanism in the idle mode is fixed, adopts a fixed cycle, and starts monitoring when the paging moment (PO) arrives. The function of the PDCCH enters the activation period in the idle mode. During the activation period, the PDCCH needs to be fully monitored, and it goes to sleep again after the DRX activation period elapses. The paging frame (PF) indicates a radio frame containing one or more POs. If DRX is used, the terminal device only monitors the PO for each DRX cycle. After the terminal device is powered on, the cycle will be performed according to the default DRX cycle (Cycle) configuration. Receive the PDCCH when the paging moment comes.

在RRC连接状态下,采用的是定时器与DRX结合的工作方式,且网络设备也会保持与终端设备保持相同的DRX工作方式,并实时了解终端设备是处于激活期还是睡眠期,因此保证在激活期传递数据,而在睡眠期不会进行数据传输。In the RRC connection state, the combination of timer and DRX is used, and the network device will maintain the same DRX operation mode as the terminal device, and know in real time whether the terminal device is in the active or sleeping period, so it is guaranteed that Data is passed during the active period, but not transmitted during the sleep period.

在本申请中,终端设备在获取上行数据之后可以立即开启DRX非激活定时器,在DRX非激活定时器超时后进入短DRX周期定时器运行阶段。在短DRX周期定时器运行时当子帧号满足预设条件时进入on duration Timer运行阶段开始监视PDCCH。作为示例而非限定,该预设条件可以包括但不限于:In this application, a terminal device may immediately start a DRX inactivity timer after acquiring uplink data, and enter a short DRX cycle timer operation phase after the DRX inactivity timer expires. When the short DRX cycle timer runs, when the subframe number meets a preset condition, it enters the on-duration Timer running phase and starts monitoring the PDCCH. By way of example and not limitation, the preset condition may include, but is not limited to:

[(SFN×10)+子帧号]mod(短DRX周期时长)=(drx start offset)mod(短DRX周期时长)。[(SFN × 10) + subframe number] mod (short DRX cycle duration) = (drx start offset) mod (short DRX cycle duration).

其中,SFN表示系统帧号,drx start offset表示激活期(或者说,唤醒时段)的偏移量,用于指示在一个DRX周期中的第几个时间单元(例如,子帧)开启on duration Timer,进入激活期。Among them, SFN indicates the system frame number, and drx start offset indicates the offset of the activation period (or wake-up period), which is used to indicate the number of time units (for example, subframes) in a DRX cycle. To enter the activation period.

长DRX周期运行时进入Onduration Timer激活期的条件可以包括但不限于:Conditions for entering the OndurationTimer activation period when running with a long DRX cycle may include, but are not limited to:

[(SFN×10)+子帧数]mod(长DRX周期时长)=drxStartOffset。[(SFN × 10) + number of sub-frames] mod (long DRX cycle duration) = drxStartOffset.

另外,如果在PUCCH上已经发送了调度请求(scheduling request,SR),此时处于等待状态,需要监视PDCCH,目的是获取传输上行数据的上行授权。在获取了新的上行授权之后将会通知DRX按照固定的DRX流程运行,进入drx-inactivity timer运行阶段。In addition, if a scheduling request (SR) has been sent on the PUCCH, it is in a waiting state at this time, and the PDCCH needs to be monitored in order to obtain an uplink grant for transmitting uplink data. After obtaining a new uplink authorization, DRX will be notified to run in accordance with a fixed DRX process and enter the drx-inactivity timer running phase.

在收到新的数据块#A后立即进行解码,并开启对应的HARQ进程的HARQ RTT定时器,由于数据块#A解码失败,因此在HARQ RTT超时之后需要开启DRX重传定时器进行监视PDCCH。此外在收到数据块#A之后需要判断是否是新数据,在判断是新数据且检出的MAC PDU中没有包含DRX命令控制元后,立即开启DRX非激活定时器,此定时器属于全局定时器,在此定时器运行期间将会连续监视下行子帧。After receiving the new data block #A, it is decoded immediately and the HARQ RTT timer of the corresponding HARQ process is started. As the data block #A fails to decode, the DRX retransmission timer needs to be enabled to monitor the PDCCH after HARQ RTRT times out . In addition, after receiving the data block #A, it is necessary to determine whether it is new data. After determining that the data is new and the detected MAC PDU does not contain the DRX command control element, immediately start the DRX inactivity timer. This timer belongs to the global timing. During the running of this timer, it will continuously monitor the downlink subframes.

在发送完毕上行数据之后将会根据固定的k值关系接收上行反馈。After sending the uplink data, the uplink feedback will be received according to the fixed k-value relationship.

在本申请中,各种定时器是由RRC层配置的,在发起RRC连接建立或重建之后将会通过MAC主配置(MAC-MainConfig)信元将MAC层需要的各种参数配置下来,然后立即进入短DRX周期或长DRX周期运行阶段。In this application, various timers are configured by the RRC layer. After initiating RRC connection establishment or re-establishment, various parameters required by the MAC layer will be configured through the MAC-MainConfig cell, and then immediately Enter the short DRX cycle or long DRX cycle operation phase.

作为示例而非限定,DRX模式的配置参数可以包括但不限于以下参数:By way of example and not limitation, the configuration parameters of the DRX mode may include, but are not limited to, the following parameters:

参数a.DRX的周期(drx-cycle)Parameter a. DRX cycle (drx-cycle)

具体地说,DRX的周期可以是指DRX周期的长度,例如,上述短DRX周期的长度,或者,也可以是指上述长DRX周期的长度。Specifically, the period of DRX may refer to the length of the DRX cycle, for example, the length of the short DRX cycle described above, or it may also refer to the length of the long DRX cycle described above.

参数b.该DRX模式的唤醒时段的时域位置偏移量Parameter b. Time domain position offset of the wake-up period of the DRX mode

具体地说,例如,在本申请中,一个唤醒时段的起始时刻可以与该唤醒时段所处于的DRX周期的起始时刻重合,此情况下,DRX模式的唤醒时段的时域位置偏移量可以是指DRX周期的起始时刻相对于预设的基准时刻的偏移量。例如,DRX模式的唤醒时段的时域位置偏移量可以指示DRX周期的起始时间单元(例如,起始子帧)。Specifically, for example, in this application, the start time of a wake-up period may coincide with the start time of the DRX cycle in which the wake-up period is located. In this case, the time domain position offset of the wake-up period in the DRX mode It may refer to an offset of a start time of the DRX cycle from a preset reference time. For example, the time-domain position offset of the wake-up period of the DRX mode may indicate a start time unit (eg, a start subframe) of the DRX cycle.

需要说明的是,通信系统在时域上可以被划分为多个系统周期,该DRX模式的唤醒时段的时域位置偏移量可以是指该DRX模式的首个唤醒时段的起始时刻相对于该起始时刻所处于的系统周期的起始时刻的偏移量。即,该预设的基准时刻可以是指该DRX模式 的首个唤醒时段所处于的系统周期的起始时刻。It should be noted that the communication system can be divided into multiple system cycles in the time domain. The time domain position offset of the wake-up period of the DRX mode may refer to the start time of the first wake-up period of the DRX mode with respect to The offset of the start time of the system cycle in which the start time is located. That is, the preset reference time may refer to a start time of a system cycle in which a first wake-up period of the DRX mode is located.

或者说,该DRX模式的唤醒时段的时域位置偏移量可以是上述drx start offset参数所指示的偏移量。In other words, the time domain position offset of the wake-up period of the DRX mode may be the offset indicated by the drx start offset parameter.

其中,该唤醒时段可以是上述on duration Timer计量的时段。The wake-up period may be a period measured by the on-duration Timer described above.

再例如,在本申请中,一个唤醒时段的起始时刻可以与该唤醒时段所处于的DRX周期的起始时刻不重合,此情况下,DRX模式的唤醒时段的时域位置偏移量可以是指唤醒时段相对于DRX周期的起始时刻的偏移量。例如,DRX模式的唤醒时段的时域位置偏移量可以指示唤醒时段在DRX周期内的偏移量。For another example, in this application, the start time of a wake-up period may not coincide with the start time of the DRX cycle in which the wake-up period is located. In this case, the time domain position offset of the wake-up period in the DRX mode may be Refers to the offset of the wake-up period from the start of the DRX cycle. For example, the time domain position offset of the wake-up period of the DRX mode may indicate the offset of the wake-up period within the DRX cycle.

其中,该唤醒时段可以包括on duration timer、drx-inactivity timer或HARQ RTT timer中的任一定时器对应的时段。The wake-up period may include a period corresponding to any one of an on-duration timer, a drx-inactivity timer, or a HARQ RTT timer.

再例如,本申请中,一个唤醒时段的起始时刻可以是满足公式[(SFN×10)+子帧数]mod(长DRX周期时长)=drxStartOffset的时刻,其中该唤醒时段为on duration timer运行的时段。For another example, in the present application, the starting time of a wake-up period may be a time that satisfies the formula [(SFN × 10) + number of sub-frames] mod (long DRX cycle duration) = drxStartOffset, where the wake-up period is on time. Time period.

下面结合图3至图6对本申请的传输下行参考信号的方法100进行详细说明。其中,该下行参考信号可用于波束检测(或者说,信道测量)过程。The method 100 for transmitting a downlink reference signal according to the present application is described in detail below with reference to FIGS. 3 to 6. The downlink reference signal may be used in a beam detection (or, channel measurement) process.

图3示出了网络设备#A(即,网络设备的一例)与终端设备#A(即,终端设备的一例)传输下行参考信号的方法200的一例的示意性流程。FIG. 3 shows a schematic flow of an example of a method 200 for transmitting a downlink reference signal by the network device #A (that is, an example of a network device) and the terminal device #A (that is, an example of a terminal device).

在S210,网络设备#A可以为终端设备#A配置DRX模式的相关参数。In S210, the network device #A may configure related parameters of the DRX mode for the terminal device #A.

例如,网络设备#A可以确定终端设备#A的DRX模式的drx-cycle参数,即,网络设备#A可以确定终端设备#A的DRX周期,为了便于理解,将该周期记作:周期#A。For example, the network device #A may determine the drx-cycle parameter of the DRX mode of the terminal device #A, that is, the network device #A may determine the DRX cycle of the terminal device #A. For ease of understanding, this period is referred to as: cycle #A .

再例如,网络设备#A可以确定终端设备#A的DRX模式的drx start offset参数,即,网络设备#A可以确定终端设备#A的DRX周期的起始时间单元对应的偏移量,或者说,网络设备#A可以确定终端设备#A的唤醒时段的起始时间单元对应的偏移量。以下,为了便于理解,将该偏移量记作:偏移量#A。For another example, the network device #A may determine the drx start offset parameter of the DRX mode of the terminal device #A, that is, the network device #A may determine the offset corresponding to the start time unit of the DRX cycle of the terminal device #A, or , The network device #A may determine an offset corresponding to a start time unit of the wake-up period of the terminal device #A. Hereinafter, for ease of understanding, this offset is referred to as an offset #A.

其后,网络设备#A可以确定X个参考信号的相关参数。其中,该X个参考信号可以与网络设备#A所使用的X个波束一一对应,X为大于或等于2的整数。Thereafter, the network device #A may determine related parameters of the X reference signals. The X reference signals may correspond to the X beams used by the network device #A one by one, and X is an integer greater than or equal to 2.

在本申请中,该X个参考信号中的至少一个参考信号的相关参数与终端设备#A的DRX模式的相关参数具有相关性。In the present application, a correlation parameter of at least one of the X reference signals has a correlation with a correlation parameter of a DRX mode of the terminal device #A.

为了便于理解,以该至少一个参考信号中的参考信号#A为例,对该至少一个参考信号的相关参数的确定过程进行详细说明。For ease of understanding, the reference signal #A in the at least one reference signal is used as an example to describe the determination process of the related parameters of the at least one reference signal in detail.

作为示例而非限定,例如,在本申请中,该参考信号#A的相关参数可以包括参考信号#A的周期。为了便于理解,将该周期记作:周期#B。By way of example and not limitation, for example, in the present application, the related parameters of the reference signal #A may include a period of the reference signal #A. For ease of understanding, this period is referred to as: period #B.

此情况下,网络设备#A可以基于上述周期#A确定周期#B以使该周期#A和周期#B之间的关系满足以下至少一种条件。In this case, the network device #A may determine the period #B based on the above period #A so that the relationship between the period #A and the period #B satisfies at least one of the following conditions.

条件1Condition 1

周期#B是周期#A的整数倍。The period #B is an integer multiple of the period #A.

即,CSI-RS-cycle-in-DRX=P×DRX-cycle,其中,P为正整数。That is, CSI-RS-cycle-in-DRX = P × DRX-cycle, where P is a positive integer.

其中,CSI-RS-cycle-in-DRX表示周期#B,即,参考信号#A的发送周期。DRX-cycle表示周期#A,即,终端设备#A的DRX周期。Among them, CSI-RS-cycle-in-DRX represents cycle #B, that is, the transmission cycle of reference signal #A. DRX-cycle represents cycle #A, that is, the DRX cycle of terminal device #A.

从而,能够参考信号#A的每个发送周期均落入终端设备#A的DRX周期内。Therefore, each transmission period of the reference signal #A can fall within the DRX cycle of the terminal device #A.

条件2Condition 2

周期#A是周期#B的整数倍。Cycle #A is an integer multiple of cycle #B.

即,DRX-cycle=Q×CSI-RS-cycle-in-DRX,其中,Q为正整数。That is, DRX-cycle = Q × CSI-RS-cycle-in-DRX, where Q is a positive integer.

从而,能够使终端设备#A的每个DRX周期内均存在至少一个参考信号#A的发送周期。Therefore, at least one transmission period of the reference signal #A can exist in each DRX cycle of the terminal device #A.

需要说明的是,在本申请中,该周期#A和周期#B的单位(或者说,粒度)可以相同,并且,该周期#A和周期#B的单位可以是时间单元(例如,子帧或时隙)。It should be noted that, in this application, the units (or granularity) of the period #A and the period #B may be the same, and the units of the period #A and the period #B may be time units (for example, subframes Or time slot).

再例如,在本申请中,该参考信号#A的相关参数可以包括参考信号#A的偏移量(或者说,时域位置偏移量)。为了便于理解,将该偏移量记作:偏移量#B。As another example, in the present application, the related parameters of the reference signal #A may include an offset (or time domain position offset) of the reference signal #A. For ease of understanding, this offset is written as: offset #B.

此情况下,网络设备#A可以基于上述偏移量#A确定偏移量#B以使该偏移量#A和偏移量#B之间的关系满足以下条件。In this case, the network device #A may determine the offset #B based on the above-mentioned offset #A so that the relationship between the offset #A and the offset #B satisfies the following conditions.

条件3Condition 3

偏移量#B大于或等于偏移量#A。The offset #B is greater than or equal to the offset #A.

或者说,基于偏移量#B确定的起始时刻不早于基于偏移量#A确定的起始时刻。In other words, the start time determined based on the offset #B is not earlier than the start time determined based on the offset #A.

这里偏移量#A可以表示为drx-StartOffset或drx-SlotOffset。Here the offset #A can be expressed as drx-StartOffset or drx-SlotOffset.

即,CSI-RS-offset-in-DRX=drx-StartOffset+n,That is, CSI-RS-offset-in-DRX = drx-StartOffset + n,

或,CSI-RS-offset-in-DRX=drx-SlotOffset,Or, CSI-RS-offset-in-DRX = drx-SlotOffset,

其中,n为正数。CSI-RS-offset-in-DRX表示偏移量#B,即,参考信号#A的发送时段的偏移量。DRX-cycle表示周期#B,即,终端设备#A的DRX周期的偏移量。Among them, n is a positive number. CSI-RS-offset-in-DRX indicates an offset #B, that is, an offset of a transmission period of the reference signal #A. DRX-cycle represents the offset of the DRX cycle of the cycle #B, that is, the terminal device #A.

另外,drx-StartOffset表示DRX周期的偏移量。In addition, drx-StartOffset indicates the offset of the DRX cycle.

drx-SlotOffset表示唤醒时段(例如,on duration timer、drx-inactivity timer和HARQ RTT timer中的至少一个定时器运行期间对应的时段)的偏移量。drx-SlotOffset represents an offset of a wake-up period (for example, at least one of the on-duration timer, drx-inactivity timer, and HARQ RTT timer corresponding to the period during which the timer runs).

作为示例而非限定,该n的单位(或者说,粒度)与偏移量#B(或偏移量#A)的单位可以相同,例如,可以为子帧。By way of example and not limitation, the unit (or granularity) of n may be the same as the unit of offset #B (or offset #A), for example, it may be a subframe.

或者,该n的单位(或者说,粒度)与偏移量#B(或偏移量#A)的单位可以相异,例如,偏移量#B(或偏移量#A)的单位可以为子帧,n的单位可以为时隙或符号等。Alternatively, the unit (or granularity) of n may be different from the unit of offset #B (or offset #A). For example, the unit of offset #B (or offset #A) may be different. Is a subframe, and the unit of n may be a time slot or a symbol.

可选地,该n对应的时长可以小于终端设备#A的DRX周期中的唤醒(on-duration)时段的时长。Optionally, the duration corresponding to n may be shorter than the duration of an on-duration period in the DRX cycle of terminal device #A.

或者说,偏移量#B与偏移量#A的差值可以小于终端设备#A的DRX周期中的唤醒时段的时长。In other words, the difference between the offset #B and the offset #A may be smaller than the duration of the wake-up period in the DRX cycle of the terminal device #A.

从而,能够可靠地使参考信号#A的发送时段落入终端设备#A的DRX周期中的唤醒时段中。Therefore, the transmission time of the reference signal #A can be reliably entered into the wake-up period in the DRX cycle of the terminal device #A.

图4示出了P(或Q)为1时,基于上述方法确定的参考信号#A的配置于终端设备#A的DRX的配置之间的关系的一例。即,在本申请中,该参考信号#A的周期可以与终端设备#A的DRX的周期相同,并且,偏移量#B与偏移量#A满足上述条件3,从而,能够使参考信号#A的每个发送周期均对应一个DRX周期,并且,能够使该参考信号#A的发送时段落入DRX周期的唤醒时段内,从而,能够确保终端设备#A在每次醒来时均能够接收到参考信号#A,或者说,能够确保网络设备#A发送的每个参考信号#A均被终端设备 #A接收到。FIG. 4 shows an example of the relationship between the configuration of the reference signal #A determined based on the above method and the configuration of the DRX of the terminal device #A when P (or Q) is 1. That is, in this application, the period of the reference signal #A may be the same as the period of the DRX of the terminal device #A, and the offset #B and the offset #A satisfy the above condition 3, so that the reference signal can be made Each transmission cycle of #A corresponds to a DRX cycle, and the sending time of the reference signal #A can be included in the wake-up period of the DRX cycle, thereby ensuring that the terminal device #A can wake up every time it wakes up. When the reference signal #A is received, it can be ensured that each reference signal #A sent by the network device #A is received by the terminal device #A.

图5示出了P=2时,基于上述方法确定的参考信号#A的配置于终端设备#A的DRX的配置之间的关系的一例。即,在本申请中,周期#A与周期#B满足条件1,并且,偏移量#B与偏移量#A满足上述条件3,从而,能够确保网络设备#A发送的每个参考信号#A均被终端设备#A接收到。FIG. 5 shows an example of the relationship between the arrangement of the reference signal #A determined based on the method described above and the arrangement of the DRX of the terminal device #A when P = 2. That is, in the present application, the period #A and the period #B satisfy the condition 1, and the offset #B and the offset #A satisfy the above condition 3, so that each reference signal transmitted by the network device #A can be ensured #A is received by terminal device #A.

图6示出了Q=2时,基于上述方法确定的参考信号#A的配置于终端设备#A的DRX的配置之间的关系的一例。即,在本申请中,周期#A与周期#B满足条件2,并且,偏移量#B与偏移量#A满足上述条件3,从而,能够确保终端设备#A在每次醒来时均能够接收到参考信号#A。FIG. 6 shows an example of the relationship between the arrangement of the reference signal #A determined based on the above method and the arrangement of the DRX of the terminal device #A when Q = 2. That is, in the present application, the period #A and the period #B satisfy the condition 2 and the offset #B and the offset #A satisfy the condition 3 described above, so that the terminal device #A can be ensured every time when waking up Both can receive the reference signal #A.

应理解,以上列举的网络设备#A在S210中执行的动作仅为示例性说明,本申请并未限定于此,例如,网络设备#A也可以首先确定参考信号#A的相关参数,并基于该参考信号#A的相关参数确定终端设备#A的DRX周期的相关参数,只要能够确保周期#A与周期#B的关系满足条件#1或条件#2,和/或能够确保偏移量#A与偏移量#B的关系满足条件#3即可。It should be understood that the actions listed above by the network device #A in S210 are only exemplary descriptions, and the present application is not limited thereto. For example, the network device #A may also first determine the relevant parameters of the reference signal #A and based on The relevant parameters of the reference signal #A determine the relevant parameters of the DRX cycle of the terminal device #A, as long as it can ensure that the relationship between the cycle #A and the cycle #B satisfies condition # 1 or condition # 2, and / or can ensure the offset # The relationship between A and offset #B satisfies condition # 3.

另外,上述多个参考信号中还可以存在一个或多个与DRX的配置无关的参考信号,即,该部分参考信号的配置参数可以基于现有技术确定。In addition, one or more reference signals that are not related to the configuration of the DRX may also exist in the multiple reference signals, that is, the configuration parameters of the partial reference signals may be determined based on the existing technology.

即,在本申请中,网络设备#A使用的部分参考信号的周期可以与DRX的周期无关,或者,网络设备#A使用的部分参考信号的偏移量可以与DRX的偏移量无关,即,该部分参考信号的发送时段可以不落入DRX的唤醒时段内。并且,网络设备#A使用的另一部分参考信号(例如,参考信号#A)的相关参数可以基于上述方式确定从而与DRX的配置具有相关性。That is, in the present application, the period of the partial reference signal used by the network device #A may be independent of the period of the DRX, or the offset of the partial reference signal used by the network device #A may be independent of the offset of the DRX, that is, The sending period of this part of the reference signal may not fall within the wake-up period of the DRX. In addition, related parameters of another part of the reference signal (for example, the reference signal #A) used by the network device #A may be determined based on the foregoing manner so as to have correlation with the configuration of the DRX.

在S220,网络设备#A可以将参考信号#A的相关参数发送给终端设备#A。In S220, the network device #A may send related parameters of the reference signal #A to the terminal device #A.

在S230,网络设备#A可以基于参考信号#A的相关参数发送参考信号#A,终端设备#A可以基于DRX的配置参数进入DRX模式,并基于参考信号#A的相关参数接收该参考信号#A。In S230, the network device #A may send the reference signal #A based on the relevant parameters of the reference signal #A, and the terminal device #A may enter the DRX mode based on the configuration parameters of the DRX, and receive the reference signal # based on the relevant parameters of the reference signal #A. A.

此外,在本申请中,终端设备#A还可以基于参考信号#A进行波束检测或信道测量等,该过程可以与现有技术相似,这里,为了避免赘述,省略其详细说明。In addition, in this application, the terminal device #A may also perform beam detection or channel measurement based on the reference signal #A. This process may be similar to the prior art. Here, in order to avoid redundant description, detailed description is omitted.

并且,终端设备#A可以将上述处理得到的结果(例如,波束恢复请求信息或信道质量信息等)发送给网络设备#A。In addition, the terminal device #A may send a result (for example, beam restoration request information or channel quality information) obtained by the foregoing processing to the network device #A.

其中,该发送过程可以于现有技术相似,或者,该过程也可以与采用后述方法300或方法400中描述的过程。The sending process may be similar to the prior art, or the process may be similar to the process described in the method 300 or the method 400 described later.

根据本申请的方案,通过将下行参考信号的配置参数与DRX模式的配置参数相关联,能够提高终端设备在唤醒期间完成波束训练和信道质量测量的可能性,即,能够提高终端设备在唤醒期间获得可使用的波束的信息的可能性,从而能够提高通信的可靠性,能够改善用户体验。According to the solution of the present application, by associating the configuration parameters of the downlink reference signal with the configuration parameters of the DRX mode, the possibility of the terminal device completing beam training and channel quality measurement during the wake-up period can be improved, that is, the terminal device can be improved during the wake-up period The possibility of obtaining information on the available beams can improve the reliability of communication and improve the user experience.

下面,结合图7至图12对本申请的上行信道的发送过程进行说明。The transmission process of the uplink channel of the present application will be described below with reference to FIGS. 7 to 12.

图7示出了网络设备#B(即,网络设备的一例)与终端设备#B(即,终端设备的一例)之间传输上行信道的方法300。FIG. 7 illustrates a method 300 for transmitting an uplink channel between a network device #B (that is, an example of a network device) and a terminal device #B (that is, an example of a terminal device).

其中,该上行信道可以用于承载例如波束恢复请求信息或信道质量信息等基于下行参 考信号获得的测量结果或检测结果。即,该方法300可以用于例如基于上述下行参考信号#A确定的信道质量信息等的传输过程。此情况下,该网络设备#A与网络设备#B可以是同一设备,该终端设备#A与终端设备#B可以是同一终端设备。The uplink channel may be used to carry measurement results or detection results obtained based on a downlink reference signal, such as beam recovery request information or channel quality information. That is, the method 300 may be used in a transmission process of channel quality information and the like determined based on the above-mentioned downlink reference signal #A, for example. In this case, the network device #A and the network device #B may be the same device, and the terminal device #A and the terminal device #B may be the same terminal device.

此外,该上行信道也可以用于传输上行参考信号,例如,用于上行信道测量的探测参考信号(sounding reference signal,SRS)。In addition, the uplink channel may also be used to transmit an uplink reference signal, for example, a sounding reference signal (SRS) for uplink channel measurement.

在本申请中,为了提高上行信道的传输效率和可靠性,可以采用重复传输机制进行上行信道的传输,即,网络设备可以向终端设备指示重复次数,从而,终端设备基于该重复次数发送上行信道,例如,如果重复次数为U,则终端设备可以将上行信道发送U次,U为大于或等于2的整数。In this application, in order to improve the transmission efficiency and reliability of the uplink channel, a repeat transmission mechanism can be used to transmit the uplink channel, that is, the network device can indicate the number of repetitions to the terminal device, so that the terminal device sends the uplink channel based on the repetition number For example, if the number of repetitions is U, the terminal device may send the uplink channel U times, where U is an integer greater than or equal to 2.

另外,也可以采用非重复传输机制进行上行信道的传输,此情况下,终端设备对上行信道仅发送1次。In addition, the non-repeating transmission mechanism can also be used to transmit the uplink channel. In this case, the terminal device sends the uplink channel only once.

在本申请中,通信系统可以为DRX模式配置独立的重复次数集合(为了便于理解,记作重复次数集合#1),其中,该重复次数集合#1包括至少一个重复次数。In this application, the communication system may configure an independent set of repetition times for the DRX mode (for ease of understanding, it is referred to as the set of repetition times # 1), where the set of repetition times # 1 includes at least one number of repetitions.

该重复次数是指终端设备重复发送上行信道的次数。The number of repetitions refers to the number of times the terminal device repeatedly transmits the uplink channel.

作为示例而非限定,该重复次数集合#1可以为{1,2,4,8}。By way of example and not limitation, the repetition set # 1 may be {1, 2, 4, 8}.

并且,该重复次数集合#1的重复次数是终端设备在处于DRX模式下的期间内使用的重复次数。In addition, the number of repetitions of the repetition number set # 1 is the number of repetitions used by the terminal device during a period in the DRX mode.

其中,重复次数集合#1仅用于DRX模式,即,网络设备和终端设备仅在DRX模式下,使用重复次数集合#1。网络设备和终端设备在非DRX模式下,不使用重复次数集合#1。即,重复次数集合#1的使用可以DRX模式的限制,或者说,在使用重复次数集合#1之前需要确定当前处于DRX模式。The repetition number set # 1 is only used in the DRX mode, that is, the network device and the terminal device use the repetition number set # 1 only in the DRX mode. Network equipment and terminal equipment do not use repetition set # 1 in non-DRX mode. That is, the use of the repetition number set # 1 can be limited by the DRX mode, or in other words, it is necessary to determine that the DRX mode is currently used before using the repetition number set # 1.

并且,在本申请中,通信系统还可以配置重复次数集合#2,该重复次数集合#2可以在非DRX模式下使用(例如,用于传输上行信道),并且,该重复次数集合#2也可以在DRX模式下使用。其中,该重复次数集合#2包括至少一个重复次数。Moreover, in the present application, the communication system may further configure a repetition number set # 2, which can be used in a non-DRX mode (for example, for transmitting an uplink channel), and the repetition number set # 2 is also Can be used in DRX mode. Wherein, the repetition number set # 2 includes at least one repetition number.

其中,该重复次数集合#2可以是专用于非DRX模式的重复次数集合。The repetition number set # 2 may be a repetition number set dedicated to the non-DRX mode.

或者,该重复次数集合#2也可以是用于非DRX模式和DRX模式双方的重复次数集合。即,重复次数集合#2的使用可以不受非DRX模式和DRX模式的限制,或者说,在使用重复次数集合#2之前无需关注当前处于于非DRX模式还是DRX模式。Alternatively, the repetition number set # 2 may be a repetition number set for both the non-DRX mode and the DRX mode. That is, the use of the repetition number set # 2 may not be restricted by the non-DRX mode and the DRX mode, or it is unnecessary to pay attention to whether the non-DRX mode or the DRX mode is currently used before using the repetition number set # 2.

可选地,设该重复次数集合#2中最大的重复次数为重复次数#b,设该重复次数集合#1中最大的重复次数为重复次数#a,则在本申请中,该重复次数#a大于或等于该重复次数#b。Optionally, the maximum number of repetitions in the set of repetition times set # 2 is the number of repetitions #b, and the maximum number of repetitions in the set of repetition times set # 1 is the number of repetitions #a. In this application, the number of repetitions # a is greater than or equal to the number of repetitions #b.

可选地,在本申请中,在非DRX模式下也可以采用非重复传输机制进行上行信道的传输。Optionally, in the present application, in a non-DRX mode, a non-repeated transmission mechanism may also be used for transmission of the uplink channel.

在310,网络设备#B可以从重复次数集合#1中为终端设备#B确定一个目标重复次数。At 310, the network device #B may determine a target repetition number for the terminal device #B from the repetition number set # 1.

例如,网络设备#B可以基于终端设备#B所访问的业务的业务类型或重要程度,确定该目标重复次数。For example, the network device #B may determine the target repetition number based on the service type or importance of the service accessed by the terminal device #B.

具体地说,例如,如果终端设备#B所访问的业务较为紧急,则网络设备#B可以将重复次数集合#1中较大的重复次数确定为目标重复次数。Specifically, for example, if the service accessed by the terminal device #B is more urgent, the network device #B may determine the larger number of repetitions in the repetition number set # 1 as the target number of repetitions.

再例如,如果终端设备#B所访问的业务对于传输时延的要求较高(例如,为URLLC 业务),则网络设备#B可以将重复次数集合#1中较小的重复次数确定为目标重复次数。As another example, if the service accessed by the terminal device #B has a high requirement on the transmission delay (for example, a URLLC service), the network device #B may determine the smaller repetition number in the repetition number set # 1 as the target repetition. frequency.

在S320,网络设备#B可以将该目标重复次数的指示信息发送给终端设备#B。In S320, the network device #B may send the indication information of the target repetition number to the terminal device #B.

作为示例而非限定,重复次数集合#1中的每个重复次数可以唯一地对应一个索引值,该目标重复次数的指示信息可以是该目标重复次数对应的索引值。By way of example and not limitation, each repetition number in the repetition number set # 1 may uniquely correspond to an index value, and the indication information of the target repetition number may be an index value corresponding to the target repetition number.

在S330,终端设备#B可以在处于DRX模式下的期间内,基于该目标重复次数,发送上行信道。In S330, the terminal device #B may transmit an uplink channel based on the target repetition number while it is in the DRX mode.

在DRX模式下,可能因终端设备发生移动等而导致终端设备使用的波束发生变化的情况,此情况下,终端设备因无法获得波束的相关信息而无法可靠地完成上行信道的发送。In the DRX mode, the beam used by the terminal device may be changed due to the movement of the terminal device. In this case, the terminal device cannot reliably complete the transmission of the uplink channel because it cannot obtain information about the beam.

针对上述情况,根据本申请的发送上行信道的方法,通过为终端设备独立设置在DRX模式下使用的重复次数集合,能够使DRX模式下的重复传输不受限于非DRX模式,从而,能够在DRX模式下使用较大的重复次数,以提高上行信道的传输成功的可能性,并且,能够在非DRX模式下,避免因过多的重复传输而造成资源浪费。In view of the foregoing, according to the method for sending an uplink channel of the present application, by setting independently a set of repetition times used by the terminal device in the DRX mode, the repeated transmission in the DRX mode is not limited to the non-DRX mode, and thus can be used in In DRX mode, a large number of repetitions is used to increase the probability of successful transmission of the uplink channel. In addition, in non-DRX mode, it can avoid wasting resources due to excessive repeated transmissions.

可选地,网络设备#B还可以发送上行波束的信息,该上行波束的信息可以用于指示上行波束的相关参数。Optionally, the network device #B may further send information of the uplink beam, and the information of the uplink beam may be used to indicate related parameters of the uplink beam.

例如,该上行波束的相关参数可以包括空间滤波器(spatial filter)或空间参数(spatial parameters)。For example, the relevant parameters of the uplink beam may include spatial filters or spatial parameters.

空间滤波器可以为以下至少之一:预编码,天线端口的权值,天线端口的相位偏转,天线端口的幅度增益。The spatial filter may be at least one of the following: precoding, the weight of the antenna port, the phase deflection of the antenna port, and the amplitude gain of the antenna port.

再例如,该上行波束的相关参数可以包括参考信号的配置参数,例如用于下行信道测量的信道状态信息参考信号的配置信息。For another example, the related parameters of the uplink beam may include configuration parameters of a reference signal, such as configuration information of a channel state information reference signal used for downlink channel measurement.

终端设备#B在接收到该上行波束的信息后,能够基于该上行波束的信息确定上行信道传输所需要的上行波束信息,从而能够提高发送上行信道的性能。After receiving the information of the uplink beam, the terminal device #B can determine the uplink beam information required for uplink channel transmission based on the information of the uplink beam, thereby improving the performance of transmitting the uplink channel.

此情况下,如果终端设备#B仍然使用上述重复传输次数,可能造成资源浪费。In this case, if the terminal device #B still uses the above repeated transmission times, it may cause waste of resources.

对此在本申请实施例中可以采用以下处理过程。In this regard, the following processing procedures may be adopted in the embodiments of the present application.

在DRX模式下,如果终端设备#B未接收到上行波束的信息,或者说,终端设备#B未能基于上行波束信息确定可以使用的用于发送上行信道的波束,则终端设备#B可以基于网络设备#B指示的目标重复次数,发送上行信道。In the DRX mode, if the terminal device #B does not receive the information of the uplink beam, or the terminal device #B fails to determine the available beam for transmitting the uplink channel based on the uplink beam information, the terminal device #B may be based on The number of target repetitions indicated by the network device #B sends the uplink channel.

在DRX模式下,如果终端设备#B接收到上行波束的信息,或者说,终端设备#B能够基于上行波束信息确定可以使用的用于发送上行信道的波束,则终端设备#B可以基于重复次数集合#2中规定的重复次数(例如,可以由网络设备#B指示),发送上行信道。In the DRX mode, if the terminal device #B receives the information of the uplink beam, or the terminal device #B can determine the available beam for transmitting the uplink channel based on the uplink beam information, the terminal device #B may be based on the number of repetitions. The number of repetitions specified in the set # 2 (for example, may be indicated by the network device #B), and the uplink channel is transmitted.

或者,在DRX模式下,如果终端设备#B接收到上行波束的信息,或者说,终端设备#B能够基于上行波束信息确定可以使用的用于发送上行信道的波束,则终端设备#B可以采用非重复发送机制,发送上行信道。Or, in the DRX mode, if the terminal device #B receives the information of the uplink beam, or the terminal device #B can determine the available beam for transmitting the uplink channel based on the uplink beam information, the terminal device #B may adopt Non-repeating sending mechanism, sending uplink channel.

另外,在本申请中,终端设备#B在接收到上行波束的信息之后,可以向网络设备#B发送确认信息。In addition, in this application, after receiving the information of the uplink beam, the terminal device #B may send confirmation information to the network device #B.

从而,在DRX模式下,如果网络设备#B未接收到该确认信息,则网络设备#B可以认为终端设备#B未能基于上行波束信息确定可以使用的用于发送上行信道的波束,则网络设备#B可以基于目标重复次数,接收上行信道。Therefore, in the DRX mode, if the network device #B does not receive the confirmation information, the network device #B may consider that the terminal device #B fails to determine an available beam for transmitting an uplink channel based on the uplink beam information, and the network Device #B can receive the uplink channel based on the target repetition number.

在DRX模式下,如果网络设备#B接收到该确认信息,则网络设备#B可以认为终端设备#B能够基于上行波束信息确定可以使用的用于发送上行信道的波束,则网络设备#B可以基于重复次数集合#2中规定的重复次数(例如,可以由网络设备#B指示),接收上行信道。In the DRX mode, if the network device #B receives the confirmation information, the network device #B can consider that the terminal device #B can determine the available beam for transmitting the uplink channel based on the uplink beam information, and the network device #B can The uplink channel is received based on the number of repetitions specified in the repetition number set # 2 (for example, it may be indicated by the network device #B).

或者,在DRX模式下,如果网络设备#B接收到该确认信息,则网络设备#B可以认为终端设备#B能够基于上行波束信息确定可以使用的用于发送上行信道的波束,则网络设备#B可以采用非重复发送机制,接收上行信道。Or, in the DRX mode, if the network device #B receives the confirmation information, the network device #B can consider that the terminal device #B can determine the beams that can be used to send the uplink channel based on the uplink beam information, and the network device # B can use a non-repeating transmission mechanism to receive the uplink channel.

需要说明的是,在终端设备能够基于下行波束的信息确定上行波束的情况下,网络设备也可以使用该下行波束的信息作为上述上行波束的信息。It should be noted that, when the terminal device can determine the uplink beam based on the information of the downlink beam, the network device may also use the information of the downlink beam as the information of the uplink beam.

图8示出了基于本申请的方案确定的上行信道的配置的一例。FIG. 8 shows an example of an uplink channel configuration determined based on the scheme of the present application.

如图8所示,在时段#1,终端设备#B处于DRX模式,并且,未能获得上行波束的信息,此情况下,终端设备#B可以基于重复次数#A,发送上行信道。其中,该重复次数#A是上述重复次数集合#1中由网络设备指示的重复次数,作为示例而非限定,在图8所示配置中,该重复次数#A可以为4。As shown in FIG. 8, during the period # 1, the terminal device #B is in the DRX mode, and the information of the uplink beam cannot be obtained. In this case, the terminal device #B may send an uplink channel based on the number of repetitions #A. The number of repetitions #A is the number of repetitions indicated by the network device in the above-mentioned number of repetitions set # 1. As an example and not limitation, the number of repetitions #A may be 4 in the configuration shown in FIG. 8.

在时段#2,终端设备#B处于DRX模式,并且,获得了上行波束的信息,此情况下,终端设备#B可以基于重复次数#B,发送上行信道。其中,该重复次数#B是上述重复次数集合#2中由网络设备指示的重复次数,作为示例而非限定,在图8所示配置中,该重复次数#B可以为2。In the period # 2, the terminal device #B is in the DRX mode and the information of the uplink beam is obtained. In this case, the terminal device #B may send an uplink channel based on the repetition number #B. The number of repetitions #B is the number of repetitions indicated by the network device in the above-mentioned number of repetitions set # 2. As an example and not limitation, in the configuration shown in FIG. 8, the number of repetitions #B may be two.

图9示出了网络设备#C(即,网络设备的一例)与终端设备#C(即,终端设备的一例)之间传输上行信道的方法400。FIG. 9 shows a method 400 for transmitting an uplink channel between a network device #C (that is, an example of a network device) and a terminal device #C (that is, an example of a terminal device).

其中,该上行信道可以用于承载例如波束恢复请求信息或信道质量信息等基于下行参考信号获得的测量结果或检测结果。即,该方法400可以用于例如基于上述下行参考信号#A确定的信道质量信息等的传输过程。此情况下,该网络设备#C与网络设备#B可以是同一设备,该终端设备#C与终端设备#B可以是同一终端设备。The uplink channel may be used to carry measurement results or detection results obtained based on a downlink reference signal, such as beam recovery request information or channel quality information. That is, the method 400 may be used in a transmission process of channel quality information and the like determined based on the above-mentioned downlink reference signal #A, for example. In this case, the network device #C and the network device #B may be the same device, and the terminal device #C and the terminal device #B may be the same terminal device.

此外,该上行信道也可以用于传输上行参考信号,例如,用于上行信道测量的SRS。In addition, the uplink channel can also be used to transmit an uplink reference signal, for example, an SRS used for uplink channel measurement.

在S410,网络设备#C可以为终端设备#C配置DRX模式的相关参数。In S410, the network device #C may configure related parameters of the DRX mode for the terminal device #C.

例如,网络设备#C可以确定终端设备#C的DRX模式的drx-cycle参数,即,网络设备#C可以确定终端设备#C的DRX周期,为了便于理解,将该周期记作:周期#1。For example, the network device #C may determine the drx-cycle parameter of the DRX mode of the terminal device #C, that is, the network device #C may determine the DRX cycle of the terminal device #C. For ease of understanding, this period is referred to as: cycle # 1 .

再例如,网络设备#C可以确定终端设备#C的DRX模式的drx start offset参数,即,网络设备#C可以确定终端设备#C的DRX周期的起始时间单元对应的偏移量,或者说,网络设备#C可以确定终端设备#C的唤醒时段的起始时间单元对应的偏移量。以下,为了便于理解,将该偏移量记作:偏移量#1。For another example, the network device #C can determine the drx start offset parameter of the DRX mode of the terminal device #C, that is, the network device #C can determine the offset corresponding to the start time unit of the DRX cycle of the terminal device #C, or , The network device #C may determine an offset corresponding to a start time unit of the wake-up period of the terminal device #C. Hereinafter, for ease of understanding, this offset is referred to as: offset # 1.

其后,网络设备#C可以确定Y个上行信道(例如,上行参考信号)的相关参数。其中,该Y个上行信道可以与网络设备#C所使用的Y个波束一一对应,Y为大于或等于2的整数。Thereafter, the network device #C may determine relevant parameters of the Y uplink channels (for example, uplink reference signals). The Y uplink channels may correspond to the Y beams used by the network device #C one by one, and Y is an integer greater than or equal to 2.

在本申请中,该Y个上行信道中的至少一个上行信道的相关参数与终端设备#C的DRX模式的相关参数具有相关性。In this application, the related parameters of at least one of the Y uplink channels are related to the related parameters of the DRX mode of terminal device #C.

为了便于理解,以该至少一个上行信道中的上行信道#1为例,对该至少一个上行信道的相关参数的确定过程进行详细说明。In order to facilitate understanding, the determination process of the related parameters of the at least one uplink channel is described in detail by using the uplink channel # 1 in the at least one uplink channel as an example.

作为示例而非限定,例如,在本申请中,该上行信道#1的相关参数可以包括上行信道#1的周期的。为了便于理解,将该周期记作:周期#2。By way of example and not limitation, for example, in this application, related parameters of the uplink channel # 1 may include a period of the uplink channel # 1. For ease of understanding, this cycle is referred to as: Cycle # 2.

此情况下,网络设备#C可以基于上述周期#1确定周期#2以使该周期#1和周期#2之间的关系满足以下至少一种条件。In this case, the network device #C may determine the period # 2 based on the above period # 1 so that the relationship between the period # 1 and the period # 2 satisfies at least one of the following conditions.

条件ACondition A

周期#2是周期#1的整数倍。Cycle # 2 is an integer multiple of cycle # 1.

即,CSI-report-cycle-in-DRX=P×DRX-cycle,其中,P为正整数。That is, CSI-report-cycle-in-DRX = P × DRX-cycle, where P is a positive integer.

其中,CSI-report-cycle-in-DRX表示周期#2,即,上行信道#1的发送周期。DRX-cycle表示周期#1,即,终端设备#C的DRX周期。Among them, CSI-report-cycle-in-DRX represents cycle # 2, that is, the transmission cycle of uplink channel # 1. DRX-cycle represents cycle # 1, that is, the DRX cycle of terminal device #C.

从而,能够上行信道#1的每个发送周期均落入终端设备#C的DRX周期内。Therefore, each transmission period of the uplink channel # 1 can fall within the DRX cycle of the terminal device #C.

条件BCondition B

周期#1是周期#2的整数倍。Cycle # 1 is an integer multiple of cycle # 2.

即,DRX-cycle=Q×CSI-report-cycle-in-DRX,其中,Q为正整数。That is, DRX-cycle = Q × CSI-report-cycle-in-DRX, where Q is a positive integer.

从而,能够使终端设备#C的每个DRX周期内均存在至少一个上行信道#1的发送周期。Therefore, at least one transmission period of the uplink channel # 1 can exist in each DRX period of the terminal device #C.

需要说明的是,在本申请中,该周期#1和周期#2的单位(或者说,粒度)可以相同,并且,该周期#1和周期#2的单位可以是时间单元(例如,子帧或时隙)。It should be noted that, in the present application, the units (or granularity) of the cycle # 1 and the cycle # 2 may be the same, and the units of the cycle # 1 and the cycle # 2 may be time units (for example, a subframe Or time slot).

再例如,在本申请中,该上行信道#1的相关参数可以包括上行信道#1的偏移量(或者说,时域位置偏移量)。为了便于理解,将该偏移量记作:偏移量#2。As another example, in the present application, the related parameters of the uplink channel # 1 may include an offset (or a time domain position offset) of the uplink channel # 1. For ease of understanding, this offset is written as: offset # 2.

此情况下,网络设备#C可以基于上述偏移量#1确定偏移量#2以使该偏移量#1和偏移量#2之间的关系满足以下条件。In this case, the network device #C may determine the offset # 2 based on the above-mentioned offset # 1 so that the relationship between the offset # 1 and the offset # 2 satisfies the following conditions.

条件CCondition C

偏移量#2大于或等于偏移量#1。The offset # 2 is greater than or equal to the offset # 1.

或者说,基于偏移量#2确定的起始时刻不早于基于偏移量#1确定的起始时刻。In other words, the start time determined based on the offset # 2 is not earlier than the start time determined based on the offset # 1.

这里偏移量#1可以表示为drx-StartOffset或drx-SlotOffset,Here offset # 1 can be expressed as drx-StartOffset or drx-SlotOffset,

即,CSI-report-offset-in-DRX=drx-StartOffset+n,或,CSI-report-offset-in-DRX=drx-SlotOffset+n,其中,n为正数。That is, CSI-report-offset-in-DRX = drx-StartOffset + n, or CSI-report-offset-in-DRX = drx-SlotOffset + n, where n is a positive number.

其中,CSI-report-offset-in-DRX表示偏移量#2,即,上行信道#1的发送时段的偏移量。DRX-cycle表示周期#2,即,终端设备#C的DRX周期的偏移量。Among them, CSI-report-offset-in-DRX represents an offset # 2, that is, an offset of a transmission period of the uplink channel # 1. DRX-cycle represents a period # 2, that is, an offset of a DRX cycle of the terminal device #C.

作为示例而非限定,该n的单位(或者说,粒度)与偏移量#2(或偏移量#1)的单位可以相同,例如,可以为子帧。By way of example and not limitation, the unit (or granularity) of n may be the same as the unit of offset # 2 (or offset # 1), for example, it may be a subframe.

或者,该n的单位(或者说,粒度)与偏移量#2(或偏移量#1)的单位可以相异,例如,偏移量#2(或偏移量#1)的单位可以为子帧,n的单位可以为时隙或符号等。Alternatively, the unit (or granularity) of n may be different from the unit of offset # 2 (or offset # 1), for example, the unit of offset # 2 (or offset # 1) may be different Is a subframe, and the unit of n may be a time slot or a symbol.

可选地,该n对应的时长可以小于终端设备#C的DRX周期中的唤醒(on-duration)时段的时长。Optionally, the duration corresponding to n may be shorter than the duration of an on-duration period in the DRX cycle of terminal device #C.

或者说,偏移量#2与偏移量#1的差值可以小于终端设备#C的DRX周期中的唤醒时段的时长。In other words, the difference between the offset # 2 and the offset # 1 may be smaller than the duration of the wake-up period in the DRX cycle of the terminal device #C.

从而,能够可靠地使上行信道#1的发送时段落入终端设备#C的DRX周期中的唤醒时段中。Therefore, the transmission time of the uplink channel # 1 can be reliably included in the wake-up period in the DRX cycle of the terminal device #C.

图10示出了P(或Q)为1时,基于上述方法确定的上行信道#1的配置于终端设备#C的DRX的配置之间的关系的一例。即,在本申请中,该上行信道#1的周期可以与终端设备#C的DRX的周期相同,并且,偏移量#2与偏移量#1满足上述条件3,从而,能够使上行信道#1的每个发送周期均对应一个DRX周期,并且,能够使该上行信道#1的发送时段落入DRX周期的唤醒时段内,从而,能够确保终端设备#C在每次醒来时均能够接收到上行信道#1,或者说,能够确保网络设备#C发送的每个上行信道#1均被终端设备#C接收到。FIG. 10 shows an example of the relationship between the configuration of the uplink channel # 1 and the DRX configuration of the terminal device #C determined based on the above method when P (or Q) is 1. That is, in this application, the period of the uplink channel # 1 may be the same as the period of the DRX of the terminal device #C, and the offset # 2 and the offset # 1 satisfy the above condition 3, so that the uplink channel can be made. Each transmission cycle of # 1 corresponds to a DRX cycle, and the uplink channel # 1 can be sent into the wake-up period of the DRX cycle, thereby ensuring that the terminal device #C can wake up every time it wakes up. When the uplink channel # 1 is received, that is, it can be ensured that each uplink channel # 1 sent by the network device #C is received by the terminal device #C.

图11示出了P=2时,基于上述方法确定的上行信道#1的配置于终端设备#C的DRX的配置之间的关系的一例。即,在本申请中,周期#1与周期#2满足条件1,并且,偏移量#2与偏移量#1满足上述条件3,从而,能够确保网络设备#C发送的每个上行信道#1均被终端设备#C接收到。FIG. 11 shows an example of the relationship between the configuration of the uplink channel # 1 determined by the above method and the DRX configuration of the terminal device #C when P = 2. That is, in the present application, the cycle # 1 and the cycle # 2 satisfy the condition 1, and the offset # 2 and the offset # 1 satisfy the above condition 3, so that each uplink channel transmitted by the network device #C can be ensured # 1 is received by terminal device #C.

图12示出了Q=2时,基于上述方法确定的上行信道#1的配置于终端设备#C的DRX的配置之间的关系的一例。即,在本申请中,周期#1与周期#2满足条件2,并且,偏移量#2与偏移量#1满足上述条件3,从而,能够确保终端设备#C在每次醒来时均能够接收到上行信道#1。FIG. 12 shows an example of the relationship between the configuration of the uplink channel # 1 determined by the above method and the DRX configuration of the terminal device #C when Q = 2. That is, in the present application, the cycle # 1 and the cycle # 2 satisfy the condition 2 and the offset # 2 and the offset # 1 satisfy the above condition 3, so that the terminal device #C can be ensured every time when it wakes up Both can receive uplink channel # 1.

应理解,以上列举的网络设备#C在S410中执行的动作仅为示例性说明,本申请并未限定于此,例如,网络设备#C也可以首先确定上行信道#1的相关参数,并基于该上行信道#1的相关参数确定终端设备#C的DRX周期的相关参数,只要能够确保周期#1与周期#2的关系满足条件#1或条件#2,和/或能够确保偏移量#1与偏移量#2的关系满足条件#3即可。It should be understood that the actions listed above by the network device #C in S410 are only illustrative, and this application is not limited thereto. For example, the network device #C may first determine the relevant parameters of the uplink channel # 1, and based on The related parameters of the uplink channel # 1 determine the related parameters of the DRX cycle of the terminal device #C, as long as the relationship between the cycle # 1 and the cycle # 2 can satisfy the condition # 1 or the condition # 2, and / or the offset # can be ensured. The relationship between 1 and the offset # 2 may satisfy the condition # 3.

另外,上述多个参考信号中还可以存在一个或多个与DRX的配置无关的参考信号,即,该部分参考信号的配置参数可以基于现有技术确定。In addition, one or more reference signals that are not related to the configuration of the DRX may also exist in the multiple reference signals, that is, the configuration parameters of the partial reference signals may be determined based on the existing technology.

即,在本申请中,网络设备#C使用的部分参考信号的周期可以与DRX的周期无关,或者,网络设备#C使用的部分参考信号的偏移量可以与DRX的偏移量无关,即,该部分参考信号的发送时段可以不落入DRX的唤醒时段内。并且,网络设备#C使用的另一部分参考信号(例如,上行信道#1)的相关参数可以基于上述方式确定从而与DRX的配置具有相关性。That is, in the present application, the period of the partial reference signal used by the network device #C may be independent of the period of the DRX, or the offset of the partial reference signal used by the network device #C may be independent of the offset of the DRX, that is, The sending period of this part of the reference signal may not fall within the wake-up period of the DRX. In addition, related parameters of another part of the reference signal (for example, the uplink channel # 1) used by the network device #C may be determined based on the foregoing manner so as to have correlation with the configuration of the DRX.

在S420,网络设备#C可以将上行信道#1的相关参数发送给终端设备#C。In S420, the network device #C may send the related parameters of the uplink channel # 1 to the terminal device #C.

在S430,网络设备#C可以基于上行信道#1的相关参数接收上行信道#1,终端设备#C可以基于DRX的配置参数进入DRX模式,并基于上行信道#1的相关参数发送上行信道#1。In S430, the network device #C can receive the uplink channel # 1 based on the relevant parameters of the uplink channel # 1, and the terminal device #C can enter the DRX mode based on the DRX configuration parameters and send the uplink channel # 1 based on the relevant parameters of the uplink channel # 1. .

根据本申请的方案,通过将上行信道(例如,上行参考信号或信道质量信息上报)的配置参数与DRX模式的配置参数相关联,能够提高终端设备在唤醒期间完成波束训练和信道质量测量的可能性,即,能够提高终端设备在唤醒期间获得可使用的波束的信息的可能性,从而能够提高通信的可靠性,能够改善用户体验。According to the solution of this application, by associating the configuration parameters of the uplink channel (for example, the uplink reference signal or the channel quality information report) with the configuration parameters of the DRX mode, the possibility of the terminal device completing beam training and channel quality measurement during wake-up can be improved That is, it is possible to increase the possibility that the terminal device obtains information of the usable beams during the wake-up period, thereby improving the reliability of communication and improving the user experience.

根据前述方法,图13为本申请实施例提供的通信装置10的示意图,如图13所示,该装置10可以为终端设备,也可以为芯片或电路,比如可设置于终端设备的芯片或电路。According to the foregoing method, FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of a communication device 10 according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 13, the device 10 may be a terminal device, or a chip or a circuit, such as a chip or a circuit that may be provided in the terminal device. .

该波束检测的装置10可以包括处理单元11(即,处理单元的一例)和存储单元12。该存储单元12用于存储指令,该处理单元11用于执行该存储单元12存储的指令,以使 该波束检测的装置10实现如上述方法中终端设备(例如,上述终端设备#A、上述终端设备#B或上述终端设备#C)执行的步骤。The apparatus 10 for detecting a beam may include a processing unit 11 (that is, an example of a processing unit) and a storage unit 12. The storage unit 12 is configured to store instructions, and the processing unit 11 is configured to execute the instructions stored by the storage unit 12 so that the apparatus 10 for beam detection implements a terminal device (for example, the above-mentioned terminal device #A, the above-mentioned terminal) in the foregoing method. Steps performed by device #B or the above-mentioned terminal device #C).

进一步的,该装置10还可以包括输入口13(即,通信单元的一例)和输出口14(即,通信单元的另一例)。进一步的,该处理单元11、存储单元12、输入口13和输出口14可以通过内部连接通路互相通信,传递控制和/或数据信号。该存储单元12用于存储计算机程序,该处理单元11可以用于从该存储单元12中调用并运行该计算计程序,以控制输入口13接收信号,控制输出口14发送信号,完成上述方法中终端设备的步骤。该存储单元12可以集成在处理单元11中,也可以与处理单元11分开设置。Further, the device 10 may further include an input port 13 (that is, an example of a communication unit) and an output port 14 (that is, another example of a communication unit). Further, the processing unit 11, the storage unit 12, the input port 13 and the output port 14 can communicate with each other through an internal connection path to transfer control and / or data signals. The storage unit 12 is used to store a computer program, and the processing unit 11 may be used to call and run the computer program from the storage unit 12 to control the input port 13 to receive signals and control the output port 14 to send signals to complete the above method. Steps for the terminal device. The storage unit 12 may be integrated in the processing unit 11, or may be provided separately from the processing unit 11.

可选地,若该波束检测的装置10为终端设备,该输入口13为接收器,该输出口14为发送器。其中,接收器和发送器可以为相同或者不同的物理实体。为相同的物理实体时,可以统称为收发器。Optionally, if the apparatus 10 for beam detection is a terminal device, the input port 13 is a receiver, and the output port 14 is a transmitter. The receiver and the transmitter may be the same or different physical entities. When they are the same physical entity, they can be collectively referred to as transceivers.

可选地,若该波束检测的装置10为芯片或电路,该输入口13为输入接口,该输出口14为输出接口。Optionally, if the device 10 for detecting the beam is a chip or a circuit, the input port 13 is an input interface, and the output port 14 is an output interface.

作为一种实现方式,输入口13和输出口14的功能可以考虑通过收发电路或者收发的专用芯片实现。处理单元11可以考虑通过专用处理芯片、处理电路、处理单元或者通用芯片实现。As an implementation manner, the functions of the input port 13 and the output port 14 may be considered to be implemented through a transceiver circuit or a dedicated chip for transceiver. The processing unit 11 may be implemented by a dedicated processing chip, a processing circuit, a processing unit, or a general-purpose chip.

作为另一种实现方式,可以考虑使用通用计算机的方式来实现本申请实施例提供的终端设备。即将实现处理单元11、输入口13和输出口14功能的程序代码存储在存储单元12中,通用处理单元通过执行存储单元12中的代码来实现处理单元11、输入口13和输出口14的功能。As another implementation manner, a manner of using a general-purpose computer may be considered to implement the terminal device provided in the embodiment of the present application. The program code that is to implement the functions of the processing unit 11, the input port 13, and the output port 14 is stored in the storage unit 12. The general processing unit implements the functions of the processing unit 11, input port 13, and output port 14 by executing the codes in the storage unit 12. .

在一种实现方式中,输入口13用于从网络设备接收配置信息,该配置信息用于指示参考信号的配置参数,其中,该参考信号的配置参数是根据该终端设备的非连续接收DRX模式的配置参数确定的,或者,该DRX模式的配置参数是根据该参考信号的配置参数确定的;输入口13可以在处理单元11根据该参考信号的配置参数的控制下,从该网络设备接收参考信号。In an implementation manner, the input port 13 is configured to receive configuration information from a network device, and the configuration information is used to indicate a configuration parameter of a reference signal, wherein the configuration parameter of the reference signal is based on a discontinuous reception DRX mode of the terminal device. Or the configuration parameters of the DRX mode are determined according to the configuration parameters of the reference signal; the input port 13 may receive a reference from the network device under the control of the processing unit 11 according to the configuration parameters of the reference signal signal.

可选地,该参考信号的配置参数包括该参考信号的发送周期T1,该DRX模式的配置参数包括DRX的周期T2,其中,Optionally, the configuration parameter of the reference signal includes a transmission period T1 of the reference signal, and the configuration parameter of the DRX mode includes a period T2 of DRX, where:

T1=P×T2,其中,P为正整数,或者T1 = P × T2, where P is a positive integer, or

T2=Q×T1,其中,Q为正整数。T2 = Q × T1, where Q is a positive integer.

可选地,该参考信号的配置参数包括该参考信号的时域位置偏移量S1,该DRX模式的配置参数包括该DRX模式的唤醒时段的时域位置偏移量S2,其中,S1大于或等于S2。Optionally, the configuration parameter of the reference signal includes a time domain position offset S1 of the reference signal, and the configuration parameter of the DRX mode includes a time domain position offset S2 of a wake-up period of the DRX mode, where S1 is greater than or Equal to S2.

可选地,S1与S2的差值小于或等于该DRX模式的唤醒时段的长度。Optionally, the difference between S1 and S2 is less than or equal to the length of the wake-up period of the DRX mode.

在另一种实现方式中,输入口13用于从网络设备接收第一重复次数的指示信息,该第一重复次数属于第一重复次数集合,该第一重复次数集合包括至少一个重复次数,该第一重复次数集合专用于非连续接收DRX模式;输出口14可以在处理单元11的控制下在处于该DRX模式下的期间内,根据该第一重复次数发送上行信道。In another implementation manner, the input port 13 is configured to receive indication information of a first number of repetitions from a network device. The first number of repetitions belongs to a first number of repetitions set, and the first number of repetitions set includes at least one number of repetitions. The first set of repetition times is dedicated to the discontinuous reception DRX mode; the output port 14 may send an uplink channel under the control of the processing unit 11 in the period of the DRX mode according to the first repetition times.

可选地,该第一重复次数集合中最大的重复次数大于或等于第二重复次数集合中最大的重复次数,该第二重复次数集合包括至少一个重复次数,该第二重复次数集合用于非DRX模式;或者Optionally, the maximum number of repetitions in the first set of repetitions is greater than or equal to the maximum number of repetitions in the second set of repetitions, the second set of repetitions includes at least one number of repetitions, and the second set of repetitions is used for non- DRX mode; or

可选地,在非DRX模式下上行信道是采用非重复传输方式传输的。Optionally, in a non-DRX mode, the uplink channel is transmitted in a non-repeated transmission manner.

可选地,输出口14可以在处理单元11的控制下在处于该DRX模式下的期间内,在该输入口13接收到该上行信道的波束指示信息之前,根据该第一重复次数发送上行信道。Optionally, the output port 14 may send the uplink channel according to the first repetition number before the input port 13 receives the beam indication information of the uplink channel under the control of the processing unit 11 during the period in the DRX mode. .

可选地,输出口14可以在处理单元11的控制下该终端设备在处于该DRX模式下的期间内,在该输入口13接收到该上行信道的波束指示信息之后,向该网络设备发送确认信息,该确认信息用于指示该终端设备接收到该上行信道的波束指示信息;Optionally, the output port 14 may send a confirmation to the network device after the terminal device is in the DRX mode under the control of the processing unit 11 and after the input port 13 receives the beam indication information of the uplink channel. Information, the confirmation information is used to indicate that the terminal device receives beam indication information of the uplink channel;

其后,输出口14可以在处理单元11的控制下根据第二重复次数发送上行信道,该第二重复次数属于第二重复次数集合,该第二重复次数集合包括至少一个重复次数,该第二重复次数集合专用于非DRX模式;或Thereafter, the output port 14 may send an uplink channel according to a second repetition number under the control of the processing unit 11. The second repetition number belongs to a second repetition number set, and the second repetition number set includes at least one repetition number. The set of repetitions is dedicated to non-DRX mode; or

输出口14可以在处理单元11的控制下采用非重复传输方式发送上行信道。The output port 14 may send an uplink channel in a non-repeated transmission manner under the control of the processing unit 11.

在另一种实现方式中,输入口13用于从网络设备接收配置信息,该配置信息用于指示上行信道的配置参数,其中,该上行信道的配置参数是根据该终端设备的非连续接收DRX模式的配置参数确定的,或者,该DRX模式的配置参数是根据该上行信道的配置参数确定的;输出口14可以在处理单元11根据该上行信道的配置参数的控制下,向该网络设备发送上行信道。In another implementation manner, the input port 13 is used to receive configuration information from a network device, and the configuration information is used to indicate a configuration parameter of an uplink channel, where the configuration parameter of the uplink channel is based on discontinuous reception of DRX by the terminal device. The configuration parameters of the mode are determined, or the configuration parameters of the DRX mode are determined according to the configuration parameters of the uplink channel; the output port 14 may be sent to the network device under the control of the processing unit 11 according to the configuration parameters of the uplink channel. Upstream channel.

可选地,该上行信道的配置参数包括该上行信道的发送周期T1,该DRX模式的配置参数包括DRX的周期T2,其中,Optionally, the configuration parameter of the uplink channel includes a transmission period T1 of the uplink channel, and the configuration parameter of the DRX mode includes a period T2 of DRX, where:

T1=P×T2,其中,P为正整数,或者T1 = P × T2, where P is a positive integer, or

T2=Q×T1,其中,Q为正整数。T2 = Q × T1, where Q is a positive integer.

可选地,该上行信道的配置参数包括该上行信道的时域位置偏移量S1,该DRX模式的配置参数包括该DRX模式的唤醒时段的时域位置偏移量S2,其中,S1大于或等于S2。Optionally, the configuration parameter of the uplink channel includes a time domain position offset S1 of the uplink channel, and the configuration parameter of the DRX mode includes a time domain position offset S2 of a wake-up period of the DRX mode, where S1 is greater than or Equal to S2.

可选地,S1与S2的差值小于该DRX模式的唤醒时段的长度。Optionally, the difference between S1 and S2 is less than the length of the wake-up period of the DRX mode.

其中,以上列举的装置10中各模块或单元的功能和动作仅为示例性说明,装置10中各模块或单元可以用于执行上述方法中终端设备所执行的各动作或处理过程,这里,为了避免赘述,省略其详细说明。The functions and actions of each module or unit in the device 10 listed above are only exemplary descriptions, and each module or unit in the device 10 may be used to perform each action or process performed by the terminal device in the foregoing method. Here, in order to Avoid detailed descriptions and omit detailed descriptions.

该装置10所涉及的与本申请实施例提供的技术方案相关的概念,解释和详细说明及其他步骤请参见前述方法或其他实施例中关于这些内容的描述,此处不做赘述。For concepts, explanations and detailed descriptions and other steps related to the technical solution provided by the embodiments of the present application related to the device 10, please refer to the description of these contents in the foregoing method or other embodiments, and will not be repeated here.

图14为本申请提供的一种终端设备20的结构示意图。上述装置20可以配置在该终端设备20中,或者,该装置20本身可以即为该终端设备20。或者说,该终端设备20可以执行上述方法200、300或400中终端设备执行的动作。FIG. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device 20 provided in this application. The above device 20 may be configured in the terminal device 20, or the device 20 itself may be the terminal device 20. In other words, the terminal device 20 may perform the actions performed by the terminal device in the foregoing method 200, 300, or 400.

为了便于说明,图14仅示出了终端设备的主要部件。如图14所示,终端设备20包括处理器、存储器、控制电路、天线以及输入输出装置。For convenience of explanation, FIG. 14 shows only the main components of the terminal device. As shown in FIG. 14, the terminal device 20 includes a processor, a memory, a control circuit, an antenna, and an input / output device.

处理器主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理,以及对整个终端设备进行控制,执行软件程序,处理软件程序的数据,例如用于支持终端设备执行上述传输预编码矩阵的指示方法实施例中所描述的动作。存储器主要用于存储软件程序和数据,例如存储上述实施例中所描述的码本。控制电路主要用于基带信号与射频信号的转换以及对射频信号的处理。控制电路和天线一起也可以叫做收发器,主要用于收发电磁波形式的射频信号。输入输出装置,例如触摸屏、显示屏,键盘等主要用于接收用户输入的数据以及对用户输出数据。The processor is mainly used to process the communication protocol and communication data, and control the entire terminal device, execute a software program, and process the data of the software program. For example, the processor is used to support the terminal device to execute the foregoing method for transmitting a precoding matrix. The described action. The memory is mainly used to store software programs and data, such as the codebook described in the foregoing embodiment. The control circuit is mainly used for conversion of baseband signals and radio frequency signals and processing of radio frequency signals. The control circuit and the antenna together can also be called a transceiver, which is mainly used to send and receive radio frequency signals in the form of electromagnetic waves. Input / output devices, such as a touch screen, a display screen, and a keyboard, are mainly used to receive data input by the user and output data to the user.

当终端设备开机后,处理器可以读取存储单元中的软件程序,解释并执行软件程序的指令,处理软件程序的数据。当需要通过无线发送数据时,处理器对待发送的数据进行基带处理后,输出基带信号至射频电路,射频电路将基带信号进行射频处理后将射频信号通过天线以电磁波的形式向外发送。当有数据发送到终端设备时,射频电路通过天线接收到射频信号,将射频信号转换为基带信号,并将基带信号输出至处理器,处理器将基带信号转换为数据并对该数据进行处理。When the terminal device is turned on, the processor can read the software program in the storage unit, interpret and execute the instructions of the software program, and process the data of the software program. When the data needs to be sent wirelessly, the processor performs baseband processing on the data to be sent, and then outputs the baseband signal to the radio frequency circuit. After the radio frequency circuit processes the baseband signal, the radio frequency signal is sent out in the form of electromagnetic waves through the antenna. When data is sent to the terminal device, the RF circuit receives the RF signal through the antenna, converts the RF signal into a baseband signal, and outputs the baseband signal to the processor. The processor converts the baseband signal into data and processes the data.

本领域技术人员可以理解,为了便于说明,图14仅示出了一个存储器和处理器。在实际的终端设备中,可以存在多个处理器和存储器。存储器也可以称为存储介质或者存储设备等,本申请实施例对此不做限制。Those skilled in the art can understand that, for ease of description, FIG. 14 shows only one memory and a processor. In an actual terminal device, there may be multiple processors and memories. The memory may also be referred to as a storage medium or a storage device, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.

例如,处理器可以包括基带处理器和中央处理器,基带处理器主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理,中央处理器主要用于对整个终端设备进行控制,执行软件程序,处理软件程序的数据。图14中的处理器集成了基带处理器和中央处理器的功能,本领域技术人员可以理解,基带处理器和中央处理器也可以是各自独立的处理器,通过总线等技术互联。本领域技术人员可以理解,终端设备可以包括多个基带处理器以适应不同的网络制式,终端设备可以包括多个中央处理器以增强其处理能力,终端设备的各个部件可以通过各种总线连接。所述基带处理器也可以表述为基带处理电路或者基带处理芯片。所述中央处理器也可以表述为中央处理电路或者中央处理芯片。对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理的功能可以内置在处理器中,也可以以软件程序的形式存储在存储单元中,由处理器执行软件程序以实现基带处理功能。For example, the processor may include a baseband processor and a central processor. The baseband processor is mainly used to process communication protocols and communication data. The central processor is mainly used to control the entire terminal device, execute software programs, and process software programs. data. The processor in FIG. 14 integrates the functions of the baseband processor and the central processing unit. Those skilled in the art can understand that the baseband processor and the central processing unit may also be independent processors, which are interconnected through technologies such as a bus. Those skilled in the art can understand that the terminal device may include multiple baseband processors to adapt to different network standards, the terminal device may include multiple central processors to enhance its processing capabilities, and various components of the terminal device may be connected through various buses. The baseband processor may also be expressed as a baseband processing circuit or a baseband processing chip. The central processing unit may also be expressed as a central processing circuit or a central processing chip. The function of processing communication protocols and communication data may be built in the processor or stored in the storage unit in the form of a software program, and the processor executes the software program to implement the baseband processing function.

示例性的,在本申请实施例中,可以将具有收发功能的天线和控制电路视为终端设备20的收发单元201,将具有处理功能的处理器视为终端设备20的处理单元202。如图14所示,终端设备20包括收发单元201和处理单元202。收发单元也可以称为收发器、收发机、收发装置等。可选的,可以将收发单元201中用于实现接收功能的器件视为接收单元,将收发单元201中用于实现发送功能的器件视为发送单元,即收发单元201包括接收单元和发送单元。示例性的,接收单元也可以称为接收机、接收器、接收电路等,发送单元可以称为发射机、发射器或者发射电路等。Exemplarily, in the embodiment of the present application, the antenna and the control circuit having a transmitting and receiving function may be regarded as the transmitting and receiving unit 201 of the terminal device 20, and the processor having the processing function may be regarded as the processing unit 202 of the terminal device 20. As shown in FIG. 14, the terminal device 20 includes a transceiver unit 201 and a processing unit 202. The transceiver unit may also be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver, a transceiver device, and the like. Optionally, a device for implementing a receiving function in the transceiver unit 201 may be regarded as a receiving unit, and a device for implementing a transmitting function in the transceiver unit 201 may be regarded as a transmitting unit, that is, the transceiver unit 201 includes a receiving unit and a transmitting unit. Exemplarily, the receiving unit may also be called a receiver, a receiver, a receiving circuit, etc., and the sending unit may be called a transmitter, a transmitter, or a transmitting circuit.

根据前述方法,图15为本申请实施例提供的通信装置30的示意图,如图15所示,该装置30可以为网络设备(例如,网络设备#A、网络设备#B或网络设备#C),也可以为芯片或电路,如可设置于网络设备内的芯片或电路。According to the foregoing method, FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of a communication apparatus 30 according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 15, the apparatus 30 may be a network device (for example, network device #A, network device #B, or network device #C) It can also be a chip or circuit, such as a chip or circuit that can be set in a network device.

该装置30可以包括处理单元31和存储单元32。该存储单元32用于存储指令,该处理单元31用于执行该存储单元32存储的指令,以使该装置30实现前述方法中网络设备执行的步骤。The device 30 may include a processing unit 31 and a storage unit 32. The storage unit 32 is configured to store instructions, and the processing unit 31 is configured to execute the instructions stored by the storage unit 32 to enable the apparatus 30 to implement the steps performed by the network device in the foregoing method.

进一步的,该装置30还可以包括输入口33(即,通信单元的一例)和输出口33(即,处理单元的另一例)。Further, the device 30 may further include an input port 33 (that is, an example of a communication unit) and an output port 33 (that is, another example of a processing unit).

再进一步的,该处理单元31、存储单元32、输入口33和输出口34可以通过内部连接通路互相通信,传递控制和/或数据信号。Still further, the processing unit 31, the storage unit 32, the input port 33 and the output port 34 can communicate with each other through an internal connection path to transfer control and / or data signals.

另外,可以考虑使用通用计算机的方式来实现本申请实施例提供的网络设备。即将实现处理单元31、输入口33和输出口34功能的程序代码存储在存储单元中,通用处理单元通过执行存储单元中的代码来实现处理单元31、输入口33和输出口34的功能。In addition, it may be considered to use a general-purpose computer to implement the network device provided in the embodiment of the present application. The program code that is to implement the functions of the processing unit 31, the input port 33, and the output port 34 is stored in a storage unit, and the general-purpose processing unit implements the functions of the processing unit 31, input port 33, and output port 34 by executing the code in the storage unit.

该存储单元32用于存储计算机程序。The storage unit 32 is configured to store a computer program.

在一种实现方式中,该处理单元31可以用于从该存储单元32中调用并运行该计算计程序,以控制该输出口34向终端设备发送配置信息,该配置信息用于指示参考信号的配置参数,其中,该参考信号的配置参数是该网络设备根据该终端设备的非连续接收DRX模式的配置参数确定的,或者,该DRX模式的配置参数是该网络设备根据该参考信号的配置参数确定的;并根据该参考信号的配置参数,控制该输出口34向该终端设备发送参考信号。In an implementation manner, the processing unit 31 may be used to call and run the computing program from the storage unit 32 to control the output port 34 to send configuration information to the terminal device, where the configuration information is used to indicate the reference signal. A configuration parameter, wherein the configuration parameter of the reference signal is determined by the network device according to a configuration parameter of the discontinuous reception DRX mode of the terminal device, or the configuration parameter of the DRX mode is a configuration parameter of the network device according to the reference signal It is determined; and according to the configuration parameter of the reference signal, the output port 34 is controlled to send a reference signal to the terminal device.

可选地,该参考信号的配置参数包括该参考信号的发送周期T1,该DRX模式的配置参数包括DRX的周期T2,其中,Optionally, the configuration parameter of the reference signal includes a transmission period T1 of the reference signal, and the configuration parameter of the DRX mode includes a period T2 of DRX, where:

T1=P×T2,其中,P为正整数,或者T1 = P × T2, where P is a positive integer, or

T2=Q×T1,其中,Q为正整数。T2 = Q × T1, where Q is a positive integer.

可选地,该参考信号的配置参数包括该参考信号的时域位置偏移量S1,该DRX模式的配置参数包括该DRX模式的唤醒时段的时域位置偏移量S2,其中,S1大于或等于S2。Optionally, the configuration parameter of the reference signal includes a time domain position offset S1 of the reference signal, and the configuration parameter of the DRX mode includes a time domain position offset S2 of a wake-up period of the DRX mode, where S1 is greater than or Equal to S2.

可选地,S1与S2的差值小于或等于该DRX模式的唤醒时段的长度。Optionally, the difference between S1 and S2 is less than or equal to the length of the wake-up period of the DRX mode.

在另一种实现方式中,该处理单元31可以用于从该存储单元32中调用并运行该计算计程序,以控制该输出口34向终端设备发送第一重复次数的指示信息,该第一重复次数属于第一重复次数集合,该第一重复次数集合包括至少一个重复次数,该第一重复次数集合专用于非连续接收DRX模式;并在该终端设备在处于该DRX模式下的期间内,根据该第一重复次数控制该输入口33接收上行信道。In another implementation manner, the processing unit 31 may be configured to call and run the calculation program from the storage unit 32 to control the output port 34 to send the instruction information of the first repetition times to the terminal device. The number of repetitions belongs to a first number of repetitions set, the first number of repetitions set includes at least one number of repetitions, the first number of repetitions set is dedicated to a discontinuous reception DRX mode; and while the terminal device is in the DRX mode, The input port 33 is controlled to receive an uplink channel according to the first repetition number.

该第一重复次数集合中最大的重复次数大于或等于第二重复次数集合中最大的重复次数,该第二重复次数集合包括至少一个重复次数,该第二重复次数集合用于非DRX模式;或者The maximum number of repetitions in the first set of repetitions is greater than or equal to the maximum number of repetitions in the second set of repetitions, the second set of repetitions includes at least one number of repetitions, and the second set of repetitions is used in a non-DRX mode;

在非DRX模式下上行信道是采用非重复传输方式传输的。In non-DRX mode, the uplink channel is transmitted using non-repeated transmission.

可选地,该处理单元31还用于控制输出口34向该终端设备发送该上行信道的波束指示信息;并用于控制该输入口33在该终端设备处于该DRX模式下的期间内,在接收到该终端设备发送的确认信息之前,根据该第一重复次数接收上行信道,该确认信息用于指示该终端设备接收到该上行信道的波束指示信息。Optionally, the processing unit 31 is further configured to control the output port 34 to transmit the beam indication information of the uplink channel to the terminal device; and to control the input port 33 during the period when the terminal device is in the DRX mode, Before receiving the confirmation information sent by the terminal device, the uplink channel is received according to the first repetition number, and the confirmation information is used to indicate that the terminal device receives beam indication information of the uplink channel.

可选地,该处理单元31还用于控制输出口34向该终端设备发送该上行信道的波束指示信息;并用于控制该输入口33在该终端设备处于该DRX模式下的期间内,在接收到该终端设备发送的确认信息之后,根据第二重复次数接收上行信道,该第二重复次数属于第二重复次数集合,该第二重复次数集合包括至少一个重复次数,该第二重复次数集合用于非DRX模式,该确认信息用于指示该终端设备接收到该上行信道的波束指示信息。Optionally, the processing unit 31 is further configured to control the output port 34 to transmit the beam indication information of the uplink channel to the terminal device; and to control the input port 33 during the period when the terminal device is in the DRX mode, After receiving the confirmation information sent by the terminal device, the uplink channel is received according to a second number of repetitions. The second number of repetitions belongs to a second number of repetitions set. The second number of repetitions set includes at least one number of repetitions. In the non-DRX mode, the confirmation information is used to instruct the terminal device to receive beam indication information of the uplink channel.

可选地,该处理单元31还用于控制输出口34向该终端设备发送该上行信道的波束指示信息;并用于控制该输入口33在该终端设备处于该DRX模式下的期间内,在接收到该终端设备发送的确认信息之后,采用非重复传输方式接收上行信道,该确认信息用于指示该终端设备接收到该上行信道的波束指示信息。Optionally, the processing unit 31 is further configured to control the output port 34 to transmit the beam indication information of the uplink channel to the terminal device; and to control the input port 33 during the period when the terminal device is in the DRX mode, After receiving the confirmation information sent by the terminal device, the uplink channel is received in a non-repeated transmission manner, and the confirmation information is used to indicate that the terminal device receives beam indication information of the uplink channel.

在另一种实现方式中,该处理单元31可以用于从该存储单元32中调用并运行该计算计程序,以控制该输出口34向终端设备发送配置信息,该配置信息用于指示上行信道的配置参数,其中,该上行信道的配置参数是该网络设备根据该终端设备的非连续接收DRX 模式的配置参数确定的,或者,该DRX模式的配置参数是该网络设备根据该上行信道的配置参数确定的;并根据该上行信道的配置参数,控制该输入口33从该终端设备接收上行信道。In another implementation manner, the processing unit 31 may be configured to call and run the computing program from the storage unit 32 to control the output port 34 to send configuration information to the terminal device, where the configuration information is used to indicate an uplink channel. The configuration parameters of the uplink channel are determined by the network device according to the configuration parameters of the discontinuous reception DRX mode of the terminal device, or the configuration parameters of the DRX mode are the network device according to the configuration of the uplink channel The parameters are determined; and according to the configuration parameters of the uplink channel, the input port 33 is controlled to receive the uplink channel from the terminal device.

可选地,该上行信道的配置参数包括该上行信道的发送周期T1,该DRX模式的配置参数包括DRX的周期T2,其中,Optionally, the configuration parameter of the uplink channel includes a transmission period T1 of the uplink channel, and the configuration parameter of the DRX mode includes a period T2 of DRX, where:

T1=P×T2,其中,P为正整数,或者T1 = P × T2, where P is a positive integer, or

T2=Q×T1,其中,Q为正整数。T2 = Q × T1, where Q is a positive integer.

可选地,该上行信道的配置参数包括该上行信道的时域位置偏移量S1,该DRX模式的配置参数包括该DRX模式的唤醒时段的时域位置偏移量S2,其中,S1大于或等于S2。Optionally, the configuration parameter of the uplink channel includes a time domain position offset S1 of the uplink channel, and the configuration parameter of the DRX mode includes a time domain position offset S2 of a wake-up period of the DRX mode, where S1 is greater than or Equal to S2.

可选地,S1与S2的差值小于或等于该DRX模式的唤醒时段的长度。Optionally, the difference between S1 and S2 is less than or equal to the length of the wake-up period of the DRX mode.

其中,以上列举的装置30中各模块或单元的功能和动作仅为示例性说明,装置30中各模块或单元可以用于执行上述方法中网络设备(例如,网络设备#A、网络设备#B或网络设备#C)所执行的各动作或处理过程,这里,为了避免赘述,省略其详细说明。The functions and actions of the modules or units in the device 30 listed above are only exemplary descriptions, and the modules or units in the device 30 may be used to execute the network devices (for example, network device #A, network device #B) in the above method. Or each process or process performed by the network device #C). Here, in order to avoid redundant description, detailed descriptions are omitted.

该装置30所涉及的与本申请实施例提供的技术方案相关的概念,解释和详细说明及其他步骤请参见前述方法或其他实施例中关于这些内容的描述,此处不做赘述。For concepts, explanations, and detailed descriptions and other steps related to the technical solution provided by the embodiment of the present application related to the device 30, refer to the description of the content in the foregoing method or other embodiments, and will not be repeated here.

图16为本申请实施例提供的一种网络设备40的结构示意图,可以用于实现上述方法中的网络设备(例如,接入网设备#A或核心网设备#α)的功能。网络设备40包括一个或多个射频单元,如远端射频单元(remote radio unit,RRU)401和一个或多个基带单元(baseband unit,BBU)(也可称为数字单元,digital unit,DU)402。所述RRU 401可以称为收发单元、收发机、收发电路、或者收发器等等,其可以包括至少一个天线4011和射频单元4012。所述RRU 401部分主要用于射频信号的收发以及射频信号与基带信号的转换,例如用于向终端设备发送上述实施例中所述的信令消息。所述BBU 402部分主要用于进行基带处理,对基站进行控制等。所述RRU 401与BBU 402可以是物理上设置在一起,也可以物理上分离设置的,即分布式基站。FIG. 16 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device 40 according to an embodiment of the present application, which may be used to implement functions of a network device (for example, an access network device #A or a core network device # α) in the foregoing method. The network device 40 includes one or more radio frequency units, such as a remote radio unit (RRU) 401 and one or more baseband units (BBU) (also referred to as a digital unit, DU). 402. The RRU 401 may be referred to as a transceiver unit, a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver, etc., and may include at least one antenna 4011 and a radio frequency unit 4012. The RRU 401 part is mainly used for transmitting and receiving radio frequency signals and converting radio frequency signals and baseband signals, for example, for sending a signaling message described in the foregoing embodiment to a terminal device. The BBU 402 part is mainly used for baseband processing and controlling base stations. The RRU 401 and the BBU 402 may be physically located together or physically separated, that is, a distributed base station.

所述BBU 402为基站的控制中心,也可以称为处理单元,主要用于完成基带处理功能,如信道编码,复用,调制,扩频等等。例如该BBU(处理单元)402可以用于控制基站40执行上述方法实施例中关于网络设备的操作流程。The BBU 402 is a control center of a base station, and may also be referred to as a processing unit, which is mainly used to complete baseband processing functions, such as channel coding, multiplexing, modulation, spread spectrum, and so on. For example, the BBU (Processing Unit) 402 may be used to control the base station 40 to execute the operation procedure on the network device in the foregoing method embodiment.

在一个示例中,所述BBU 402可以由一个或多个单板构成,多个单板可以共同支持单一接入制式的无线接入网(如LTE系统,或5G系统),也可以分别支持不同接入制式的无线接入网。所述BBU 402还包括存储器4021和处理器4022。所述存储器4021用以存储必要的指令和数据。例如存储器4021存储上述实施例中的码本等。所述处理器4022用于控制基站进行必要的动作,例如用于控制基站执行上述方法实施例中关于网络设备的操作流程。所述存储器4021和处理器4022可以服务于一个或多个单板。也就是说,可以每个单板上单独设置存储器和处理器。也可以是多个单板共用相同的存储器和处理器。此外每个单板上还可以设置有必要的电路。In one example, the BBU 402 may be composed of one or more boards, and multiple boards may jointly support a single access system wireless access network (such as an LTE system or a 5G system), or may support different Access standard wireless access network. The BBU 402 further includes a memory 4021 and a processor 4022. The memory 4021 is used to store necessary instructions and data. For example, the memory 4021 stores the codebook and the like in the foregoing embodiment. The processor 4022 is configured to control the base station to perform necessary actions, for example, to control the base station to execute the operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment. The memory 4021 and the processor 4022 may serve one or more single boards. That is, the memory and processor can be set separately on each board. It is also possible that multiple boards share the same memory and processor. In addition, the necessary circuits can be set on each board.

在一种可能的实施方式中,随着片上系统(system-on-chip,SoC)技术的发展,可以将402部分和401部分的全部或者部分功能由SoC技术实现,例如由一颗基站功能芯片实现,该基站功能芯片集成了处理器、存储器、天线接口等器件,基站相关功能的程序存储在存储器中,由处理器执行程序以实现基站的相关功能。可选的,该基站功能芯片也能够 读取该芯片外部的存储器以实现基站的相关功能。In a possible implementation manner, with the development of system-on-chip (SoC) technology, all or part of the functions of part 402 and part 401 may be implemented by SoC technology, for example, a base station function chip To achieve, the base station function chip integrates a processor, a memory, an antenna interface and other devices. A program of the base station related functions is stored in the memory, and the processor executes the program to realize the base station related functions. Optionally, the base station function chip can also read the external memory of the chip to realize the related functions of the base station.

应理解,图16示例的网络设备的结构仅为一种可能的形态,而不应对本申请实施例构成任何限定。本申请并不排除未来可能出现的其他形态的基站结构的可能。It should be understood that the structure of the network device illustrated in FIG. 16 is only one possible form, and should not be construed as any limitation in the embodiments of the present application. This application does not exclude the possibility of other forms of base station structures that may appear in the future.

根据本申请实施例提供的方法,本申请实施例还提供一种通信系统,其包括前述的网络设备和一个或多于一个终端设备。According to the method provided in the embodiment of the present application, the embodiment of the present application further provides a communication system, which includes the foregoing network device and one or more terminal devices.

应理解,本申请实施例中,该处理器可以为中央处理单元(central processing unit,CPU),该处理器还可以是其他通用处理器、数字信号处理器(digital signal processor,DSP)、专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuit,ASIC)、现成可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array,FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件等。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。It should be understood that, in the embodiment of the present application, the processor may be a central processing unit (CPU), and the processor may also be another general-purpose processor, digital signal processor (DSP), or special-purpose integration. Circuit (application specific integrated circuit, ASIC), ready-made programmable gate array (field programmable gate array, FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components, etc. A general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may be any conventional processor or the like.

还应理解,本申请实施例中的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器,或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中,非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM,PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM,EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM,EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM),其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明,许多形式的随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)可用,例如静态随机存取存储器(static RAM,SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM,SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM,DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM,ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synchlink DRAM,SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(direct rambus RAM,DR RAM)。It should also be understood that the memory in the embodiments of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory. Among them, the non-volatile memory may be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), electrical memory Erase programmable read-only memory (EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory. The volatile memory may be a random access memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache. By way of example but not limitation, many forms of random access memory (RAM) are available, such as static random access memory (SRAM), dynamic random access memory (DRAM), synchronous dynamic random access Access memory (synchronous DRAM (SDRAM)), double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (double SDRAM), enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM), synchronous connection dynamic random access Fetch memory (synchlink DRAM, SLDRAM) and direct memory bus random access memory (direct RAMbus RAM, DR RAM).

上述实施例,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或其他任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,上述实施例可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令或计算机程序。在计算机上加载或执行所述计算机指令或计算机程序时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以为通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集合的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如,DVD)、或者半导体介质。半导体介质可以是固态硬盘。The above embodiments may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any other combination. When implemented using software, the above embodiments may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions or computer programs. When the computer instructions or computer programs are loaded or executed on a computer, the processes or functions according to the embodiments of the present application are wholly or partially generated. The computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices. The computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be from a website site, computer, server, or data center Transmission by wire (for example, infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) to another website site, computer, server, or data center. The computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, a data center, and the like, including one or more sets of available media. The usable medium may be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape), an optical medium (for example, a DVD), or a semiconductor medium. The semiconductor medium may be a solid state drive.

应理解,本文中术语“和/或”,仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况。另外,本文中字符“/”,一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。It should be understood that the term “and / or” in this document is only an association relationship describing an associated object, which means that there can be three kinds of relationships, for example, A and / or B can mean: A exists alone, and A and B exist simultaneously. There are three cases of B alone. In addition, the character "/" in this article generally indicates that the related objects are an "or" relationship.

应理解,在本申请的各种实施例中,上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的 先后,各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定,而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。It should be understood that, in the various embodiments of the present application, the size of the sequence numbers of the above processes does not mean the order of execution. The execution order of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not deal with the embodiments of this application The implementation process constitutes any limitation.

本领域普通技术人员可以意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统、装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。Those of ordinary skill in the art may realize that the units and algorithm steps of each example described in connection with the embodiments disclosed herein can be implemented by electronic hardware, or a combination of computer software and electronic hardware. Whether these functions are performed in hardware or software depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Professional technicians can use different methods to implement the described functions for each specific application, but such implementation should not be considered to be beyond the scope of this application. Those skilled in the art can clearly understand that, for the convenience and brevity of description, the specific working processes of the systems, devices, and units described above can refer to the corresponding processes in the foregoing method embodiments, and are not repeated here. In the several embodiments provided in this application, it should be understood that the disclosed systems, devices, and methods may be implemented in other ways. For example, the device embodiments described above are only schematic. For example, the division of the unit is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be another division manner. For example, multiple units or components may be combined or Can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not implemented. In addition, the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, which may be electrical, mechanical or other forms.

所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器、随机存取存储器、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, may be located in one place, or may be distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objective of the solution of this embodiment. In addition, each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each of the units may exist separately physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit. If the functions are implemented in the form of software functional units and sold or used as independent products, they can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of this application is essentially a part that contributes to the existing technology or a part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product. The computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to cause a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to perform all or part of the steps of the method described in the embodiments of the present application. The foregoing storage medium includes various media that can store program codes, such as a U disk, a mobile hard disk, a read-only memory, a random access memory, a magnetic disk, or an optical disk.

以上所述,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。The above is only a specific implementation of this application, but the scope of protection of this application is not limited to this. Any person skilled in the art can easily think of changes or replacements within the technical scope disclosed in this application. It should be covered by the protection scope of this application. Therefore, the protection scope of this application shall be subject to the protection scope of the claims.

Claims (29)

一种接收参考信号的方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for receiving a reference signal, comprising: 终端设备从网络设备接收配置信息,所述配置信息用于指示参考信号的配置参数,其中,所述参考信号的配置参数是根据所述终端设备的非连续接收DRX模式的配置参数确定的,或者,所述DRX模式的配置参数是根据所述参考信号的配置参数确定的;The terminal device receives configuration information from a network device, where the configuration information is used to indicate a configuration parameter of a reference signal, wherein the configuration parameter of the reference signal is determined according to the configuration parameter of the discontinuous reception DRX mode of the terminal device, or The configuration parameters of the DRX mode are determined according to the configuration parameters of the reference signal; 所述终端设备根据所述参考信号的配置参数,从所述网络设备接收参考信号。The terminal device receives a reference signal from the network device according to a configuration parameter of the reference signal. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述参考信号的配置参数包括所述参考信号的发送周期T1,所述DRX模式的配置参数包括DRX的周期T2,其中,The method according to claim 1, wherein the configuration parameter of the reference signal includes a transmission period T1 of the reference signal, and the configuration parameter of the DRX mode includes a period T2 of DRX, wherein, T1=P×T2,其中,P为正整数,或者T1 = P × T2, where P is a positive integer, or T2=Q×T1,其中,Q为正整数。T2 = Q × T1, where Q is a positive integer. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述参考信号的配置参数包括所述参考信号的时域位置偏移量S1,所述DRX模式的配置参数包括所述DRX模式的唤醒时段的时域位置偏移量S2,其中,基于所述S1确定的参考信号的传输起始时刻不早于基于所述S2确定的DRX周期的起始时刻。The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the configuration parameters of the reference signal include a time domain position offset S1 of the reference signal, and the configuration parameters of the DRX mode include wake-up of the DRX mode. The time domain position offset S2 of the time period, wherein the transmission start time of the reference signal determined based on the S1 is not earlier than the start time of the DRX cycle determined based on the S2. 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其特征在于,基于所述S1确定的参考信号的传输起始与基于所述S2确定的DRX周期的起始时刻之间的时间间隔小于或等于所述DRX模式的唤醒时段的长度。The method according to claim 3, wherein a time interval between a transmission start of the reference signal determined based on the S1 and a start time of a DRX cycle determined based on the S2 is less than or equal to the DRX mode The length of the wake-up period. 一种发送参考信号的方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for transmitting a reference signal, comprising: 网络设备向终端设备发送配置信息,所述配置信息用于指示参考信号的配置参数,其中,所述参考信号的配置参数是所述网络设备根据所述终端设备的非连续接收DRX模式的配置参数确定的,或者,所述DRX模式的配置参数是所述网络设备根据所述参考信号的配置参数确定的;The network device sends configuration information to the terminal device, where the configuration information is used to indicate a configuration parameter of a reference signal, wherein the configuration parameter of the reference signal is a configuration parameter of the network device according to the discontinuous reception DRX mode of the terminal device Determined, or the configuration parameters of the DRX mode are determined by the network device according to the configuration parameters of the reference signal; 所述网络设备根据所述参考信号的配置参数,向所述终端设备发送所述参考信号。The network device sends the reference signal to the terminal device according to a configuration parameter of the reference signal. 根据权利要求5所述的方法,其特征在于,所述参考信号的配置参数包括所述参考信号的发送周期T1,所述DRX模式的配置参数包括DRX的周期T2,其中,The method according to claim 5, wherein the configuration parameter of the reference signal includes a transmission period T1 of the reference signal, and the configuration parameter of the DRX mode includes a period T2 of DRX, wherein, T1=P×T2,其中,P为正整数,或者T1 = P × T2, where P is a positive integer, or T2=Q×T1,其中,Q为正整数。T2 = Q × T1, where Q is a positive integer. 根据权利要求5或6所述的方法,其特征在于,所述参考信号的配置参数包括所述参考信号的时域位置偏移量S1,所述DRX模式的配置参数包括所述DRX模式的唤醒时段的时域位置偏移量S2,其中,基于所述S1确定的参考信号的传输起始时刻不早于基于所述S2确定的DRX周期的起始时刻。The method according to claim 5 or 6, wherein the configuration parameters of the reference signal include a time domain position offset S1 of the reference signal, and the configuration parameters of the DRX mode include wake-up of the DRX mode The time domain position offset S2 of the time period, wherein the transmission start time of the reference signal determined based on the S1 is not earlier than the start time of the DRX cycle determined based on the S2. 根据权利要求7所述的方法,其特征在于,基于所述S1确定的参考信号的传输起始与基于所述S2确定的DRX周期的起始时刻之间的时间间隔小于或等于所述DRX模式的唤醒时段的长度。The method according to claim 7, wherein a time interval between a transmission start of the reference signal determined based on the S1 and a start time of a DRX cycle determined based on the S2 is less than or equal to the DRX mode The length of the wake-up period. 一种发送上行信道的方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for sending an uplink channel, comprising: 终端设备从网络设备接收第一重复次数的指示信息,所述第一重复次数属于第一重复次数集合,所述第一重复次数集合包括至少一个重复次数,所述第一重复次数集合专用于 非连续接收DRX模式;The terminal device receives the indication information of the first number of repetitions from the network device, the first number of repetitions belongs to a first number of repetitions set, the first number of repetitions set includes at least one number of repetitions, and the first number of repetitions set is dedicated to non- Continuous receiving DRX mode; 所述终端设备在处于所述DRX模式下的期间内,根据所述第一重复次数发送上行信道。During the period in which the terminal device is in the DRX mode, the terminal device sends an uplink channel according to the first repetition number. 根据权利要求9所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一重复次数集合中最大的重复次数大于或等于第二重复次数集合中最大的重复次数,所述第二重复次数集合包括至少一个重复次数,所述第二重复次数集合用于非DRX模式;或者The method according to claim 9, wherein the maximum number of repetitions in the first set of repetitions is greater than or equal to the maximum number of repetitions in the second set of repetitions, and the second set of repetitions includes at least one repetition Times, the second set of repetition times is used in a non-DRX mode; or 在非DRX模式下上行信道是采用非重复传输方式传输的。In non-DRX mode, the uplink channel is transmitted using non-repeated transmission. 根据权利要求9或10所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端设备在处于所述DRX模式下的期间内,根据所述第一重复次数发送上行信道,包括:The method according to claim 9 or 10, wherein, when the terminal device is in the DRX mode, sending an uplink channel according to the first repetition number comprises: 所述终端设备在处于所述DRX模式下的期间内,在接收到所述上行信道的波束指示信息之前,根据所述第一重复次数发送上行信道。During the period in which the terminal device is in the DRX mode, before receiving the beam indication information of the uplink channel, the terminal device sends the uplink channel according to the first repetition number. 根据权利要求9至11中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 9 to 11, wherein the method further comprises: 所述终端设备在处于所述DRX模式下的期间内,在接收到所述上行信道的波束指示信息之后,向所述网络设备发送确认信息,所述确认信息用于指示所述终端设备接收到所述上行信道的波束指示信息;After the terminal device is in the DRX mode, after receiving the beam indication information of the uplink channel, the terminal device sends confirmation information to the network device, where the confirmation information is used to instruct the terminal device to receive Beam indication information of the uplink channel; 所述终端设备根据第二重复次数发送上行信道,所述第二重复次数属于第二重复次数集合,所述第二重复次数集合包括至少一个重复次数,所述第二重复次数集合专用于非DRX模式;或The terminal device sends an uplink channel according to a second repetition number, the second repetition number belongs to a second repetition number set, the second repetition number set includes at least one repetition number, and the second repetition number set is dedicated to non-DRX Mode; or 所述终端设备采用非重复传输方式发送上行信道。The terminal device sends an uplink channel in a non-repeated transmission manner. 一种接收上行信道的方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for receiving an uplink channel, comprising: 网络设备向终端设备发送第一重复次数的指示信息,所述第一重复次数属于第一重复次数集合,所述第一重复次数集合包括至少一个重复次数,所述第一重复次数集合专用于非连续接收DRX模式;The network device sends the indication information of the first number of repetitions to the terminal device, the first number of repetitions belongs to a first number of repetitions set, the first number of repetitions set includes at least one number of repetitions, and the first number of repetitions set is dedicated to non- Continuous receiving DRX mode; 所述网络设备在所述终端设备在处于所述DRX模式下的期间内,根据所述第一重复次数接收上行信道。The network device receives an uplink channel according to the first repetition number while the terminal device is in the DRX mode. 根据权利要求13所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一重复次数集合中最大的重复次数大于或等于第二重复次数集合中最大的重复次数,所述第二重复次数集合包括至少一个重复次数,所述第二重复次数集合用于非DRX模式;或者The method according to claim 13, wherein the maximum number of repetitions in the first set of repetitions is greater than or equal to the maximum number of repetitions in the second set of repetitions, and the second set of repetitions includes at least one repetition Times, the second set of repetition times is used in a non-DRX mode; or 在非DRX模式下上行信道是采用非重复传输方式传输的。In non-DRX mode, the uplink channel is transmitted using non-repeated transmission. 根据权利要求13或14所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 13 or 14, further comprising: 所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送所述上行信道的波束指示信息;以及Sending, by the network device, beam indication information of the uplink channel to the terminal device; and 所述网络设备在所述终端设备处于所述DRX模式下的期间内,根据所述第一重复次数集合,接收上行信道,包括:The receiving, by the network device, an uplink channel according to the first set of repetition times while the terminal device is in the DRX mode includes: 所述网络设备在所述终端设备处于所述DRX模式下的期间内,在接收到所述终端设备发送的确认信息之前,根据所述第一重复次数接收上行信道,所述确认信息用于指示所述终端设备接收到所述上行信道的波束指示信息。Before the terminal device is in the DRX mode, before receiving the confirmation information sent by the terminal device, the network device receives an uplink channel according to the first repetition number, and the confirmation information is used to indicate Receiving, by the terminal device, beam indication information of the uplink channel. 根据权利要求13至15中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 13 to 15, wherein the method further comprises: 所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送所述上行信道的波束指示信息;Sending, by the network device, beam indication information of the uplink channel to the terminal device; 所述网络设备在所述终端设备处于所述DRX模式下的期间内,在接收到所述终端设 备发送的确认信息之后,根据第二重复次数接收上行信道,所述第二重复次数属于第二重复次数集合,所述第二重复次数集合包括至少一个重复次数,所述第二重复次数集合用于非DRX模式,所述确认信息用于指示所述终端设备接收到所述上行信道的波束指示信息;或During the period when the terminal device is in the DRX mode, after receiving the confirmation information sent by the terminal device, the network device receives an uplink channel according to a second repetition number, and the second repetition number belongs to the second A set of repetition times, the second set of repetition times includes at least one repetition number, the second set of repetition times is used in a non-DRX mode, and the confirmation information is used to indicate that the terminal device receives a beam indication of the uplink channel Information; or 所述网络设备在所述终端设备处于所述DRX模式下的期间内,在接收到所述终端设备发送的确认信息之后,采用非重复传输方式接收上行信道,所述确认信息用于指示所述终端设备接收到所述上行信道的波束指示信息。During the period when the terminal device is in the DRX mode, after receiving the confirmation information sent by the terminal device, the network device receives an uplink channel in a non-repeated transmission manner, and the confirmation information is used to indicate the The terminal device receives the beam indication information of the uplink channel. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, comprising: 通信单元,用于从网络设备接收配置信息,所述配置信息用于指示参考信号的配置参数,其中,所述参考信号的配置参数是根据所述终端设备的非连续接收DRX模式的配置参数确定的,或者,所述DRX模式的配置参数是根据所述参考信号的配置参数确定的;A communication unit configured to receive configuration information from a network device, where the configuration information is used to indicate a configuration parameter of a reference signal, wherein the configuration parameter of the reference signal is determined according to a configuration parameter of a discontinuous reception DRX mode of the terminal device Or, the configuration parameter of the DRX mode is determined according to the configuration parameter of the reference signal; 处理单元用于根据所述参考信号的配置参数,控制所述通信单元从所述网络设备接收参考信号。The processing unit is configured to control the communication unit to receive a reference signal from the network device according to a configuration parameter of the reference signal. 根据权利要求17所述的装置,其特征在于,所述参考信号的配置参数包括所述参考信号的发送周期T1,所述DRX模式的配置参数包括DRX的周期T2,其中,T1=P×T2,其中,P为正整数,或者T2=Q×T1,其中,Q为正整数;和/或The device according to claim 17, wherein the configuration parameter of the reference signal includes a transmission period T1 of the reference signal, and the configuration parameter of the DRX mode includes a period T2 of DRX, where T1 = P × T2 , Where P is a positive integer, or T2 = Q × T1, where Q is a positive integer; and / or 所述参考信号的配置参数包括所述参考信号的时域位置偏移量S1,所述DRX模式的配置参数包括所述DRX模式的唤醒时段的时域位置偏移量S2,其中,基于所述S1确定的参考信号的传输起始时刻不早于基于所述S2确定的DRX周期的起始时刻,并且,基于所述S1确定的参考信号的传输起始与基于所述S2确定的DRX周期的起始时刻之间的时间间隔小于或等于所述DRX模式的唤醒时段的长度。The configuration parameter of the reference signal includes a time domain position offset S1 of the reference signal, and the configuration parameter of the DRX mode includes a time domain position offset S2 of a wake-up period of the DRX mode, wherein based on the The transmission start time of the reference signal determined by S1 is not earlier than the start time of the DRX cycle determined based on the S2, and the transmission start time of the reference signal determined based on the S1 and the DRX cycle determined based on the S2 The time interval between the start times is less than or equal to the length of the wake-up period of the DRX mode. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, comprising: 处理单元,用于根据终端设备的非连续接收DRX模式的配置参数确定参考信号的配置参数,或根据所述参考信号的配置参数确定DRX模式的配置参数;A processing unit, configured to determine the configuration parameter of the reference signal according to the configuration parameter of the discontinuous reception DRX mode of the terminal device, or determine the configuration parameter of the DRX mode according to the configuration parameter of the reference signal; 通信单元,用于向终端设备发送配置信息,所述配置信息用于指示参考信号的配置参数,并根据所述参考信号的配置参数,向所述终端设备发送参考信号。The communication unit is configured to send configuration information to a terminal device, where the configuration information is used to indicate a configuration parameter of a reference signal, and send a reference signal to the terminal device according to the configuration parameter of the reference signal. 根据权利要求19所述的装置,其特征在于,所述参考信号的配置参数包括所述参考信号的发送周期T1,所述DRX模式的配置参数包括DRX的周期T2,其中,T1=P×T2,其中,P为正整数,或者T2=Q×T1,其中,Q为正整数;和/或The device according to claim 19, wherein the configuration parameter of the reference signal includes a transmission period T1 of the reference signal, and the configuration parameter of the DRX mode includes a period T2 of DRX, where T1 = P × T2 , Where P is a positive integer, or T2 = Q × T1, where Q is a positive integer; and / or 所述参考信号的配置参数包括所述参考信号的时域位置偏移量S1,所述DRX模式的配置参数包括所述DRX模式的唤醒时段的时域位置偏移量S2,其中,基于所述S1确定的参考信号的传输起始时刻不早于基于所述S2确定的DRX周期的起始时刻,并且,基于所述S1确定的参考信号的传输起始与基于所述S2确定的DRX周期的起始时刻之间的时间间隔小于或等于所述DRX模式的唤醒时段的长度。The configuration parameter of the reference signal includes a time domain position offset S1 of the reference signal, and the configuration parameter of the DRX mode includes a time domain position offset S2 of a wake-up period of the DRX mode, wherein based on the The transmission start time of the reference signal determined by S1 is not earlier than the start time of the DRX cycle determined based on the S2, and the transmission start time of the reference signal determined based on the S1 and the DRX cycle determined based on the S2 The time interval between the start times is less than or equal to the length of the wake-up period of the DRX mode. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, comprising: 通信单元,用于从网络设备接收第一重复次数的指示信息,所述第一重复次数属于第一重复次数集合,所述第一重复次数集合包括至少一个重复次数,所述第一重复次数集合专用于非连续接收DRX模式;A communication unit, configured to receive indication information of a first number of repetitions from a network device, where the first number of repetitions belongs to a first number of repetitions set, the first number of repetitions set includes at least one number of repetitions, and the first number of repetitions set Dedicated to discontinuous reception DRX mode; 处理单元,用于在处于所述DRX模式下的期间内,控制通信单元根据所述第一重复 次数发送上行信道。The processing unit is configured to control the communication unit to send an uplink channel according to the first repetition number during a period in the DRX mode. 根据权利要求21所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一重复次数集合中最大的重复次数大于或等于第二重复次数集合中最大的重复次数,所述第二重复次数集合包括至少一个重复次数,所述第二重复次数集合用于非DRX模式;或者The apparatus according to claim 21, wherein the maximum number of repetitions in the first set of repetitions is greater than or equal to the maximum number of repetitions in the second set of repetitions, and the second set of repetitions includes at least one repetition Times, the second set of repetition times is used in a non-DRX mode; or 在非DRX模式下上行信道是采用非重复传输方式传输的。In non-DRX mode, the uplink channel is transmitted using non-repeated transmission. 根据权利要求21或22所述的装置,其特征在于,所述处理单元用于在处于所述DRX模式下的期间内,在所述通信单元接收到所述上行信道的波束指示信息之前,控制所述通信单元根据所述第一重复次数发送上行信道;The apparatus according to claim 21 or 22, wherein the processing unit is configured to control, before the communication unit receives beam indication information of the uplink channel, during a period in the DRX mode. Sending, by the communication unit, an uplink channel according to the first repetition number; 所述处理单元用于在处于所述DRX模式下的期间内,在所述通信单元接收到所述上行信道的波束指示信息之后,控制所述通信单元向所述网络设备发送确认信息,所述确认信息用于指示所述终端设备接收到所述上行信道的波束指示信息,并控制所述通信单元根据第二重复次数发送上行信道,所述第二重复次数属于第二重复次数集合,所述第二重复次数集合包括至少一个重复次数,所述第二重复次数集合专用于非DRX模式;或控制所述通信单元采用非重复传输方式发送上行信道。The processing unit is configured to control the communication unit to send confirmation information to the network device after the communication unit receives the beam indication information of the uplink channel during the period in the DRX mode. The confirmation information is used to indicate that the terminal device receives the beam indication information of the uplink channel, and controls the communication unit to send the uplink channel according to a second repetition number, where the second repetition number belongs to a second repetition number set, and The second set of repetition times includes at least one repetition number, and the second set of repetition times is dedicated to a non-DRX mode; or the communication unit is controlled to send an uplink channel in a non-repeated transmission manner. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, comprising: 通信单元,用于向终端设备发送第一重复次数的指示信息,所述第一重复次数属于第一重复次数集合,所述第一重复次数集合包括至少一个重复次数,所述第一重复次数集合专用于非连续接收DRX模式;A communication unit, configured to send indication information of a first number of repetitions to a terminal device, where the first number of repetitions belongs to a first number of repetitions set, and the first number of repetitions set includes at least one number of repetitions, Dedicated to discontinuous reception DRX mode; 处理单元,用于在所述终端设备在处于所述DRX模式下的期间内,控制所述通信单元根据所述第一重复次数接收上行信道。A processing unit, configured to control the communication unit to receive an uplink channel according to the first repetition number while the terminal device is in the DRX mode. 根据权利要求24所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一重复次数集合中最大的重复次数大于或等于第二重复次数集合中最大的重复次数,所述第二重复次数集合包括至少一个重复次数,所述第二重复次数集合用于非DRX模式;或者The device according to claim 24, wherein the maximum number of repetitions in the first set of repetitions is greater than or equal to the maximum number of repetitions in the second set of repetitions, and the second set of repetitions includes at least one repetition Times, the second set of repetition times is used in a non-DRX mode; or 在非DRX模式下上行信道是采用非重复传输方式传输的。In non-DRX mode, the uplink channel is transmitted using non-repeated transmission. 根据权利要求24或25所述的装置,其特征在于,所述通信单元还用于向所述终端设备发送所述上行信道的波束指示信息;以及The apparatus according to claim 24 or 25, wherein the communication unit is further configured to send beam indication information of the uplink channel to the terminal device; and 所述处理单元具体用于在所述终端设备处于所述DRX模式下的期间内,在所述通信单元接收到所述终端设备发送的确认信息之前,控制所述通信单元根据所述第一重复次数接收上行信道,所述确认信息用于指示所述终端设备接收到所述上行信道的波束指示信息;或The processing unit is specifically configured to control the communication unit according to the first repetition during the period when the terminal device is in the DRX mode and before the communication unit receives the confirmation information sent by the terminal device. Receiving the uplink channel a number of times, and the confirmation information is used to instruct the terminal device to receive beam indication information of the uplink channel; or 所述处理单元具体用于在所述终端设备处于所述DRX模式下的期间内,在所述通信单元接收到所述终端设备发送的确认信息之后,控制所述通信单元根据第二重复次数接收上行信道,所述第二重复次数属于第二重复次数集合,所述第二重复次数集合包括至少一个重复次数,所述第二重复次数集合用于非DRX模式,所述确认信息用于指示所述终端设备接收到所述上行信道的波束指示信息;或控制所述通信单元采用非重复传输方式接收上行信道,所述确认信息用于指示所述终端设备接收到所述上行信道的波束指示信息。The processing unit is specifically configured to control the communication unit to receive according to a second repetition number after the communication unit receives the confirmation information sent by the terminal device while the terminal device is in the DRX mode. For an uplink channel, the second repetition number belongs to a second repetition number set, the second repetition number set includes at least one repetition number, the second repetition number set is used in a non-DRX mode, and the confirmation information is used to indicate all The terminal device receives the beam indication information of the uplink channel; or controls the communication unit to receive the uplink channel in a non-repeated transmission manner, and the confirmation information is used to instruct the terminal device to receive the beam indication information of the uplink channel . 一种通信设备,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, comprising: 处理器,用于执行存储器中存储的计算机程序,以使得所述通信设备执行权利要求1至16中任一项所述的方法。A processor for executing a computer program stored in a memory, so that the communication device executes the method according to any one of claims 1 to 16. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,所述计算机可读存储介质上存储有计算机程序,当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1至16中任意一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, characterized in that a computer program is stored on the computer-readable storage medium, and when the computer program is run on a computer, the computer executes any one of claims 1 to 16 Item. 一种芯片系统,其特征在于,包括:处理器,用于从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序,使得安装有所述芯片系统的通信设备执行如权利要求1至16中任意一项所述的方法。A chip system, comprising: a processor, configured to call and run a computer program from a memory, so that a communication device on which the chip system is installed executes the method according to any one of claims 1 to 16. .
PCT/CN2019/099099 2018-08-06 2019-08-02 Method for receiving reference signal, and communication apparatus Ceased WO2020029890A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201810885487.4 2018-08-06
CN201810885487.4A CN110809331B (en) 2018-08-06 2018-08-06 Method and communication device for receiving reference signal

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020029890A1 true WO2020029890A1 (en) 2020-02-13

Family

ID=69413386

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2019/099099 Ceased WO2020029890A1 (en) 2018-08-06 2019-08-02 Method for receiving reference signal, and communication apparatus

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN110809331B (en)
WO (1) WO2020029890A1 (en)

Cited By (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN111989592A (en) * 2020-07-16 2020-11-24 北京小米移动软件有限公司 Ranging method, apparatus, device and readable storage medium in synchronization system
CN113853007A (en) * 2020-06-28 2021-12-28 华为技术有限公司 Communication method and device
CN115299092A (en) * 2020-04-16 2022-11-04 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Wireless link measuring method, electronic equipment and storage medium
WO2023051529A1 (en) * 2021-09-29 2023-04-06 维沃移动通信有限公司 Reference signal processing method and apparatus, terminal, and medium
WO2025054101A1 (en) * 2023-09-06 2025-03-13 Qualcomm Incorporated Discontinuous communication configuration associated with a position estimation session or a sensing operation

Families Citing this family (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN113395780B (en) * 2020-03-13 2023-09-12 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 Uplink channel transmission method, device, base station, terminal and storage medium
WO2022021445A1 (en) * 2020-07-31 2022-02-03 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Measurement method, terminal device and network device
CN111970722B (en) * 2020-08-21 2024-03-19 宁夏隆基宁光仪表股份有限公司 Intelligent instrument communication mode optimization method based on NB communication
WO2022082459A1 (en) * 2020-10-20 2022-04-28 北京小米移动软件有限公司 Communication method and apparatus, network device, user equipment, and storage medium
CN116095817A (en) * 2021-10-29 2023-05-09 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 Positioning reference signal configuration method and device, LMF, base station, AMF and terminal
CN116582882A (en) * 2022-01-30 2023-08-11 华为技术有限公司 A communication method and communication device
CN117676932A (en) * 2022-08-10 2024-03-08 维沃移动通信有限公司 Configuration method, device, user equipment and network side equipment

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN105474682A (en) * 2013-08-12 2016-04-06 瑞典爱立信有限公司 Clustered periodic gaps for measurements in heterogeneous network
CN105790881A (en) * 2014-12-16 2016-07-20 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Method and device for determining start of discontinuous reception cycle
CN107018497A (en) * 2017-03-24 2017-08-04 电信科学技术研究院 A kind of paging method and device
US20170295601A1 (en) * 2014-08-22 2017-10-12 Lg Electronics Inc. Method for device-to-device communication in wireless communication system and apparatus therefor

Family Cites Families (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2015133823A1 (en) * 2014-03-04 2015-09-11 Lg Electronics Inc. Method of receiving control information for receiving discovery reference signal and apparatus thereof
JP6937685B2 (en) * 2014-08-15 2021-09-22 インターデイジタル パテント ホールディングス インコーポレイテッド Support for random access and paging procedures for reduced capabilities WTRU in LTE systems
WO2016111219A1 (en) * 2015-01-08 2016-07-14 シャープ株式会社 Terminal device, monitoring method, and integrated circuit
JP6785664B2 (en) * 2015-01-28 2020-11-18 シャープ株式会社 Terminal equipment, base station equipment and methods
CN107615828B (en) * 2015-05-15 2021-10-26 夏普株式会社 Terminal device, base station device, and method

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN105474682A (en) * 2013-08-12 2016-04-06 瑞典爱立信有限公司 Clustered periodic gaps for measurements in heterogeneous network
US20170295601A1 (en) * 2014-08-22 2017-10-12 Lg Electronics Inc. Method for device-to-device communication in wireless communication system and apparatus therefor
CN105790881A (en) * 2014-12-16 2016-07-20 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Method and device for determining start of discontinuous reception cycle
CN107018497A (en) * 2017-03-24 2017-08-04 电信科学技术研究院 A kind of paging method and device

Cited By (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN115299092A (en) * 2020-04-16 2022-11-04 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Wireless link measuring method, electronic equipment and storage medium
CN113853007A (en) * 2020-06-28 2021-12-28 华为技术有限公司 Communication method and device
CN113853007B (en) * 2020-06-28 2024-05-10 华为技术有限公司 Communication method and device
CN111989592A (en) * 2020-07-16 2020-11-24 北京小米移动软件有限公司 Ranging method, apparatus, device and readable storage medium in synchronization system
CN111989592B (en) * 2020-07-16 2024-04-16 北京小米移动软件有限公司 Ranging method, device, equipment and readable storage medium in synchronization system
WO2023051529A1 (en) * 2021-09-29 2023-04-06 维沃移动通信有限公司 Reference signal processing method and apparatus, terminal, and medium
WO2025054101A1 (en) * 2023-09-06 2025-03-13 Qualcomm Incorporated Discontinuous communication configuration associated with a position estimation session or a sensing operation

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN110809331B (en) 2022-06-14
CN110809331A (en) 2020-02-18

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US12167334B2 (en) Reference signal receiving method, reference signal sending method, and apparatus
WO2020029890A1 (en) Method for receiving reference signal, and communication apparatus
US11937254B2 (en) Wireless communcation method, terminal device, and network device
WO2020063896A1 (en) Signal processing method and device
WO2021204215A1 (en) Drx control method and apparatus
WO2020052492A1 (en) Method for monitoring physical downlink control channel, communication device, and network device
WO2021056587A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2020000269A1 (en) Method for transmitting signal, network apparatus, and terminal apparatus
US20250159662A1 (en) Priority-based transmission method and transmission apparatus
CN114337969B (en) Wireless communication method, terminal device and network device
KR20220038425A (en) Power saving signal transmission method, base station and terminal equipment
WO2021062775A1 (en) Paging message detection method and apparatus, and communication device
WO2019238007A1 (en) Method and apparatus for detecting beam
WO2022257796A1 (en) Communication method and communication apparatus
WO2023241288A1 (en) Wake-up signal transmission method and communication system
WO2024066909A1 (en) Communication method, apparatus and system
WO2020097920A1 (en) Parameter reconfiguration method and device
WO2022152045A1 (en) Information transmission method and information transmission apparatus
CN111132277B (en) Communication method and communication device
WO2020164487A1 (en) Wireless communication method and apparatus
US20250048264A1 (en) Signal transmission method and communication apparatus
WO2025214209A1 (en) Communication method and communication apparatus
WO2025214208A1 (en) Communication method and communication apparatus
WO2023202350A1 (en) Data transmission method and apparatus
WO2024169648A1 (en) Communication method, apparatus and system

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 19847161

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 19847161

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1